Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutTelacu Construction Management; 2006-07-26; PWS06-22ENG Part 3 of 3SECTION 10160 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal toilet compartments. B. Urinal and Vestibule screens. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Concealed steel support members. B. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Concealed steel support members. C. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Concealed wood framing and blocking for compartment support. D. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Concealed wood blocking for compartment support. E. Section 10800 - Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 653/A 6653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2004a. B. ASTM A 666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2003. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3 - Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate partition plan, elevation views, dimensions, details of wall and ceiling supports, door swings, hardware, installation details and other related items. C. Product Data: Provide data on panel construction, hardware, and accessories. D. Samples: Submit four samples of partition panels, 6x6 inch in size illustrating panel finish, color, and sheen. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. F. Maintenance data. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the work with placement of support framing and anchors in wall and ceiling. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Metal Toilet Compartments: 1. Global Steel Products Corp: www.globalpartitions.com. 2. Substitutions: See Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.6 - Trade Names or Equals. 2.02 MATERIALS Carlsbad City Library Learning Center METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10160 -1 A. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Toilet Compartments: Stainless steel, ceiling-hung. B. Doors, Panels, and Pilasters: Sheet steel faces, pressure bonded to sound deadening core, formed and closed edges, mitered and welded comers ground smooth. 1. Panel Faces: 20 gage. 2. Door Faces: 20 gage. 3. Pilaster Faces: 16 gage. 4. Reinforcement: 12 gage. 5. Internal Reinforcement: Provide in areas of attached hardware and fittings. Mark locations of reinforcement for partition mounted washroom accessories. C. Door and Panel Dimensions: 1. Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Door Width: 24 inch. 3. Door Width for Handicapped Use: 36 inch, out-swinging. 4. Height: 58 inch. D. Pilasters: 1-1/4 inch thick, of sizes required to suit compartment width and spacing. E. Urinal Screen Splash Panels: Stainless steel sheet 30 inch wide x 42 inch high mounted on partitions adjacent to urinals. Fasten with stainless steel screws spaced 8 inches on center. 2.04 FINISHING A. Stainless Steel Compartments: No. 4 finish. PARTS EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. C. Verify correct spacing of and between plumbing fixtures. D. Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage, and bracing. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install partitions secure, rigid, plumb, and level in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Maintain 3/8 to 1/2 inch space between wall and panels and between wall and end pilasters. C. Attached panel brackets securely to walls using anchor devices. D. Attach panels and pilasters to brackets. Locate head rail joints at pilaster center lines. 3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/4 inch. B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/8 inch. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors, not exceeding 3/16 inch. B. Adjust hinges to position doors in partial opening position when unlatched. Return out swinging Carlsbad City Library Learning Center METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10160 -2 doors to closed position. C. Adjust adjacent components for consistency of line or plane. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10160 -3 SECTION 10210 WALL LOUVERS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Louvers, frames, and accessories. 1.02 REFERENCES A. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 1998. B. AMCA 500-L - Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 1999. C. AMCA 511 - Certified Ratings Program for Air Control Devices; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 1999(Rev2004). D. ASTM A 666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Ban 2003. E. ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2004. F. ASTM B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2004a. G. ASTM B 221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes (Metric); 2004. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3 - Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data describing design characteristics, maximum recommended air velocity, design free area, materials and finishes. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate louver layout plan and elevations, opening and clearance dimensions, tolerances; head, jamb and sill details; blade configuration, screens, blankout areas required, and frames. D. Samples: Submit two samples 2 by 2 inches in size illustrating finish and color of exterior and interior surfaces. E. Test Reports: Independent agency reports showing compliance with specified performance criteria. F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type specified in this section, with minimum five years of documented experience. 1.05 WARRANTY A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 6-8 - Completion and Acceptance, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide twenty year manufacturer warranty against distortion, metal degradation, and failure of connections. 1. Finish: Include coverage against degradation of exterior finish. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center WALL LOUVERS 10210 -1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Wall Louvers: 1. Construction Specialties, Inc: www.c-sgroup.com. 2. Substitutions: See Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.6 - Trade Names or Equals. 2.02 LOUVERS A. Louvers: Factory fabricated and assembled, complete with frame, mullions, and accessories; AMCA Certified under AMCA 511. 1. Wind Load Resistance: Design to resist positive and negative wind load of 25 psf without damage or permanent deformation. 2. Drainable Blades: Continuous rain stop at front or rear of blade aligned with vertical gutter recessed into both jambs of frame. 3. Screens: Provide insect screens at intake louvers and bird screens at exhaust louvers. B. Stationary Louvers Type "A6097": Horizontal blade, extruded aluminum construction, with concealed intermediate mullions. 1. Free Area: 50 percent, minimum. 2. Static Pressure Loss: 0.24 inch wg maximum per square foot of free area at velocity of 1213 fpm, when tested in accordance with AMCA 500-L. 3. Blades: Drainable. 4.. Frame: 6 inches deep, channel profile; corner joints mitered and mechanically fastened, with continuous recessed caulking channel each side. 5. Metal Thickness: Frame 0.081 inch; blades 0.081 inch. a. Blades to be one piece aluminum extrusions with gutters designed to catch and direct water to jamb and mullion drains. 6. Finish: Color anodized. 7. Color: Medium bronze. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), 6063 alloy, T5 or T6 temper,. 1. Color Anodizing: Class I, AA-M12C22A42/44 complying with AAMA 611. B. Bird Screen: Interwoven wire mesh of aluminum, 0.063 inch diameter wire, 1/2 inch open weave, diagonal design. C. Insect Screen: 18x16 size aluminum mesh. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Blank-Off Panels: Same material as louver, painted black on exterior side; provide where duct connected to louver is smaller than louver frame, sealing off louver area outside duct. B. Screens: Frame of same material as louver, with reinforced comers; removable, screw attached; installed on inside face of louver frame. C. Fasteners and Anchors: Stainless steel. D. Head and Sill Flashings: See Section 07620. E. Sealant: silicone type, as specified in Section 07900. PARTS EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that prepared openings and flashings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions Carlsbad City Library Learning Center WALL LOUVERS are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install louver assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install louvers level and plumb. C. Install flashings and align louver assembly to ensure moisture shed from flashings and diversion of moisture to exterior. D. Louvers and sill flashings to be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended procedures to ensure complete water integrity performance of the louver system. E. Secure louver frames in openings with concealed fasteners. F. Install perimeter sealant and backing rod in accordance with Section 07900. 3.03 CLEANING A. Strip protective finish coverings. B. Clean surfaces and components. 3.04 SCHEDULES A. Elevator Tower- West and South Wall: hinged bird screen, insect screen, prefinished to match adjacent window frames. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center WALL LOUVERS SECTION 10440 INTERIOR SIGNAGE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Interior signage of the following types: 1. ADA compliant interior signage, with raised borders. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Useable Buildings and Facilities; 1998. B. ATBCB ADAAG - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG); U.S. Architectural Transportation Barriers Compliance Board; 2004. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions, Section 2-5.3.3 - Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive literature. C. Shop Drawings: List sign styles, lettering, locations and dimensions of each interior sign. D. Selection Samples: One complete set of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors. E. Verification Samples: Two full size samples, representing type, style and color specified including method of attachment. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of ANSI/ICC A117.1 and ADAAG. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inspect products upon receipt. Store products in manufacturer's packaging until ready for installation. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Best Sign Systems; 1202 N. Park Avenue, P. O. Box 577, Montrose, CO 81402. ASD. TEL: (800) 235-BEST. FAX (970) 249-0223. Email: sales@bestsigns.com www.bestsigns.com. 2.02 INTERIOR SIGNS A. ADA-Compliant Interior Signage with Raised Borders: 1. Style: HC300 ADA System by Best Sign Systems. 2. Type: Four-in one construction with raised borders; three-ply melamine plastic laminate with phenolic core signs with lettering and symbols raised 1/32 inch from sign plate face; and 3/8 inch wide, 1/32 inch raised perimeter border with 1/8 inch inside radius. 3. Sign Thickness: 1/8 inch thick or 1/4 inch thick as required. 4. Construction: One-piece; added-on or engraved characters not acceptable. 5. Lettering Style: Selected from manufacturer's standard sans serif or simple serif typefaces, Carlsbad City Library Learning Center INTERIOR SIGNAGE 10440 -1 upper case. 6. Braille: Grade 2 Braille, placed directly below last line of letters or numbers. 7. Performance: Non-static, fire-retardant, and self-extinguishing. 8. Contrast: Letters numbers and symbols shall contrast with background. 9. Comers: Outside radius, 1/2 inch. 10. Color of Plastic: white information on black background. 11. Finish of Plastic: Matte. 12. Color of Background: black background, as selected from manufacurer's standard colors. 13. Letter and Number Sizes: a. Room numbers, 5/8 inch. b. Lettering for room usage and directional identification, 5/8 inch. c. Lettering for restroom identification, 5/8 inch high; corresponding symbols 3 inches high. 14. Sign Margins: Letters and numbers centered on sign. 15. Sign Sizes: a. Restroom signs, 6 by 8 inches b. Directional signs, 6 by 6 inches. c. Room identification signs, 6 by 6 inches. d. Room identification signs, 8 by 6 inches. e. Room identification signs, 8 by 8 inches. f. Room identification signs, 10 by 3 inches. g. Room identification signs, 6 by 6 inches with 5 by 1 inches window opening for occupant's name; insert 5-9/16 by 1-1/8 inches. h. Room identification sign insert cover, Lexan, size as required, i. Room identification signs, 8 by 8 inches with 8 by 1 inches slot opening for occupant's name; insert shall be 8 by 1 inches. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine installation areas to ensure that conditions are suitable for installation. B. Examine signage for defects prior to installation. Do not install damaged signage. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Verify mounting heights and locations for interior signage will comply with referenced standards. B. Clean mounting locations of dirt, dust, grease or similar conditions that would prevent proper installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install signs level, plumb, without distortion, and in proper relationship with adjacent surfaces using manufacturer's recommended standard mounting system. 1. Mounting: Mount with vinyl foam tape. B. Remove adhesive from exposed sign surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. C. Clean signs after installation as recommended by manufacturer. D. Replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. 3.04 INTERIOR SIGNAGE SCHEDULE A. Refer to the list of interior signs required for the project as attached to this Section. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center INTERIOR SIGNAGE 10440 -2 SECTION 10500 LOCKERS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Locker units with hinged doors. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2004a. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3 - Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on locker types, sizes and accessories. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate locker plan layout, numbering plan. D. Samples: Submit two samples 3x6 inches in size, of each color selected; applied to specified base metal. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Protect locker finish and adjacent surfaces from damage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Lockers: 1. Art Metal Products: www.artmetalproducts.com. 2. Penco Products, Inc: www.pencoproducts.com. 3. Republic Storage Systems Co: www.republicstorage.com. 4. Substitutions: See Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.6 - Trade Names or Equals. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Sheet Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M SS Grade 33/230, with G60/Z180 coating, stretcher leveled; to the following minimum thicknesses: 1. Body and Shelf: 24 gage, 0.024 inch. 2. Door Outer Face: 18 gage, 0.048 inch. 3. Door Inner Face: 20 gage, 0.036 inch. 4. Door Frame: 16 gage, 0.060 inch. 5. Hinges: 14 gage, 0.075 inch. 6. Base: 20 gage, 0.036 inch. 7. Trim: 20 gage, 0.036 inch. B. Accessories For Each Locker: Two single prong wall hooks, coat hanger bar. 2.03 LOCKER UNITS A. Width: 9 inches. B. Depth: 12 inches. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center LOCKERS 10500 -1 C. Height: 72 inches. D. Configuration: double tier and quadruple tier. E. Mounting: Surface mounted. F. Base: Metal base. 1. Base Height: 4 inch. G. Top: Sloped metal with closures. H. Locking: Equipped for combination locks. I. Ventilation Method: Door louvers. J. Class: Quiet. K. Locker Body: Formed and flanged; with steel stiffener ribs; electric spot welded. L. Doors: Hollow double pan, sandwich construction, 1-3/16 inch thick; welded construction, channel reinforced top and bottom with intermediate stiffener ribs, grind and finish edges smooth. M. Hinges: Two for doors under 42 inches high; three for doors over 42 inches high; weld securely to locker body and door. N. Locking device supplied by Carlsbad City Library. O. Form recess for operating handle and locking device. P. Finish edges smooth without burrs. 2.04 FINISHING A. Paint locker units 1 color, as selected. PARTS EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that prepared bases are in correct position and configuration. B. Verify bases and embedded anchors are properly sized. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install lockers plumb and square. C. Place and secure on prepared base. D. Secure lockers with anchor devices to suit substrate materials. Minimum Pullout Force: 100 Ib. E. Bolt adjoining locker units together to provide rigid installation. F. Install accessories. G. Replace components that do not operate smoothly. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean locker interiors and exterior surfaces. 3.04 SCHEDULES A. Room 106: 9 inches wide, 12 inches deep, 72 inches high, double tier; see Accessories above. B. Room 211: 9 inches wide, 12 inches deep, 72 inches high, double tier; see Accessories above. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center LOCKERS C. Room 215: 9 inches wide, 12 inches deep, 72 inches high, quadruple tier; see Accessories above. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center LOCKERS SECTION 10523 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fire extinguishers. B. Fire extinguisher cabinets. C. Accessories. 1.02 REFERENCES A. NFPA10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers; National Fire Protection Association; 2002. B. UL (FPED) - Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to NFPA 10. B. Provide extinguishers classified and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3 - Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features and color and finish. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special criteria and wall opening coordination requirements. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Maintenance Data: Include test, refill or recharge schedules and re-certification requirements. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperature may cause freezing of extinguisher ingredients. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets and Accessories: 1. JL Industries, Inc: www.jlindustries.com. 2. Larsen's Manufacturing Co: www.larsensmfg.com. 3. Potter-Roemer www.potterroemer.com. 4. Substitutions: See Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.6 - Trade Names or Equals. 2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Dry Chemical Type: Stainless steel tank, with pressure gage. 1. Size and classification as scheduled. 2. Finish: Baked enamel, red color. B. Carbon Dioxide Type: Stainless steel tank, with pressure gage. 1. Size and classification as scheduled. 2. Finish: Baked enamel, red color. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES 2.03 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS A. Metal: Formed aluminum. B. Cabinet Configuration: Semi-recessed type. 1. Sized to accommodate accessories. 2. Trim less type. C. Door: 0.036 inch thick, reinforced for flatness and rigidity; latch. Hinge doors for 180 degree opening with continuous piano hinge. Provide nylon catch. D. Door Glazing: Glass, clear, 1/8 inch thick tempered. Set in resilient channel gasket glazing. E. Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet. Pre-drill for anchors. F. Weld, fill, and grind components smooth. G. Finish of Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door: Anodized to medium bronze color. H. Finish of Cabinet Interior: White enamel. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Extinguisher Brackets: Formed steel, galvanized and enamel finished. PARTS EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings, at height indicated. C. Secure rigidly in place. D. Place extinguishers and accessories in cabinets. 3.03 SCHEDULES A. Room 101: Dry chemical type 2A1OBC in semi-recessed cabinet. B. Room 106: Dry chemical type 4A40BC in semi-recessed cabinet. C. Room 115: Dry chemical type 4A40BC in semi-recessed cabinet. D. Room 116: Dry chemical type 2A1 OBC in semi-recessed cabinet. E. Rooms 126,127, 128: Dry chemical type 4A20BC in semi-recessed cabinet. F. Room 201: Dry chemical type 2A10BC in semi-recessed cabinet. G. Room 214: Carbon Dioxide 40BC in semi-recessed cabinet. H. Room 221: Dry chemical type 2A1 OBC in semi-recessed cabinet. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES 10523 -2 SECTION 10800 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Accessories for toilet rooms and utility rooms. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08830 - Mirrors: Other mirrors. B. Section 10160 - Metal Toilet Compartments. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 123/A 123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2002. B. ASTM A 666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2003. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3 - Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, attachment methods. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and conditions requiring special attention. 1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work with the placement of internal wall reinforcement and reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Toilet Accessories: 1. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 2. Substitutions: See Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.6 - Trade Names or Equals. B. All items of each type to be made by the same manufacturer. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Accessories - General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged complete with anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. 1. Grind welded joints smooth. 2. Fabricate units made of metal sheet of seamless sheets, with flat surfaces. B. Keys: Provide two keys for each accessory to Carlsbad City Library; master key all lockable accessories. C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304. D. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized, tamper-proof, security type. E. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for Carlsbad City Library Learning Center TOILET, BATH, AND LAU NDRY ACCESSORIES component and substrate. 2.03 FINISHES A. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin brushed finish, unless otherwise noted. B. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis. 2.04 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES A. Toilet Room Accessories: As indicated on drawings - see Restroom Accessory Schedule, Sheet A7.0. 2.05 UTILITY ROOM ACCESSORIES A. Mop and Broom Holder: 0.05 inch thick stainless steel, Type 304, hat-shaped channel. 1. Holders: 3 spring-loaded rubber cam holders. 2. Length: Manufacturer's standard length for number of holders. PARTS EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation. C. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on drawings. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation. B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. C. Mounting Heights and Locations: As required by accessibility regulations and as indicated on drawings END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 10800 -2 SECTION 11050 LIBRARY BOOKSTACKS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Stack shelving system. B. Stack end panels and canopy tops 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Institute of Steel Construction: Manual of Steel Construction, Eighth Edition, 1980 (AISC). B. American Iron and Steel Institute: Cold Formed Steel Design Manual, 1977 Edition (AISI). C. ASTM A283-84AAa - Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars. D. International Conference of Building Officials: Uniform Building Code, 1979 Edition (UBC). 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Stacks shall be single or double as shown on floor plan, cantilever, unit construction design with individual welded frame assemblies. Starter and adder combinations or welded frame every other unit are not acceptable. Commercial or case type shelving will not be considered. Modular construction shall be such that all components of stack section may be divided for rearrangement without procuring additional components. Double face units must have the ability to be converted into single face units without procuring additional components. Any sway bracing and/or X-type bracing is not acceptable. Shelving system shall be fabricated in 24", 30" and 36" widths to accommodate field conditions at no additional cost. 1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. The entire bookstack system, including columns, bases, all connections and anchorage shall be capable of resisting a lateral seismic force, Fp = 0.30 Wp, in any direction, acting simultaneously with a vertical seismic force equal to one third of the horizontal force Fp. 1. Wb is defined as "the total weight of the shelving system plus 30 p.s.f. of shelving to account for book storage." B. All allowable stresses and other design criteria shall be as permitted by the applicable code. C. Stresses and deflections shall be investigated for shelves fully loaded in combination with seismic forces, and loaded one side on combination with seismic forces. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3 - Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Manufacturer's literature which illustrates components proposed, and name and address of Manufacturer's designated California Area representative. C. Shop Drawings: Show actual field dimensions, complete shelving layout, relationship and connections to structure, and details of erection and assembly. Identify shelving by types as noted in specifications and on floor plan. Submit fabrication drawing of bookstacks detailing how a double face unit can be converted into a single face unit without procuring additional components. Provide seismic calculations, signed by a California licensed structural engineer indicating bookstacks and anchorage to structural slab through access floor comply with applicable building codes. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center LIBRARY BOOKSTACKS 11050 -1 D. Samples: Submit two 6x6 inch samples of painted metal in custom color as specified by Architect. E. Guarantee: Furnish a written guarantee on all bookstacks for a period of one year from time of acceptance. All defects due to improper fabrication or installation shall be repaired or replaced immediately after receipt of written notice. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Specified Manufacturer: System shown, detailed and specified is based on Aetnastak products by Montel Inc. as represented by Yamada Enterprises, 16552 Burke Lane, Huntington Beach, CA 92647, 800-444-4594. B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: 1. Minimum five years experience in manufacture of steel shelving of quality equal to or exceeding that required on this project and ability to document such to the Architect's satisfaction. 2. Manufacturer shall have designated resident representative within California area. C. Shelving Supplier/Installer's Qualifications: 1. Licensed as Class C-61, Limited Specialty Contractor. 2. Experienced in installation of shelving for projects of scope comparable to that of this project within last five years and able to document experience of three such projects by listing project locations, their construction costs, and names and addresses of their owners, or architects or engineers, or general contractors who will attest to supplier/installer's record of cooperation with the architect, engineer, or general contractor. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Deliver only after exterior openings are closed-up; wet work is complete, and proper facilities are available for handling, storing and protecting items. B. Deliver components in factory packages labeled to indicate contents. C. Discharge materials carefully and store on clean concrete surface or raised platforms in safe, dry area fully protected from weather. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Scheduling, Sequencing: Coordinate erection with requirements of related work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Materials shall be the finest of their respective kinds and those best adapted to the construction for which they are employed. All steel shall be the best mild, cold rolled, pickled, and double annealed, free from scale and buckle. All plating used on exposed parts shall be metallic furniture stock. All gauges are U.S. Standard. The design of all parts shall be such that the completed installation shall present a neat and finished appearance and shall be free from exposed sharp edges or projections. All other special materials shall be as hereinafter specified. 2.02 STACK SHELVING SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. COLUMNS (OR UPRIGHTS): Shall be formed of not less than 16 gauge steel into a channel shape with no less than 1/2" stiffening flanges, the channel to measure 2" in the web and 1-5/16" at the front and rear faces. They shall present a smooth, closed box shape 2" x 2- 5/8" in cross section with no less than eight right angle bands when bolted to the adjoining column of the next unit, or bolted to an end cover. Each column shall be perforated full height on both faces with a row of slots spaced 1" on vertical centers to receive hooks and lugs of shelf brackets, thus permitting 1" adjustment of shelves. In adjoining columns, the rows of slots shall be Carlsbad City Library Learning Center LIBRARY BOOKSTACKS 11050 -2 approximately 5/8" on lateral centers. Columns shall be marked every three inches to facilitate visual positioning and adjustment of shelves. Intermembering holes for bolting columns into range shall be provided. Two uprights are required for each section of a range, since no adjacent sections may share a common upright and be truly modular. A closed upright shall be mandatory to conceal electrical conduit for stack lighting. Open or inverted uprights are not acceptable. B. TOP SPREADER TUBE: The top spreader shall be a fully closed tube of at least 16 gauge, 2" x 2" square. This tube shall be securely electric welded with continuous welds to the upright columns to permit unit arrangements and maximum non-sway characteristics. The length of this tube shall be as required for any unit widths (24", 30" or 36"). Provide holes as required for conduit. Top spreader shall be used as a raceway, as required. Top spreaders that do not allow continuous passage of conduit are not acceptable. 1. This top spreader must be tubular to assure a closed surface where books or people may come in contact with the tube and to be visually pleasing from the top on low units and from the bottom on high units. C. BOTTOM SPREADER CHANNEL: Shall be channel shaped, open to the floor, of minimum 16 gauge steel. This spreader shall be electric welded with continuous welds to the upright columns at a height to assure continuous through shelving on the base shelves. The length of the channels shall be as above for the top spreader. Slots in bottom spreader channel are provided to perform leveling function at the column, without having to remove base shelf. Provide holes as required for conduit. 1. The above top and bottom spreaders are electrically welded to the uprights with a full bead at each of the eight (8) joints to form a rectangular frame of one- piece construction without the use of nuts, bolts or any other type of fastener. The completed frame shall be rigid without the use of sway braces, angle braces, or any other device that will obstruct the use of any or all shelves anywhere in the bookstack. D. GUSSET: Made of 16-gauge steel, 48" high, triangular 2" at the top and depth of base at the bottom. A1-1/2" bend with holes will allow anchoring to the floor. E. WALL ANGLES: Of at least #12 gauge and measuring at least 3" x 2" x 1" wide shall be provided for all single-faced sections as required to meet design criteria. F. BASE SHELF SUPPORTS: Shall be made of not less than 16 gauge steel with front and top faces flanged on a 5/16" radius and the exposed corner smoothly rounded. They shall have three projections at the rear, two hooks at the top and right-angle tab at the bottom with a hole to accept a 5/16" bolt. With the bottom tab bolted to the column, the hook shall tightly engage its slot in the column. Adjoining base shelf supports shall be bolted together to preserve alignment, with bolts, placed in indentations deep enough to prevent damage to books on the base shelf. Two (2) right hand and two (2) left hand base shelf brackets shall be used on double face units to provide flexibility for future rearrangement from double face to single face. G. SHELF BRACKET: Shall be made of not less than 16 gauge steel with front, top and bottom faces flanged with an approximate 5/16" return. Brackets shall have three projections at the rear, two hooks and one safety lug, to engage the column slots and permit easy adjustment of shelves with maximum possible protection against dislodgement. Brackets shall be fastened to the shelves with tabs. An impression is furnished to serve as an automatic bracket spacer, eliminating the possibility of adjacent bracket overlap. The bracket design allows for shelf adjustment upward or downward (ie. walking-the-shelf) without disturbing adjacent shelves. H. CLOSED INTEGRAL BACK BASE SHELVES: Shall be formed with front face formed 3/4" high and box formed with no less than four (4) 90 degree bends. The rear of the shelf shall be formed up 1-3/8" high with a 5/16" return forming a rail that will receive a sliding book support. The surface of the bottom shelf shall be flush with the top surface of the Bottom Spreader, presenting a neat continuous storage surface. Side flanges of the base shelf shall engage Carlsbad City Library Learning Center LIBRARY BOOKSTACKS 11050 -3 formed lugs in the base shelf support neatly and securely to render full support to the side surfaces of the shelf. Two (2) piece base shelves shall be used for double face units to provide flexibility for future rearrangement from double face to single face. Base shelves shall be designed to carry book loads of 50 Ibs. per square foot without deflection in excess of 3/16". In addition an adjustable kick strip 3" high shall be provided with return flanges at the top and bottom for stiffening. Slotted flanges at both ends shall engage with a slot in the base shelf supports to allow for adjustability and presentation of a neat closed appearance with the surface of the floor. 1. The maximum overall depth for all bookstacks provided shall be as follows: a. Shelf and Base Nominal Depths = 12" S.F. / Overall Dimension = 13-3/16" D. b. Shelf and Base Nominal Depths = 24" D.F. / Overall Dimension = 24-3/8" D. I. UNIVERSAL DISPLAY BASE SHELF: Shall be dual purpose (same description as Universal Display Shelf). In 55 degree sloped position, the shelf should sit on the 4 kick strip at the front, and the side flange of the shelf should insert between the base bracket and the special shim, at the back. This base shelf is then easy to change from one position to the other without the use of any screws or tools. All universal display base shelves must be interchangeable. Shelves that slope less than 30 degrees are not acceptable. J. DIVIDER TYPE BASE SHELF: Shall be formed of no less than 18-gauge steel. The front face shall be the same as the adjustable divider type shelf. The shelf surface, slots, rear vertical flange and all other features of the base shelf shall be the same as the specification for adjustable shelf. Side flanges of the base shelf shall engage formed lugs in the base shelf bracket neatly and securely to render full support to the side surfaces. In addition, a kick strip shall be provided as specified under closed base shelf. Provide five dividers per shelf. K. HINGED PERIODICAL DISPLAY BASE SHELF: With 12" nominal closed base storage shelves. The hinged shelf shall be of the same construction as the hinged periodical display adjustable shelf except that the 12" nominal (11" actual) storage portion will be constructed similar to the standard 18-gauge closed base shelf and 16-gauge dosed base shelf bracket except that the shelf bracket shall be punched to received the shoulder bolts for attaching the pivots. L. HINGED PERIODICAL DISPLAY BASE SHELF WITH PLEXIGLASS COVER: With 12" nominal closed base storage shelves. The hinged shelf shall be of the same construction as the hinged periodical display adjustable shelf except that the 12" nominal (11" actual) storage portion will be constructed similar to the standard 18-gauge closed base shelf and 16-gauge closed base shelf bracket except that the shelf bracket shall be punched to received the shoulder bolts for attaching the pivots. Includes a two-piece plexiglass cover. M. UNIVERSAL DIVIDER DISPLAY BASE SHELF: Shall be dual purpose (same description as Universal Display Shelf). In 55 degree sloped position, the shelf should sit on the 4 kick strip at the front, and the side flange of the shelf should insert between the base bracket and the special shim, at the back. This base shelf is then easy to change from one position to the other without the use of any screws or tools. All universal display base shelves must be interchangeable. Shelves shall be slotted to receive dividers. Provide five dividers per shelf. Shelves that slope less than 30 degrees are not acceptable. N. ADJUSTABLE INTEGRAL BACK SHELVES: Shall be formed with front face formed 3/4" high and box formed with no less than four 90 degree bends (ie. - down 3/4", return 1/2", return 3/8" and return 1 /4"). The rear of the shelf shall be formed up 1 -3/8" high with a 5/16" return forming a rail that will receive a sliding book support. They shall present a smooth, closed appearance on both faces - inside as well as outside - with all sharp edges eliminated, yet be arranged to receive book supports and label holders. Adjustable book-shelves shall be designed to carry book loads of 50 Ibs. per square foot without deflection in excess of 3/16". The nominal depth of bookshelves shall be 1" greater than the actual depth from face of column to front of shelf. The shelves should be reversible, front to back, for maximum shelf life. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center LIBRARY BOOKSTACKS 11050 -4 O. UNIVERSAL DIVIDER DISPLAY SHELF: Shall be dual purpose. Shelf when used in flat position provides 8" storage with 5-1/2" integral back. In 55 degree sloped position, shelf shall be bolted to side bracket and shall provide 5-1/2" storage with 8" integral back. All universal shelves must be interchangeable with conventional shelves. Shall be formed with front and rear faces formed 3/4" high and box formed with no less than four (4) 90 degree bends (i.e. down 3/4", return 1/2", return 3/8" and return 1/4"). They shall present a smooth, closed appearance on both faces inside as well as outside with all sharp edges eliminated, yet be arranged to receive book support and label holder. Adjustable bookshelf shall be designed to carry a book load of 50 Ibs. per square foot without a deflection in excess of 3/16". The shelf shall be reversible, front to back for maximum shelf life. Shelves shall be slotted to receive dividers. Provide five dividers per shelf. Shelves that slope less than 30 degrees are not acceptable. P. ADJUSTABLE DIVIDER SHELF: Shall be formed of not less than 18-gauge steel, with front face formed 3/4" high and box formed with no less than four (4) 90 degree bends (i.e. down 3/4", return 1/2", return 3/8", and return 1/4"). The rear of the shelf shall be formed with a vertical flange 5" high, a 1/4" return to the rear, a 1/4" return down. They present a smooth, closed appearance on both faces, inside as well as outside, with all sharp edges eliminated. The shelf surface and rear vertical flange shall be punched on 1" horizontal centers for three-point reception of adjustable divider lugs. The shelf shall carry a load of 50 Ibs. per square foot without deflection in excess of 3/16". Q. HINGED PERIODICAL DISPLAY SHELF: With 12" nominal depth storage shelf; shall be 14" actual depth, formed of not less than 18-gauge steel. The front face shall be formed 1" high with the top edge having a 1/2" hem bend on the outside surface to give added strength and to provide a smooth clean seam. The sides are formed up 1". The back flange is 1/2" and formed downward to provide a smooth flush surface for display material. A1" high retaining lip shall be provided to hold magazines in place. A 16-gauge pivot is provided on the underside of the shelf at each side, located so that the display shelf will rest in a horizontal position (without handholding) when referring to storage shelf material. The pivot is secured to the storage shelf bracket with a 1/4 - 20 shoulder bolt and lock nut. The 18-gauge storage shelf and the 16-gauge storage shelf brackets are 12" nominal depth (11" actual) and are constructed similar to the standard 18-gauge adjustable shelf and 16-gauge adjustable shelf bracket except that the shelf brackets are punched to receive the shoulder bolts for attaching the pivots. R. HINGED PERIODICAL DISPLAY BASE SHELF WITH PLEXIGLASS COVER: Shall be same as above except includes a two-piece plexiglass cover. S. SHELF DIVIDER: Shall be formed of 16-gauge steel with one (1) lug at the top rear side and two (2) lugs on the bottom to engage slots in the shelf for easy adjustment on 1" horizontal centers. The front top comer of the divider shall be neatly rounded with an approximate 2" radius. Exposed edges of the divider shall be smooth and free from burrs. Letter-size dividers are 6" high x 10" deep. Provide five dividers per shelf. T. SLIDING REFERENCE SHELF: Shall be 11" deep by 32" wide of at least 18-gauge steel reinforced on each side with steel angles for securing to slides. All shall be neatly welded and grinded to remove sharp edges and corners. The shelf shall operate on double extension ball bearing slides equipped with rubber bumpers on each end of travel. The assembly shall be securely attached to a standard adjustable shelf with 14-gauge "Z" brackets and at least two (2) bolts at each end. The assembly shall be installed so that the front edge of the sliding shelf extends 1" beyond the face of the adjustable shelf for ease in locating. After the shelf is installed it shall be possible to move the assembly to a new location without the use of tools. U. CANOPY TOP SUPPORTS: Shall be 11 ga. bracket designed to support continuous wood or laminate tops. Canopy top supports shall be supplied as single face components. Provide angles for attachment to tops. V. SLIDING WIRE BOOK SUPPORT: Shall be formed of A.B.S. white plastic 1 11/16"L x 1 1/4"H Carlsbad City Library Learning Center LIBRARY BOOKSTACKS 11050 -5 with a molded rectangular clip which engages onto the rear vertical flange of the integral back shelf. The wire shall be .235" in diameter zinc plated and extend 7 1/2" over the shelf to support books. Provide 1 per integral back shelf. W. CORNER FILLER: Shall be made of three different parts, each made of 18-gauge steel. One side panel is "C" shaped with angles welded on top, one side and bottom. These angles serve as attachments as well as reinforcements. The other side panel is "L" shaped and inserted between the "C" shaped panel and its side angle. The third part is the top. All parts are assembled together with 5/16 diameter bolts and acorn nut offering a good looking finish. Provide as noted on the drawings. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Preparation: 1. Coordinate with other work supporting or adjoining shelving system and verify requirements for cutting out, fitting and attaching. 2. Verify sizes, designs and locations of items; do so at site whenever construction progress permits. Provide 24" or 30" wide shelving units as required to fit wall areas. B. General: 1. Form components accurately, uniform and true to profile without irregular, sharp or jagged edges. 2. Ensure metal thickness and assembly details provide ample strength and stiffness. 3. Ensure shearing and punching leaves true lines and surfaces. 2.04 FINISHING A. FINISH: All steel parts shall be made smooth, and thoroughly cleaned by a process of completely washing in a phosphatizing solution of chromic acid to insure removal of oil, grease or other foreign material which in any way would interfere with the adhesion of the priming coat and, when dry, wiped thoroughly with clean wiping cloths as a further precaution against grit or oil being left on any part of any surface. Following the cleaning process, all parts shall be coated either by dipping or spraying, making certain every part is thoroughly and completely covered with fine baking enamel, and baked to the manufacturer's recommendations. The finish shall be a medium gloss, giving a reading of 50 to 65 degrees on a standard Gloss Meter and must be capable of withstanding severe hammer and bending test without flaking. Final finish shall be 1.4 mils thickness capable of resisting acetic acid, household ammonia, 10% lye, alcohol, salt spray, abrasion and printing, and all normal usage resistant requirements of a good finish. 6. Color to match Montel Storm Grey. Kickstrip to be Black. PARTS EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that setting conditions and dimensions are correct to receive items. B. Verify that related work elsewhere and incapable of installation after work of this Section has been installed. 3.02 ERECTION A. General: 1. Install work plumb, level, in true alignment and neatly trimmed out. 2. Do not tighten fastener through finish alone without spacer washers. 3. Where installation requires performing work of fabrication, provide quality equal to that achieved in shop and conform to same standards. B. Install drilled-in anchors in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and ICBO Carlsbad City Library Learning Center LIBRARY BOOKSTACKS 11050 -6 Evaluation Report. C. Place all shelves as shown unless otherwise directed by the Designer. D. Job shall be kept clean at all times. Upon completion, remove all debris, etc. from the site, and leave the job area in a clean condition. E. The installation schedule shall be confirmed with the building contractor and Owner's Representative prior to installation of bookstacks. 3.03 CLEANING and PROTECTION A. Protection: Protect installation from damage during remainder of construction and until the Owner's final acceptance. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center LIBRARY BOOKSTACKS SECTION 11055 LIBRARY BOOK SECURITY SYSTEM PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) Book Theft Detection System. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06410 - Custom Cabinets. B. Division 16 - Conduit and Electrical Connection. 1.03 REFERENCES A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 1999. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3 - Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate locations of all equipment and service connections where required. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than five years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years of documented experience. C. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Deliver products to project site in manufacturer's unopened and labeled containers. B. Do not deliver to job site until notified by Contractor that the building is in proper condition and arrangements have been made to properly handle, store and protect work. 1.07 WARRANTY A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 6-8 - Completion and Acceptance, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for equipment. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. System Provided by: Vemon Library Supplies, Integrated Technology Group, 2851 Cole Court, Atlanta, GA 30071. Tel: 1-877-207-3127, website: www.integratedtek.com B. Substitutions: Not permitted. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Book Detection System: 1. Series: BlockBuster Security Pedestal, #RFID410 Carlsbad City Library Learning Center LIBRARY BOOK SECURITY SYSTEM 11055 -1 2. Panel Size: Manufacturers Standard. 3. Panel Aisle Clearance: 36 inches. 4. Panel Finish: As selected by Manuel Oncina Architects, Inc. B. RFID System Components. 1. Portable Handheld Readers: TR-HR1 Handheld Antenna (wand), used with Tagsys Medio L100 Coupler. 2. PC Workstation, per suppliers recommendations. 3. Receipt Printer: Thermal Line Printer 4. Antenna: Aero LI antenna 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Tattle-Tape. B. RFID Tags. 2.04 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide all other materials, not specifically described but required for complete and proper installation of this work, as selected by the contractor and subject to the approval of the Architect. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that flooring and substrates are ready to receive equipment. 3.02 INSPECTION A. Prior to work of this section, carefully inspect previously installed work. Verify all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. B. Verify that work of this section may be installed in strict accordance with the original design, all pertinent codes and regulations, and all pertinent portions of the referenced standards. 1. Verify all power connections are located properly and of appropriate type and power source. C. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect. D. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturers recommendations and approved submittal. B. Provide factory trained technician to test and calibrate detection devices as required to provide fully operational installation. 3.04 STARTING EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Provide manufacturer's field representative to prepare and start systems. B. Adjust for proper operation within manufacturer's published tolerances. C. Demonstrate proper operation of systems to Carlsbad City Library's designated representative. 3.05 CLEANING A. Protect installed equipment from subsequent construction operations. 3.06 SCHEDULES Carlsbad City Library Learning Center LIBRARY BOOK SECURITY SYSTEM 11055 -2 A. Detection panel locations: Door 100 and 124. B. RFID station located at desks in areas 120 and 209. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center LIBRARY BOOK SECURITY SYSTEM 11055 -3 SECTION 11131 PROJECTION SCREENS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electrically operated front projection screens. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section - 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies. B. Division 16 for electrical wiring, connections, and installation of remote control switches for electrically operated projection screens. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3 - Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. C. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings showing layout and types of projection screens. Show the following: 1. Wiring diagram for electrically operated units. 2. Location of screen centeriine. 3. Location of wiring connections. 4. Anchorage details. 5. Accessories. 6. Frame details. D. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches square, representing actual product, color, and patterns. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of projection screen required from a single manufacturer as a complete unit, including necessary mounting hardware and accessories. B. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of projection screens with other construction supported by, or penetrating through, ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partitions. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver projection screens until building is enclosed and other construction where screens will be installed is substantially complete. B. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. C. Protect screens from damage during delivery, handling, storage, and installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: DA-LITE Screen Company, Inc., 3100 North Detroit Street, P.O.Box 137, Warsaw, IN 46581. ASD. Tel: (800) 622-3737. www.da-lite.com. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center PROJECTION SCREENS 11131 -1 B. Substitutions: See Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.6 - Trade Names and Equals. 2.02 MOTORIZED, FRONT PROJECTION SCREENS A. DA-LITE: Tensioned Director Electrol. 1. Case: a. Material; Extruded aluminum. b. Finish; Powder coated white c. Picture Screen Door: 1) A section of the bottom of the case shall be an aluminum door equipped with hinges so that it opens and closes automatically with the lowering and raising of the picture surface 2) When the picture surface is being lowered, the door motor shall allow the door to drop open by gravity. 3) When the picture surface gets to the top position, the door motor will pull the door to the closed position where a limit switch shall cut off the electrical current to the screen. d. The balance of the bottom of the case shall be a second hinged aluminum door with manual opening to provide access. e. Hinges shall be mounted in a concealed way. Doors shall be powder coated white. 2. Door Motor: Electrically operated 120 volt (60 Hz) 1.4 amp. 3. Screen Roller: a. Material: Rigid Aluminum. b. Size: 3-3/16" in diameter c. Motor 1) Mounted inside the roller with noise silencer. 2) Three wire with ground. 3) Quick reversal type. 4) Oiled for life. 5) Automatic thermal overload cutout. 6) Integral gears. 7) Capacitor and an electric brake to prevent coasting. 8) Electrically operated 120 volt (60 Hz) 1.4 amp. d. Pre-set but adjustable limit switches to automatically stop fabric door in the "up" and "down" positions. e. Mounted on heavy duty brackets equipped with self-aligning bearings. 4. Screen Fabric: a. Seamless, flame retardant and mildew resistant vinyl. b. Matt white with black masking borders. c. Each side of the fabric to have tab guide cable system to maintain even lateral tension and hold surface flat. d. Bottom of fabric to be inserted into an aluminum slat bar with added weight to maintain vertical tension on the screen surface. 2.03 CONTROLS A. Three position keyed control switch in box with cover plate. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Manuel Oncina Architects, Inc. of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center PROJECTION SCREENS 11131 -2 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate installation of electrical service with Division 16. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Securely and rigidly brace components suspended from structure. C. Install front projection screens with screen cases in position and relationship to adjoining construction as indicated, securely anchored to supporting substrate, and in manner that produces a smoothly operating screen with plumb and straight vertical edges and plumb and flat viewing surfaces when screen is lowered. D. Test electrically operated units to verify that screen, controls, limit switches, closure and other operating components are in optimum functioning condition. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust for proper operation within manufacturer's published tolerances. B. Adjust system for smooth operation. 3.05 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/4 inch. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch. 3.06 CLEANING and PROTECTION A. Clean projection screen per manufacturer's published recommendation. B. Protect installed equipment and controls from subsequent construction operations until completion of project. C. Repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. 3.07 SCHEDULES A. Room 205: 1. Screen Size: 92 inches wide x 52 inches high (viewable). 2. Bottom of Screen Above Finish Floor 3 feet 6 inches. B. Room 206: 1. Screen Size: 92 inches wide x 52 inches high (viewable). 2. Bottom of Screen Above Finish Floor 3 feet 6 inches. C. Room 215: 1. Screen Size: 92 inches wide x 52 inches high (viewable). 2. Bottom of Screen Above Finish Floor 3 feet 6 inches. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center PROJECTION SCREENS 11131 -3 SECTION 12485 FOOT GRILLES, MATS, AND FRAMES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Recessed Grating System. B. Rubber Mats. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM D 412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers-Tension; 1998a (Reapproved 2002). B. ASTM D 624 - Standard Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers; 2000. C. ASTM D 1149 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Deterioration-Surface Ozone Cracking in a Chamber; 1999. D. ASTM D 2240 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property-Durometer Hardness; 2004. E. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2005. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3 - Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's product literature for products specified in this section. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate locations and dimension of recessed areas to receive products specified in this section. D. Verification Samples: For each color or finish selected, two sets of samples indicating match to selected color or finish. E. Test Reports: Certified reports from independent testing laboratory supporting compliance of products to specified flammability requirements. F. Manufacturer's Instructions: 1. Printed installation instructions for each specified product. 2. Manufacturer's Safety Data Sheets (M.S.D.S.) for each adhesive. G. Closeout Submittals: Manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning and maintaining products specified in this section. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum five (5) years documented experience producing products specified in this section. B. Installer Qualifications: Minimum five (5) years documented experience installing products specified in this section, and approved by product manufacturer. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Carlsbad City Library Learning Center FOOT GRILLES, MATS, AND FRAMES 12485 -1 A. Store products of this section in manufacturer's unopened packaging until installation. B. Maintain dry, heated storage area for products of this section until installation of products. 1.07 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Obtain field measurements of recessed areas to receive products of this section prior to order placement; include information on squareness and levelness of recess. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Metal Grate: 1. McNichols Co.; www.mcnichols.com; Telephone 800-237-3820. B. Rubber Mat: 1. Flexco Inc.; www.flexcofloors.com; Telephone 800-633-3151. C. : See Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.6 - Trade Names or Equals. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: Type 304. B. Rubber: Having the following physical characteristics: 1. Recycled Content: 90% post-consumer waste from tires. 2. : 5/16" nominal. 3. Backing: Vulcanized Rubber. 4. Slip Resistance: Exceed 0.60 for flat surfaces. 2.03 RECESSED GRATING SYSTEM A. Recessed Grating System: Pit Grating P Series. 1. Grate size: Per drawings. 2. Load Capacity: 300 pounds per square foot. 3. Wire Size: 0.071 x 0.177 inches, 90 degree relief angle. 4. Bearing Bar Spacing: 1 inch on center. 5. Slot Opening: 0.125x0.145 inches. 6. Self cleaning. 2.04 MATS A. Recessed Modular Rubber Tile Mats: Flextuft: 1. Color: Per drawings. 2. Pattern; Per drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Recesses to receive products of this section are correct size, are within square tolerances and level tolerances. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Remove debris from recesses to receive frames; sweep recessed clean. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install specified products in accordance with shop drawings and manufacturer's printed installation instructions. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center FOOT GRILLES, MATS, AND FRAMES 12485 -2 END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center FOOT GRILLES, MATS, AND FRAMES 12485 -3 SECTION 14201 PASSENGER ELEVATORS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Complete elevator systems. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02315 - Excavation: Excavation for cylinder casing and hydraulic lines between cylinder and remote machine room. B. Section 02316 - Fill and Backfill: Backfilling at cylinder casing and hydraulic lines between cylinder and remote machine room. C. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Elevator machine foundation. D. Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Hoistway framing. E. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Pit ladder and Sill supports. F. Section 07130 - Sheet Waterproofing: Waterproofing of elevator pit walls and floor. G. Section 08310 - Access Doors and Panels: Fire rated access doors into hoistway. H. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum shaft walls. I. Section 10523 - Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets and Accessories: Fire extinguisher in elevator machine room. 1.03 REFERENCES A. AISC S335 - Specification for Structural Steel Buildings-Allowable Stress Design, Plastic Design; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.; 1989. B. AISC S350L - Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel Buildings; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.; 1999, with Supplement No.1 in 2001. C. ASME A17.2 - Guide for Inspection of Elevators, Escalators, and Moving Walks; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2004. D. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2004 and errata. E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National fire Protection Association; 2005. F. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; National Fire Protection Association; 1999. G. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. H. UL (ECMD) - Electrical Construction Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3 - Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate the following information: 1. Locations of machine room equipment: driving machines, controllers, governors and other component. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center PASSENGER ELEVATORS 14201 -1 2. Hoistway components: Car, counterweight, sheaves, machine and sheave beams, guide rails, buffers, ropes, and other components. 3. Rail bracket spacing; maximum loads imposed on guide rails requiring load transfer to building structural framing. 4. Individual weight of principal components; load reaction at points of support. 5. Loads on hoisting beams and location of trolley beams. 6. Clearances and over-travel of car and counterweight. 7. Locations in hoistway and machine room of traveling cables and connections for car light. 8. Location and sizes of access doors, doors, and frames. 9. Expected heat dissipation of elevator equipment in machine room. 10. Applicable seismic design data; certified by a licensed Professional Structural Engineer. 11. Electrical characteristics and connection requirements. 12. Show arrangement of equipment in machine room so rotating elements, sheaves, and other equipment can be removed for repairs or replaced without disturbing other components. Arrange equipment for clear passage through access door. C. Product Data: Provide data on the following items: 1. Signal and operating fixtures, operating panels, indicators. 2. Cab design, dimensions, layout, and components. 3. Cab and hoistway door and frame details. 4. Electrical characteristics and connection requirements. D. Samples: Submit two samples, 12x12 inch in size illustrating cab interior finishes. E. Maintenance Data: Include: 1. Parts catalog with complete list of equipment replacement parts; identify each entry with equipment description and identifying code. 2. Technical information for servicing operating equipment. 3. Legible schematic of hydraulic piping and wiring diagrams of installed electrical equipment and changes made in the Work. List symbols corresponding to identity or markings on machine room and hoistway apparatus. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with applicable code and as supplemented in this section. B. Design guide rails, brackets, anchors, and machine anchors under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of work of this type and licensed in California. C. Perform structural steel design, fabrication, and installation in accordance with AISC S335, Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, or AISC S342L, Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel Buildings. Perform seismic design in accordance with applicable code. D. Perform welding of steel in accordance with AWS D1.1. E. Fabricate and install door and frame assemblies in accordance with NFPA 80. F. Perform electrical work in accordance with NFPA 70. G. Maintain one copy of each quality standard document on site. H. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience. I. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section and approved by elevator equipment manufacturer. J. Products Requiring Fire Resistance Rating: Listed and classified by UL. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center PASSENGER ELEVATORS K. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.06 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING A. Review schedule of installation, installation procedures and conditions, and coordination with related work. B. Review use of elevator for construction purposes, hours of use, scheduling of its use, cleanliness of cab, employment of operator, maintenance of system. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Construction Use of Elevator: Enclose elevator when required for transport of construction personnel and materials. 1. Enclose cab with protective plywood on floor, walls, and ceiling. 2. Provide temporary lighting. 3. Provide control panel with manual and emergency operation with key operation for attendant operator. 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 6-8 - Completion and Acceptance, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide one year manufacturer warranty for elevator operating equipment and devices. 1.09 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Provide service and maintenance of elevator system and components for one year from Date of Substantial Completion. B. Examine system components monthly. Clean, adjust, and lubricate equipment. C. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of elevator equipment. Maintain hydraulic fluid levels. Repair or replace parts whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original equipment. Replace wire ropes when necessary to maintain the required factor of safety. D. Perform work without removing cars during peak traffic periods. E. Perform maintenance work using competent and qualified personnel under the supervision and in the direct employ of the elevator manufacturer or original installer. F. Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or subcontractor without prior written consent of Carlsbad City Library. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Schindler Elevator Corp; Product Telescoping Holeless Hydraulic. B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. ThyssenKrupp Elevator: www.thyssenkruppelevator.com. 2. Otis Elevator Co; Product : www.otis.com. 3. Substitutions: See Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.6 - Trade Names or Equals. C. All components to be manufactured by same entity, unless otherwise indicated. 2.02 ELEVATORS A. Elevator Passenger, holeless hydraulic type with cylinder in hoistway. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center PASSENGER ELEVATORS 14201 -3 1. Operation and Controls: Selective collective. 2. Hoistway Doors and Frames: Stainless steel. 3. Cab Height: 96 inches. 4. Hoistway and Cab Entrance Frame Opening Size: 42 x 84 inches. 5. Door Type: Single leaf. 6. Door Operation: Side opening. 7. Rated Net Capacity: 3000 Ibs. 8. Rated Speed: 125ft/min. 9. Nominal Platform Size: 84 x 60 inches. 10. Clear Net Platform Size: 76x44 inches. 11. Travel Distance: As indicated on drawings. 12. Number of Stops: 2. 13. Hydraulic Motor and Pump Location: Adjacent to hoistway. B. Elevator Cabs: See Section 14271. C. Additional Elevator Equipment Requirements: Section 14281. 2.03 CONTROLS A. Elevator Controls: Provide landing buttons and hall lanterns. B. Door Controls: 1. Program door control to open doors automatically when car arrives at floor. 2. Render "Door Close" button inoperative when car is standing at dispatching terminal with doors open. 3. If doors are prevented from closing for approximately ten seconds because of an obstruction, automatically disconnect door reopening devices, close doors more slowly until obstruction is cleared. Sound buzzer. 4. Door Safety Devices: Moveable, retractable safety edges, quiet in operation; equip with photo-electric light rays. C. Landing Buttons: Illuminating type, one for originating UP and one for originating DOWN calls, one button only at terminating landings; marked with arrows. D. Landing Position Indicators: Illuminating white. E. Interconnect elevator control system with building fire alarm systems. F. Provide "Firefighter's Operation" in accordance with applicable code. Designated Landing: Ground Level. 2.04 EMERGENCY POWER A. Arrange elevator operation to operate under emergency power when normal power supply fails. B. Emergency Power Supply: Self-contained battery power. C. Provide operational control circuitry for adapting the change from normal to emergency power. D. Upon transfer to emergency power, advance elevator to Ground Level, open doors, disable operating circuite, and hold in standby condition. E. Provide manual switch to override the automatic selection procedure. 2.05 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS A. Additional Electrical Elevator Equipment Requirements: See Section 14281. 2.06 MACHINE ROOM FITTINGS A. Wall-Mounted Frames: Glazed with clear plastic; sized as required. Provide one for master Carlsbad City Library Learning Center PASSENGER ELEVATORS 14201 -4 electric and hydraulic schematic and one for lubrication chart. Install charts. B. Key Cabinet: Wall-mounted, lockable, keyed to building keying system, for control/operating panel keys. 1. Provide two extra key cabinet keys. 2. Provide two extra control/operating panel keys. PARTS EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that hoistway, pit, and machine room are ready for work of this section. C. Verify hoistway shaft and openings are of correct size and within tolerance. D. Verify location and size of machine foundation and position of machine foundation bolts. E. Verify that electrical power is available and of the correct characteristics. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Arrange for temporary electrical power for installation work and testing of elevator components. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install system components. Connect equipment to building utilities. B. Provide conduit, boxes, wiring, and accessories. C. Install hydraulic piping between cylinder and pump unit. D. Mount motors and pumps on vibration and acoustic isolators, on bed plate and concrete pad. Place on structural supports and bearing plates. Securely fasten to building supports. Prevent lateral displacement. E. Accommodate equipment in space indicated. F. Install guide rails using threaded bolts with metal shims and lock washers under nuts. Compensate for expansion and contraction movement of guide rails. G. Accurately machine and align guide rails. Form smooth joints with machined splice plates. H. Bolt or weld brackets directly to structural steel hoistway framing. I. Field Welds: Chip and clean away oxidation and residue, wire brush; spot prime with two coats. J. Coordinate installation of hoistway wall construction. K. Install hoistway door sills, frames, and headers in hoistway walls. Grout sills in place. Set entrances in vertical alignment with car openings and aligned with plumb hoistway lines. L. Structural Metal Surfaces: Clean surfaces of rust, oil or grease; wipe clean with solvent; prime two coats. M. Machine Room Components: Clean and degrease; prime one coat, finish with one coat of enamel. N. Adjust equipment for smooth and quiet operation. 3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Guide Rail Alignment: Plumb and parallel to each other in accordance with ASME A17.1. B. Cab Movement on Aligned Guide Rails: Smooth movement, with no objectionable lateral or Carlsbad City Library Learning Center PASSENGER ELEVATORS 14201 -5 oscillating movement or vibration. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and inspection by regulatory agencies will be performed at their discretion. 1. Schedule tests with agencies and notify Carlsbad City Library and Manuel Oncina Architects, Inc.. 2. Obtain permits required to perform tests. 3. Document regulatory agency tests and inspections in accordance with the requirements of Supplemental Provisions section 4-1.4. 4. Perform tests required by regulatory agencies. 5. Furnish test and approval certificates issued by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Perform testing and inspection in accordance with requirements of Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.4. 1. Perform tests as required by ASME A17.2. 2. Provide two weeks written notice of date and time of tests. 3. Supply instruments and execute specific tests. 3.06 ADJUSTING A. Adjust for smooth acceleration and deceleration of car so not to cause passenger discomfort. B. Adjust automatic floor leveling feature at each floor to achieve 1/4 inch from flush. 3.07 CLEANING and PROTECTION A. Remove protective coverings from finished surfaces. B. Clean surfaces and components ready for inspection. C. Do not permit construction traffic within cab after cleaning. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center PASSENGER ELEVATORS 14201 -6 SECTION 14271 CUSTOM ELEVATOR CABS AND HOISTWAY DOORS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Passenger cabs with doors and frames. B. Hoistway doors and frames. C. The requirements of Section 14201 apply to this Section. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06423 - Wood Veneer Faced Paneling: Wall finish in cab. B. Section 09632 - Stone Flooring: Floor finish in cab. C. Section 09685 - Carpet Tile: Floor finish in cab. D. Section 14201 - Passenger Elevators: Submittal and intallation requirements. E. Section 14201 - Passenger Elevators: Door control requirements. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2004a. B. ASTM A 666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2003. C. ASTM A1008/A 1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability; 2004b. D. ASTM B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2004a. E. ASTM B 221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes (Metric); 2004. 1.04 SUBMITTALS- SEE SECTION 14201 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum ten years of documented experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Schindler Elevator Corp: www.us.schindler.com. B. Substitutions: See Supplemental Provisions, Section 4.1-6 - Trade Names or Equals. 2.02 ELEVATOR CABS A. Passenger Cabs for Elevators : 1. Cab Dimensions: See Section 14201. 2. Door Type, Size, and Operation: See Section 14201. 3. Doors: Stainless steel. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center CUSTOM ELEVATOR CABS AND HOISTWAY DOORS 14271 -1 4. Door Frames: Stainless steel. 5. Floor Finish: Carpet tile. 6. Wall Finish: Stainless Steel. 7. Ceiling: Stainless steel. 8. Above Ceiling: Provide emergency access. 9. Base: Stainless steel, recessed. 10. Front Return Panel: Same as construction as doors. 11. Car Operating Panel: Integral with front return; one per car. 12. Light Fixtures: 2 downlights. 13. Hand Rail: Aluminum, at rear. 14. Door Threshold: Extruded aluminum. 2.03 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES A. Hoistway Entrances - Main Floor: 1. Frames: Stainless steel. 2. Doors: Stainless steel. 3. Sills: Extruded aluminum. B. Hoistway Entrances - Upper Level: 1. Frames: Stainless steel. 2. Doors: Stainless steel. 3. Sills: Extruded aluminum. 2.04 CAR FIXTURES A. Car Operating Panel: Integral with front return, with illuminated call buttons corresponding to floors served, alarm button, and DOOR OPEN/DOOR CLOSE buttons. 1. Position alarm button where it is unlikely to be accidentally actuated; not more than 54 inches above cab floor. 2. Provide matching service cabinet integral with front return panel, with hinged door and lock in each car. 3. Provide the following in each service cabinet: a. Switches for Inspection, fan, and light. b. Emergency light. c. Telephone cabinet and telephone. d. 110 V, 15 A convenience receptacle. 4. Keyed switches for each operational control specified. B. Position Indicator Panel: above control panel with illuminating position indicators. C. Aluminum Hand Rail: 1-1/2 inch diameter rail, clear anodized finish. D. Rails: Spaced 1-1/2 inches from wall. E. Pad Hooks: Stainless steel type, mounted at 80 inches high. F. Light Fixtures: Fluorescent, recessed. G. Ventilation: Single speed fan; grille above ceiling. 2.05 FINISH MATERIALS A. Carpet Tile: Type Constantine Commercial, Precision Loc specified in Section 0968; color as selected. B. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666 Type 304; No. 4 finish unless otherwise indicated. 2.06 FABRICATION A. Cab Door Construction: 0.058 inch thick metal, of hollow sandwich panel construction, flush Carlsbad City Library Learning Center CUSTOM ELEVATOR CABS AND HOISTWAY DOORS 14271 -2 design, rolled profiles, rigid construction. B. Cab Door Frames: 0.058 inch thick metal, welded comer design with smooth invisible joints. C. Thresholds: Configure to align with frame return to allow reversing of cab carpet floor finish. D. Hoistway Doors: 0.058 inch thick metal, of hollow sandwich panel construction, flush design, rolled profiles, rigid construction. E. Hoistway Door Frames: 0.058 inch thick metal, of rolled profiles, welded comer with smooth invisible joints. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION- SEE SECTION 14201 END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center CUSTOM ELEVATOR CABS AND HOISTWAY DOORS 14271 -3 SECTION 14281 ELEVATOR EQUIPMENT PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Elevator machines, controllers, hoistway equipment, and accessories. B. The requirements of Section 14201 apply to this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM A139/A 139M - Standard Specification for Electric-Fusion (Arc)-Welded Steel Pipe (NPS 4 and Over); 2004. B. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2003. C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2005. 1.03 SUBMITTALS - SEE SECTION 14201 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE- SEE SECTION 14201 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ELEVATOR EQUIPMENT A. Motors, Hydraulic Equipment, Controllers, Controls, Buttons, Wiring and Devices, and Indicators: Comply with NFPA 70. B. Guide Rails, Cables, Counterweights, Sheaves, Buffers, Attachment Brackets and Anchors: Purpose designed, sized according to code with safety factors. C. Buffers: Spring type. D. Lubrication Equipment: 1. Provide grease fittings for lubricating bearings requiring periodic lubrication. 2. Grease Cups: Automatic feed type. 3. Lubrication Points: Visible and easily accessible. 2.02 HYDRAULIC ELEVATOR EQUIPMENT A. Cylinder Casing: ASTM A139, Grade A steel. 2.03 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS A. Motors: Refer to Section 15065. B. Disconnect Switch: Factory mount disconnect switch in control panel. C. Boxes, Conduit, Wiring, and Devices: As required by NFPA 70. D. Fittings: Steel compression type for electrical metallic tubing. Fittings with set screws are acceptable only when a separate grounding conductor is also installed across the joint. E. Spare Conductors: Include 10 percent extra conductors and two pairs of shielded audio cables in traveling cables. Do not parallel conductors to increase electric current capacity unless individually fused. F. Do not use armored flexible metal conduit as a grounding conductor. G. Include wiring and connections to elevator devices remote from hoistway and between elevator machine rooms. Provide additional components and wiring to suit machine room layout. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center ELEVATOR EQUIPMENT 14281 -1 2.04 CAR FABRICATION A. Frame: Rigid and braced, rolled or formed steel sections, mounted on resilient isolators. B. Platform: Steel frame, with fire retardant treated plywood subflooring assembly, ready to receive floor finish. PARTS EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL - SEE SECTION 14201 3.02 INSTALLATION-HYDRAULIC CYLINDER A. Excavate for cylinder casing and hydraulic lines between cylinder and remote machine room in accordance with Section 02315. Remove subsoil from site. B. Maintain shaft alignment of 1 inch from plumb. Fill over-excavated shaft depth with lean concrete. C. Maintain shaft excavation free of water. D. Place plunger casing full depth of shaft. Align to 1/4 inch from plumb. Cut top of casing at hoistway pit slab elevation. E. Backfill around cylinder casing and hydraulic lines between cylinder remote machine room in accordance with Section 02316. F. Backfill with general fill; placed in 24 inch lifts compacted to 97 percent of dry density. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center ELEVATOR EQUIPMENT 14281 -2 SECTION 15010 -BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This specification and the applicable drawings are intended to define the requirement to furnish all labor, materials, equipment, supplies, and other cost as necessary for the satisfactory completion of all work pertaining to mechanical trades. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All work shall comply with the requirements of codes, ordinances and regulations of the government having jurisdiction at the location of work, including the regulations of serving utilities. B. The latest approved editions of the following specifications and standards shall form a part of this specification, the same as if herein written out in full, and all materials and installations shall conform to the applicable requirements thereof: All state and municipal ordinances having jurisdiction California Code of Regulations (CCR), Title 8 California Code of Regulations (CCR), Title 19 California Code of Regulations (CCR), Title 24 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Pamphlet No. 13 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Pamphlet No. 90 A & 90 B National Electric Code (NEC) Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) "Safety and Health Regulations for Construction" California Mechanical Code (UMC) California Plumbing Code (UPC) C. Trade Standards: The latest specifications and standards of the following associations shall form a part of this specification, the same as if herein written out in full, and all materials, equipment and installations shall conform to the applicable requirements thereof. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Air Moving and Control Association (AMCA) Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA) American Gas Association (AGA) D. The following Division 15 Sections shall form a part of this specification. Section 15250 Insulation Section 15400 Plumbing Section 15492 Fuel Gas Piping Section 15850 Air Handling Equipment Section 15895 Ductwork & Ductwork Accessories Carlsbad City Library Learning Center BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-1 Section 15990 Balancing Air and Water Systems 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. APiping" shall mean pipes, fittings, valves and all piping specialties that are used in conveying system media. B. Pressure ratings specified is the design working pressure for the fluid which the device will serve. C. "Ductwork" shall mean ducts, plenums, compartments, castings, or any like devices, which are used to convey air. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300, if applicable, and as follows. B. All material and equipment used in the installation shall be new and in perfect condition when installed. Material, equipment and components shall be standard catalog type products from reputable manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacturing of such equipment. All articles provided for the same general purpose or use shall be the same make. Submittal of any equipment for approval shall specifically indicate any item that does not meet the specification requirements. Removal of installed articles may be required if the article is later found not in conformance with the specification requirements. C. Space allotted, clearances, access, electrical data, structural supports, etc. shown on drawings is for equipment models and sizes listed in schedules and/or in specifications. Contractor shall verify these conditions on all non-listed equipment submitted for approval. D. Unless otherwise specifically directed in the applicable Division 15 section, the submittals by the Contractor to the Owner's Representative shall be as follows: 1. Submit manufacturer's catalog data for all purchased items, indicating size, model, options, etc, of the item to be used. 2. Submit drawings for non-purchased items that have to be fabricated. 3. Submit shop drawings of ductwork and piping layouts 1.05 PERMITS AND FEES A. The contractor shall arrange, apply for, and pay for all permits, inspections, fees, and licenses required by any legally constituted public authority for this work. 1.06 DISCREPANCIES A. Any discrepancies found between the specification and drawings, or between drawings, shall be brought to the attention of the owner or his representative before installation of the applicable item. Special attention shall be given to voltage requirements and lighting arrangements. Any conflict shall be called to the attention Carlsbad City Library Learning Center BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-2 of the Owner's Representative immediately. Any extra cost caused by neglecting to verify all listed voltages and phase with electrical plans shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 1.07 GUARANTEE A. Contractor shall provide a written guarantee that all materials, fixtures, and equipment installed under the contract are guaranteed for a period of one year from the date of completion. Contractor shall provide all materials and labor necessary for repair, in a reasonable amount of time, and without cost to the owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT A. All mechanical equipment, both hanging and base mounted, shall be provided with mounting connection points of sufficient strength to resist seismic forces, as required by CCR Title 24. The mounting connections shall be compatible with vibration isolation used. B. Equipment identification number, capacity, and design requirements are specified in the drawing equipment schedule or applicable specification. Equipment furnished and installed shall meet the design requirements at operating conditions with the following parameters: 1. The RPM, motor horsepower, brake horsepower, air pressure drop, water pressure drop, equipment weights, outlet velocities, tip speed and dB ratings specified are maximum. An increase will not be accepted. 2. The CFM, wheel diameters, heating and cooling capacities, and static pressure on fans that are specified are minimums. A decrease will not be accepted. 2.02 RECORD DRAWINGS A. The contractor shall maintain a complete "as-built" record set of blue line prints during construction. The Aas-built® prints shall be used to record the exact location of all piping and ducting installed, including the depth of all underground piping. Upon completion of the project contractor shall deliver a clean set of "as-built" prints to the owner or his representative. 2.03 MANUALS AND INSTRUCTIONS A. Manuals: The Contractor shall furnish five sets of Operating and Maintenance Manuals. The information in these manuals shall be bound in a hardback, loose-leaf binder or approved equivalent. Inscribed on the cover shall be the words "OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL", the name and location of the building or project, and the name of the Contractor. The following shall be included in the Manual: 1. The names, addresses and telephone numbers of each sub contractor that Carlsbad City Library Learning Center BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-3 installed equipment and/or systems, and the local representative for each major item of equipment. 2. Information assembled with tab sheets to conform to a Table of Contents. 3. Manufacturer's literature for all mechanical equipment. All equipment shall be identified by make, model and serial number. Electrical characteristics shall be noted and a complete parts list included. 4. Operating Instructions: Provide a brief description of the system including proper setting of switches and other equipment. This may be provided as part of the manufacturer's literature. If included in literature, provide an index indicating on what page each item is located. Adjustments requiring the technical knowledge of the service agency personnel need not be included. 5. Maintenance Instructions: Provide a list of each item of mechanical equipment requiring inspection, lubrication or service, with a description of the schedule and performance of such maintenance, including types of lubricant for each item of equipment. This may be provided as a part of the manufacturer's literature. If included in literature, provide an index indicating on what page each item is located. 6. Controls: Provide system control drawings including complete catalog data, calibration information, spare parts lists, etc. A typewritten sequence of operation shall be included with the diagrams referring to component numbers or designations thereon. For DDC systems, the computer designation shall be provided for all new points installed. B. Posted Operation Instructions: Operating Instructions shall be provided at all control panels and shall include control diagrams and sequence of operation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Locations: The locations of the mechanical work and equipment as indicated on the drawings are approximate only, and the required final exact positions shall be verified with the Owner's Representative prior to installation. All changes in locations of equipment shall be subject the approval of the Owner's Representative. B. Accessibility: All equipment shall be installed so as to be accessible for maintenance and adjustment (crawling under or over ductwork is not acceptable). Special attention shall be given to motors, belts, air filters, manual valves and control valves, operating dampers, coils, etc. This section of specifications shall be responsible for the supplying and installation of all required access panels. C. Noise and Vibration: It is the intent of the specification and design conditions that the entire system, including equipment, air ducts, piping and all other parts, shall be free of excessive vibrations. If excessive vibration occurs as a result of installation, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to correct these conditions at no cost to the Owner. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-4 D. Coordination: Before proceeding with installation of piping and ductwork, Contractor shall inspect the Contract Drawings and determine that the location of the work does not interfere with work of other trades. In case of interference, contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative in writing and his decisions shall govern. E. Structural Members: Where piping passes through or interferes with slabs, beams or any structural member, or where cutting of structure is required, the Owner's Representative shall be consulted. No cutting of structural members shall be done without approval from the Owner's Representative. When pipes are placed in partitions necessitating cutting of any structural member, metal ties shall be provided, in accordance with applicable structural code. 3.02 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Obtain manufacturer's printed installation instructions to aid in properly executing work of installing equipment whenever such instructions are available. Submit three copies of such instructions to the Owner's Representative prior to time of installation for use in supervising the work. B. All recommendations of the manufacturer shall be followed and required clearances maintained. All equipment shall be securely fastened to its base. A copy of the manufacturer's installation and service manual shall be kept with each piece of equipment, to allow Owner's Representative to determine if the installation meets requirements. C. Erect equipment in a neat manner and align, level and adjust for satisfactory operation. Install equipment so that connecting and disconnecting of piping and accessories can be made readily, and so that all parts are easily accessible for inspection, operation, maintenance and repair. Minor deviation from arrangements shown on drawings may be made, as approved by the Owner's Representative. D. Rotating or reciprocating mechanical equipment shall be mounted on or suspended from vibration isolators to prevent vibration and structural borne noise transmission to the building. Refer to each mechanical section of these specifications for details. All vibration isolators shall be OSHPD pre-approved. Unless otherwise noted, flexible duct connectors shall be used between all fan openings and sheet metal work, and flexible piping connectors shall be used between all rotating mechanical equipment and piping systems. E. Provide seismic restraints for all mechanical equipment, piping, and ductwork in accordance with CCR Title 24, Part 2, Volume 2, Chapter 16A. Methods of installation shall be in accordance with SMACNA AGuidelines for Seismic Restraint of Mechanical Systems® except mechanical equipment weighing 500 pounds and over shall be seismically anchored as per details on the drawings. 3.03 ADJUSTMENT AND OPERATION OF SYSTEM A. When the work included in this specification is complete, and at such time as directed by the Owner's Representative, the Contractor shall adjust all parts of the system, advising the Owner's Representative when this has been done and the work is ready for their final tests. Refer to Section 15990 "Balancing Air & Water Carlsbad City Library Learning Center BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-5 Systems". B. If it becomes necessary for temporary use of a system before completion, the Contractor shall adjust all parts as far as possible in order to make temporary use as effective as possible. After temporary use and before acceptance tests, all systems shall be readjusted to meet permanent operational requirements. C. Operation Test: The Contractor shall conduct an operation test to demonstrate that all building systems have been completed and perform in compliance with contract requirements. This test shall be performed under simulated operating conditions for one consecutive twenty-four hour period and may be witnessed by the Owner's Representative at his option. D. Test Cost and Results: The cost of utilities, material, and qualified operating personnel shall be borne by the Contractor. The Contractor shall provide written notice to the Owner's Representative at least five (5) days prior to starting the test and shall provide a written record of test results using recording type instruments where practical. E. Verbal Operating Instructions: Upon completion of work, and at a time designated by the Owner's Representative, a competent representative from each supplier of major equipment items shall instruct a representative of the Owner in the operation and maintenance of the equipment supplied by his company. The minimum instruction time shall be one 4-hour period for air handling units, one 8-hour day for chillers, one 4-hour period for pumps and one 8-hour day for temperature control systems. F. Certification: After completion of air and water balancing operations, the authorized representative for each type of equipment shall check the equipment operation and shall certify that the equipment is operating properly. 3.04 CLEANING OF EQUIPMENT AND PREMISES A. Contractor shall thoroughly clean all equipment and apparatus and leave in satisfactory condition for finishing and painting. If equipment has been supplied with factory finish, Contractor shall be responsible for touchup work and/or refmishing if required. During construction, contractor shall be responsible for clean up of cartons, scrap or debris caused by his work, and complete cleanup of the area after each day of work. B. Each air handling system shall be thoroughly cleaned before being put into operation, either by vacuum cleaning or blowing out with a pressure blower. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-6 SECTION 15250 -INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. The work under this section includes the furnishing of all labor material, and equipment, and performing all operations in connection with heating, ventilating and air conditioning work, as shown and specified. B. The work includes but is not necessarily limited to: 1. Ductwork Insulation 2. Domestic Hot Water Pipe Insulation 3. Condensate Drain Insulation 4. Exposed Waste Pipe Insulation 1.02 REFERENCE TO OTHER SECTIONS A. The applicable requirements from the following Sections shall form a part of the heating, ventilating and air conditioning (HVAC) work and the Contractor shall consult them in detail for general and specific requirements. Section 15010 Basic Mechanical Requirements Section 15400 Plumbing Section 15890 Ductwork & Accessories PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All material and equipment used in the installation shall be new and in perfect condition when installed. Material, equipment and components shall be the standard catalog product of reputable manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacturing of such equipment. All articles provided from the same general purpose or use shall be of the same make. Submittal of any equipment for approval shall specifically indicate any item that does not meet the specification. If approval is given when such items have not been listed, removal of the equipment maybe required. 2.02 INSULATION A. Duct Insulation 1. All insulation materials shall have flame spread of not more than 25 and a smoke-developed rating of not more than 50. 2. All concealed supply ducts shall be insulated with Manville "Microlite", Owens-Corning Fiberglass or equal, fiberglass duct insulation with "FSK" foil Carlsbad City Library Learning Center INSULATION 15250-1 skrim kraft vapor barrier facing, factory applied. Insulation shall have an "R" factor of 4.0 minimum. 3. All concealed return and exhaust ducts shall be insulated as per supply ducts but with a factory applied Class 1 vinyl facing. 4. Ducts and plenums where indicated on the drawings shall be lined with Manville Mat faced "Lina-Coustic" Standard, Owens-Coming fiberglass "Aero Flex", or equal. Lining shall have an "R" factor of 4.0 minimum. B. Pipe Insulation 1. General: All insulation and covers shall have a UL flame spread not higher than 25 and a smoke developed rating not higher than 50. 2. Air Conditioning Condensate Piping: All copper condensate piping located inside of building shall be insulated with 1/2 inch thick flexible cellular foamed plastic insulation having not more than a 0.28 K factor at 75 degrees f mean. Insulation shall be Thermo-Cel, Armstrong, or equal. 3. Hot Water Piping: All hot water piping and fittings above ground shall be insulated with preformed fiberglass pipe insulation with "ASJ" jacket. Thickness shall be per Table 1 -G of the 1992 California Energy Commission Energy Efficiency Standard. Pipe insulation shall be Schuller"Micro-Lok", or equal. Fitting covers shall be Schuller'Zeston 2000 pvc" with insert, or equal. Joints shall be sealed per manufacturers instructions. 4. Exposed Waste Pipe: All exposed waste piping under lavatories, accessible to physically handicapped shall be insulated with prefabricated trap insulation. Insulation shall be Truebro Inc "Handi Lav-Guard ", or equal. 5. Insulation Inserts: Where the insulation supports the weight of pipe, an insert of calcium silicate shall be installed between the pipe and hangers or supports. Insert length shall be not less than 18 inches. The inserts shall be full rounded sections. Jacket on inserts shall match the adjacent jacketing. Where required, the insert section shall be coated with mastic to provide an effective vapor seal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. All work shall be performed by skilled mechanics, under the supervision of a competent foreman and in accordance with the best standards of practice of the trade. 3.02 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Duct Insulation 1. Before installing duct insulation, sheet metal ducts shall be clean, dry and Carlsbad City Library Learning Center INSULATION 15250-2 tightly sealed at all joints and seams. 2. Duct wraps shall be cut to "stretch-out" dimensions as provided in manufacturer's instructions, and a 2" piece of insulation removed from the facing at the end of the piece of insulation to form an overlapping staple and tape flap. Install with facing outside so tape flap overlaps insulation and facing at other end. Insulation shall be tightly butted. If ducts are rectangular, install so insulation is not excessively compressed at duct corners. Seams shall be stapled approximately 6" on center with outward clinching staples then taped. On supply ducts with vapor barrier facing, the tape shall be vapor barrier tape. On return ducts with vinyl facing, duct tape is acceptable. Seal all seams, tears, punctures and other penetrations of the insulation facing with tape, as described above. Where rectangular ducts are 18" or wider, duct wrap shall be secured to the bottom of the duct with mechanical fasteners spaced a maximum of 12" on center. 3. All duct dimensions shown on drawings are net clear inside and shall be increased to accommodate lining. B. Pipe Insulation 1. Piping insulation shall be applied over clean, dry pipe with all joints butted firmly together. The factory attached jacket shall be pasted smoothly over the insulation with Benjamin Foster 85-20 adhesive, Arabol, or equal. Longitudinal jacket laps shall be secured with outward clinched staples on maximum 7 inch centers. Both edges and end laps of butt strips shall be securely stapled. Insulation shall be continuous. 2. Pumps shall be insulated in such a manner to permit removal of the insulation for pump inspection and repair without destroying the insulation. 3. Protective shield of 14 gauge galvanized steel shall be placed between the insulation and all hangers and rollers. Shield shall cover the lower one-half of the insulation and have a length not less than 12 inches long and be secured to jacket. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center INSULATION 15250-3 SECTION 15400 -PLUMBING PART1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. The work under this section includes the furnishing of all labor, material and equipment and performing all operations in connection with plumbing work, as indicated on the drawings, specified herein, or reasonably implied to complete the work. This includes but is not necessarily limited to: 1. Sanitary sewer and vent system 2. Rainwater drain system 3. Condensate drain system 4. Domestic water system 5. Fuel gas system B. The word "piping" in this section includes pipe, fittings, nipples, valves, and any accessory pertinent to mains and connections throughout the system. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The applicable requirements from the following sections shall form a part of this section. Section 15010 Basic Mechanical Requirements PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All materials, fixtures, and equipment shall be new and of the type and grade specified. All materials used for the same general use shall be of the same type, grade and manufacturer. B. Unless otherwise specified, all exposed AP® traps shall be adjustable, 17 gauge, chrome plated brass. C. Unless otherwise specified, all exposed angle stops, nipples, and escutcheons shall be chrome plated brass. D. Accessible plumbing fixtures shall comply with all of the requirements of CBC section 1115B. E. Heights and location of all fixtures shall be in accordance with CBC table 1115B-1. F. Fixture controls shall comply with CBC section 111 SB. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center PLUMBING 15400-1 2.02 FIXTURES A. Protection: Cover and protect all fixtures until completion. B. Exposed Metal: Unless otherwise specified, all exposed metal at fixtures shall be polished chrome plated. C. Suppliers: Unless otherwise specified, individual fixtures shall all be from the same manufacturer, not intermixed. D. Water Closet, ADA, WC-1 1. Water closet shall meet the Fixture Schedule on Plumbing Drawings. E. Urinal, ADA, U-1 1. Urinal shall meet the Fixture Schedule on Plumbing Drawings. F. Lavatory, ADA, L-1 1. Lavatory shall meet the Fixture Schedule on Plumbing Drawings. G. Sink, S-1 1. Sink shall meet the Fixture Schedule on Plumbing Drawings. H. Service Sink, S-1 1. Service sink shall meet the Fixture Schedule on Plumbing Drawings. I. Drinking Fountain (Electric Water Cooler), ADA, DF-1 1. Drinking Fountain shall meet the Fixture Schedule on Plumbing Drawings. J. Hose Bibb, HB-1 1. Hose Bibb shall be meet the Fixture Schedule on Plumbing Drawings. K. Floor Drain, FD-1 1. Floor drain shall meet the Fixture Schedule on Plumbing Drawings. L. Roof Drain, RD-1 1. Roof drain shall be low profile with cast iron body and 8-1/2 inch diameter dome. Outlet size shall be as shown on drawing. Roof drain shall be J.R. Smith 1330, Zum Z-125, or equal. 2. Flashing material shall be Nobleflex chlorinated polyethylene roof drain flashing, or equal. M. Overflow Roof Drain, ORD-1 Carlsbad City Library Learning Center PLUMBING 15400 - 2 1. Overflow roof drain shall be low profile with cast iron body, 8-1/2 inch diameter dome and a 2-inch high water dam. Outlet size shall be as shown on drawing. Overflow roof drain shall be J.R. Smith 1330-WD, Zum Z-125- 89, or equal. 2. Flashing material shall be Nobleflex chlorinated polyethylene roof drain flashing, or equal. 2.03 EQUIPMENT A. Protection: All equipment shall be protected against damage during storage and installation. B. Backflow Preventer, BP-1: Backflow Preventer shall be AWWA C511-92 and USC/FCCC approved. Backflow preventer shall be a reduced pressure principal type consisting of a pressure differential relief valve located between two independently operated spring loaded center guided check valves, two full port resilient seated bronze ball shut-off valves, and four resilient seated ball test cocks. Line size shall be as specified on the drawing. Backflow preventer shall be Watts series 909, Febco series 825Y, Wilkins 975, or equal. C. Water Pressure Reducing Valve, PRV-1: Pressure reducing valve shall be 2", capable of reducing water pressure from 100 PSI to 50 PSI, and shall be approved by the San Diego Water Utilities Dept. PRV valve shall be Watts 223 (2"), or equal. D. Gas Pressure Regulator, PR-1: Existing Gas pressure regulator shall be re-used. E. Trap Primer, TP-1: Trap primer shall meet the Fixture Schedule on Plumbing Drawings. F. Water Hammer Arrester, WHA-1: Water hammer arrester shall meet the Fixture Schedule on Plumbing Drawings. G. Water Heater, WH-1: Water heater shall meet the Fixture Schedule on Plumbing Drawings. H. Water Heater, WH-2: Water heater shall meet the Fixture Schedule on Plumbing Drawings. I. Circulating Pump, CP-1: Circulating pump shall be designed for domestic water service with 3/4 inch flanged ends, 1/6 hp, and 10 GPM flow at 16 ft. head. Circulating pump shall be Bell and Gossett series Pr, or equal. 2.04 PIPING A. Sanitary Sewer and Vent Piping 1. All soil, waste, and vent piping material and fittings within building and within 5 feet of building boundary shall be cast iron, hubless, per CISPI 301 & IAPMO IS 6, using stainless steel clamps and shield assemblies per CISPI 310. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center PLUMBING 15400-3 2. All soil, waste, and vent piping material and fittings within building and within 5 feet of building boundary shall be Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS), schedule 40 DWV with solvent cemented joints per ASTM D 2661 & IAPMO IS 1. Solvent cement shall conform to ASTM D 2235. 3. (UPC, limited to structures not exceeding 2 floors above grade) 4. (UPC, limited use - see UPC, CA. Chapter 7) 5. All soil, waste, and vent piping material and fittings within building and within 5 feet of building boundary shall be cast Iron, hub and spigot, with flexible compression gaskets, per ASTM A 74. Gaskets shall conform to ASTM C 574. 6. All drainage piping outside of building shall be cast iron, hubless, per CISPI 301 & IAPMO IS 6, using stainless steel clamps and shield assemblies per CISPI 310. 7. All drainage piping outside of building shall be Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC), schedule 40 DWV, with solvent cemented joints per ASTM D 2665 & IAPMO IS 1. Solvent cement shall conform to ASTM D 2564. 8. All drainage piping outside of building shall be cast iron, hub and spigot, with flexible compression gaskets, per ASTM A 74. Gaskets shall conform to ASTM C 574. 9. Cleanouts for Finished Floors: All soil and waste piping cleanouts in finished floor areas shall be cast iron with a round, adjustable, non-skid nickel bronze top, and tapered bronze threaded plug with raised square head or approved counter-sunk rectangular slot. Cleanouts shall be J.R. Smith 4023, Zum ZN- 1400-BP, or equal. 10. Test Tees and Wall Cleanouts: All test tees and wall cleanouts shall be of an approved type. Plugs shall be tapered, threaded bronze and shall have a raised square head or approved counter-sunk rectangular slot. B. Rainwater Piping 1. All rainwater piping within building and within 5 feet of building boundary shall be cast Iron, hubless, per CISPI 301 & IAPMO IS 6, using stainless steel clamps and shield assemblies per CISPI 310. 2. All rainwater piping within building and within 5 feet of building boundary shall be Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS), schedule 40 DWV, with solvent cemented joints per ASTM D 2661 and IAPMO IS 1. Solvent cement shall conform to ASTM D 2235. 3. (limited to structures not exceeding 3 floors above grade) 4. (limited use - see UPC, CA, Appendix D) 5. All rainwater piping within building and within 5 feet of building boundary shall Carlsbad City Library Learning Center PLUMBING 15400-4 be cast iron, hub and spigot, with flexible compression gaskets, per ASTM A 74. Gaskets shall conform to ASTM C 574. 6. All rainwater piping outside of building shall be cast iron, hubless, per CISPI 301 & IAPMO IS 6, using stainless steel clamps and shield assemblies per CISPI 310. 7. All rainwater piping outside of building shall be Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC), schedule 40 DWV, with solvent cemented joints per ASTM D 2665 and IAPMO IS 1. Solvent cement shall conform to ASTM D 2564. 8. All rainwater piping outside of building shall be cast Iron, hub and spigot, with flexible compression gaskets, per ASTM A 74. Gaskets shall conform to ASTM C 574. C. Condensate Drain Piping 1. All air conditioning condensate drain piping material and fittings shall be Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC), schedule 40 DWV, with solvent cemented joints per ASTM D 2665. Solvent cement shall conform to ASTM D 2564. 2. (limited to structures not exceeding 2 floors above grade) D. Domestic Hot and Cold Water Piping 1. All hot and cold water piping within building and within 5 feet of building boundary shall be copper, hard drawn, type "L" conforming to ASTM B 88 with cast solder joint fittings per ANSI B 16.18, or wrought solder joint fittings per ANSI B 16.22. Fittings shall be brazed with a silver base brazing alloy or soldered with a lead-free solder and using a non-corrosive type flux. 2. (above ground inside may use type "M") 3. (Sharp use braze with melting point of not less than 1000 F. deg) 4. All water piping outside of building, below grade, shall be Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC), schedule 40, conforming to ASTM D 1785. Fittings shall be PVC, solvent cemented, schedule 40, per ASTM D 2466. Solvent cement shall conform to ASTM D 2564. 5. Shut off valves 2-inch and smaller shall be 3 piece, full port, bronze ball type, bronze trim, teflon seals, 600 psig WOG, with threaded or solder end joints as required. Valves shall be Nibco S-595 series, Apollo 82 series, or equal. 6. (Sharp requires 3 piece) 7. (400 water =125 steam, 600 water =150 steam) 8. Globe valves 2-inches and smaller shall have a bronze body with rising stem, teflon disc, renewable seat and disc, screw-in bonnet, 200 psi WOG, and threaded or solder end joints as required. Valves shall be Nibco T-211-Y or S-211-Y, Stockham B-13-T or B-14-T, or equal. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center PLUMBING 15400 - 5 9. Check valves 2-inches and smaller shall have a bronze "Y" pattern body swing check valve, bronze disc, screwed cap, 200 psi WOG, with threaded or solder end joints as required. Valves shall be Nibco T-413-B or S-413-B, Stockham B-309, or equal. 10. Unions 3-inches and smaller shall be all bronze with ground joint and 400 pound WWP. 11. Nipples shall be red brass. E. Fuel Gas Piping 1. Gas piping above grade shall be black steel, schedule 40 per ASTM A 53 or ASTM A.120 with malleable iron screw joint fittings conforming to ANSI B16.3 and/or black steel welding fittings conforming to ANSI B16.9. 2. Gas piping below grade shall be polyethylene per ASTM D 2513 and IAPMO IS 12 with heat fusion fittings per ASTM D 2513 and ASTM D 3261. Piping shall be marked per IAMPO IS 12-93 and shall indicate the manufacturers name, nominal pipe size, designation code, "SDR" number, and the words "GAS PIPING" over the complete length of pipe. 3. Gas Cocks 2-inch and smaller shall be all bronze, flat head for gas service, Crane No. 270, Walworth No. 590, or equal. Gas cocks 22-inches and larger shall be for 175 Ib. WWP, lubricated square head, ACF No. R-1430, Nordstrom No. 142, or equal. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Access Panels 1. Access Panels for Valves and Equipment: Wall and ceiling access panels shall have a minimum of 16 gauge doors, with continuous, concealed, fire- rated hinges. Panels shall be paintable and sized suitable for removal or repair of valves or equipment, but not less than 8 inches by 8 inches for hand holes and 20 inches by 24 inches for scuttle holes. Access panels shall be J.R. Smith 4762 series for tile, masonry or dry wall construction, and J.R. Smith 4767 series for plaster or wet wall construction, or equal. 2. Access Covers for Cleanouts: Access covers for walls shall be, 8 inches by 8 inches. Access panels shall be J.R. Smith 4730 series fertile, masonry, or dry wall construction, and 4735 series for plaster or wet wall construction, or equal. B. Pipe Sleeves: Pipe sleeves shall be schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe. C. Dielectric Unions: Dielectric unions shall be Epco, V-Line, or equal. D. Sealant: Sealant shall be silicone rubber, except at fire rated penetrations, sealant shall be Dow Coming 785/5, General Electric SCS 1702, or equal. E. Insulation Carlsbad City Library Learning Center PLUMBING 15400-6 1. General: All insulation and covers shall have a UL flame spread not higher than 25 and a smoke developed rating not higher than 50. 2. Air Conditioning Condensate Piping: All copper condensate piping located inside of building shall be insulated with 2 inch thick flexible cellular foamed plastic insulation having not more than a 0.28 K factor at 75 degrees f mean. Insulation shall be Thermo-Cel, Armstrong, or equal. 3. Hot Water Piping: All hot water piping and fittings above ground shall be insulated with preformed fiberglass pipe insulation with "ASJ" jacket. Thickness shall be per Table 1-G of the 1992 California Energy Commission Energy Efficiency Standard. Pipe insulation shall be Schuller "Micro-Lok", or equal. Fitting covers shall be Schuller "Zeston 2000 pvc" with insert, or equal. Joints shall be sealed per manufactures instructions. 4. Exposed Waste Pipe: All exposed waste piping under lavatories, accessible to physically handicapped shall be insulated with prefabricated trap insulation. Insulation shall be Truebro Inc "Hand! Lav-Guard ", or equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. All work shall be performed by skilled mechanics, under the supervision of a competent foreman and in accordance with the highest standards of practice of the trade. B. All openings in pipes, fittings, fixtures, or equipment shall be capped at the end of each work day. All materials, fixtures, and equipment shall have ample protection to prevent damage during construction. C. Access panels shall be provided for all valves, cleanouts, and other equipment which is concealed in floors, walls, or ceilings. D. The contractor shall be responsible for all damage to any part of the premises or its contents caused by leaks, breaks in piping, fixtures, or equipment furnished and/or installed by contractor for a period of one year from the date of acceptance of the work by the owner or his representative.\ E. Fixtures or equipment with damaged finish shall be removed and replaced with new fixtures/equipment at the contractor's expense. 3.02 FIXTURE/EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Fixture Setting: All fixtures shall be anchored and set level and square in relation to wall and floor lines, and shall be installed with equal spacing where applicable. Voids between fixtures and walls/floors shall be filled with Dow Coming No. 780, white mastic cement. The contractor shall be responsible for correct fixture locations. B. Equipment Setting: All equipment shall be braced or anchored to resist a horizontal force in any direction using the following criteria: a) 30% of operating weight for fixed Carlsbad City Library Learning Center PLUMBING 15400-7 equipment on grade, b) 45% of operating weight for fixed equipment on structure. C. (23 & 34.5 for schools, colleges, jails, public assybldgs) D. (20 & 30 for std occupancy structures) E. Drain Strainers: All drain strainers, unless otherwise specified, shall be set parallel to adjacent wall. F. Electrical Work: See Electrical Section for all electrical work associated with the installation of equipment. 3.03 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Workmanship: All piping, except as shown otherwise on drawings, shall be run concealed in furred walls, partitions, furred ceilings, etc. Prior to installation each piece of pipe and each fitting shall be inspected inside and outside to assure that there are no defects or obstructions. Threaded joints shall be assembled with an approved pipe joint compound applied to male thread only with not more than two threads left exposed. B. Excavation: The Contractor shall be prompt in installing all piping after excavation or cutting for same, so as to keep all excavations for this work open as short a time as possible. No piping, however, shall be permanently closed up, furred in or covered before inspection and approval of same by the Owner's representative. C. Bushings: No bushings or close nipples shall be used. Reducing fittings and shoulder nipples shall be used in all cases. D. Pipe Preparations: Copper tubing/pipe shall be cut square and ends shall be reamed to full size with all burrs removed. Tubing pipe ends and fitting sockets shall be burnished with emery cloth or wire brush before a uniform coat of non-corrosive type flux is applied. E. Pipe Runs: Pipe runs shall be made with full pipe lengths using a minimum of joints. All piping shall be accurately cut to length. No piping shall be forced or sprung into place. All off-sets shall be made with fittings. Bending of pipe is not allowed. F. Pipe Support: Piping shall be supported at each change of direction, at ends of branches, at base and at top of all risers, and wherever necessary to prevent sags, bending, or vibration of the piping. Pipe hangers and supports shall be selected as specified in Manufacturers Standardization Society of Valve and Fittings Industry (MSS) standard SP-69. G. Pipe Isolation: All piping shall be isolated from the building with 1/4 inch hair felt between pipe hangers/supports, pipe insulators, and suspension clamps. H. Pipe Sleeves: All piping passing through concrete/masonry floors and walls, or fire rated partitions shall be provided with standard weight steel pipe sleeves as follows: 1. All sleeves through floors above grade shall extend 1 inch above floor line. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center PLUMBING 15400-8 2. All sleeves shall have 1 inch minimum clearance between the sleeve I.D. and the pipe or pipe insulation. 3. Clearance between sleeve and piping in fire rated walls, floors, or partitions shall be sealed with Underwriters Laboratories listed and Factory Mutual approved sealant. Thickness shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the designated fire rating. Sealant shall be 3M Brand Fire Barrier Sealing System, DowSilicone RTVfoam, or equal. 4. Clearance between sleeve and piping in non-fire rated walls, floors, or partitions shall be sealed with oakum, or equal. I. Connections: All pipe connections to fixture/equipment that requires reduction in size shall be reduced just prior to connection. J. Escutcheons: All pipes passing through walls, floors, and ceilings in finished areas shall have chrome plated steel/brass escutcheons. K. Sanitary Drain and Rainwater Systems 1. Install soil, waste, rainwater, and vent piping to all outlets as shown on drawings. Piping shall be supported and strapped in an approved manner. Sanitary piping in and under the building shall run to a uniform grade. Contractor shall verify the point of connection as shown on drawings regarding invert elevation and location before starting work. Waste lines shall not penetrate shear wall top and bottom plates. 2. Drains: All drains installed not on grade shall incorporate a clamping collar and flashing. Flashing shall extend 8 inches out in all directions. 3. Interior Clean Outs: Interior cleanouts shall be installed where indicated and as required by code. Cleanouts shall be accessible, and where possible, shall be brought to grade and set flush with finished floor. Horizontal drainage piping shall be provided with cleanouts at its upper terminals, at changes in pipe sizes and not over 100 feet apart in any lineal run of piping. 4. Exterior Cleanouts: Exterior cleanouts in concrete or asphalt areas shall set flush with grade or paved area. Cleanouts in earth shall be extended to within 6-inches of finished grade and terminated in a concrete box set level with finished grade. Clean out plugs shall be liberally lubricated with graphite, turned tight and backed off slightly. L. Sanitary Vent System 1. Vents shall be connected together in attic spaces or walls where practical to penetrate roof as few times as possible. Vents shall not penetrate top plates or structural beams but shall offset around them. All vents through roof shall be flashed. 2. Vent Termination: All vents and flue outlets shall be a minimum of 10 feet from all fresh air intakes. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center PLUMBING 15400-9 3. Air Conditioning Condensate System: Install condensate drain piping from air conditioning units to receptors as shown on the drawings. Piping installed on the roof shall be set on redwood blocks, six-foot on centers, set in mastic. M. Domestic Water System 1. Install water piping to all fixtures, hose bibbs, etc., as shown on drawings. All branches to fixtures shall be valved. Single fixtures and lines to hose bibbs shall be valved. Where supplies are concealed, or where indicated, loose- key stops shall be installed. Drop ear fittings with red brass nipples shall be provided at all outlets. 2. Slope: All water piping shall be graded and valved to provide for drainage control of the system. 3. Noise: Water piping shall be installed so as to not cause noise from flow of water under normal conditions. 4. Isolation: Copper lines shall be isolated from all dissimilar metal and equipment with dielectric couplings. Dielectric couplings shall be used for all connections between pipe or tubing and all hot water equipment inlets and outlets. N. Fuel Gas System 1. Install gas piping from gas meterto all outlets as shown on drawings. Provide a gas cock at each outlet. 2. Piping: Gas Piping, concealed or exposed, shall be installed in a neat appearing manner, parallel or perpendicular to building lines. All gas piping shall have threaded fittings. 3.04 TESTING A. General: Operational test shall be conducted on all fixtures, equipment, and devices installed, to determine proper compliance with specifications. All fixtures, equipment, and devices shall function quietly, efficiently, and undue noise or vibration caused by piping, equipment, etc, shall be promptly corrected before acceptance. B. Sanitary Drain and Rainwater System: All sanitary drain, vent and rainwater piping shall be hydrostatically tested to a minimum of a 10 foot head above the head at the highest inlet. Pressure shall be maintained for a minimum of (1) hour. The system shall have no leaks. C. Domestic Water System: Prior to disinfection and installation of pipe insulation, all domestic water piping shall be hydrostatically tested at 125 psig at the highest outlet for minimum of four (4) hours. Any equipment or fixtures that may be damaged by the test should be disconnected. No perceptible gauge loss shall be allowed except for temperature change. D. Natural Gas System: All natural gas piping shall be tested with compressed air at 60 psig minimum with no perceptible drop in pressure. Test shall be made with a Carlsbad City Library Learning Center PLUMBING 15400-10 recording gauge. Test shall be for at least 24 hours. Charts shall include date and time test was started, identification of journeyman responsible for the test, and the signature of the inspector. 3.05 CLEANING A. Disinfection of Portable Water System 1. General: New or repaired potable water systems shall be disinfected prior to use whenever required by the Administrative Authority. The method to be followed shall be that prescribed by the health authority or, in case no method is prescribed by them, the following: 2. The pipe system shall be flushed with clean, potable water until only potable water appears at the point of outlet. 3. The system or parts thereof shall be filled with a water-chlorine solution containing at least fifty (50) parts per million of chlorine and the system or part thereof shall be valved-off and allowed to stand for twenty-four (24) hours, or, the system or part thereof shall be at least two hundred (200) parts per million of chlorine and allowed to stand for three (3) hours. 4. Following the allowed standing time, the system shall be flushed with clean, portable water until the chlorine residual in the water coming from the system does not exceed the chlorine residual in the flushing water. 5. The procedure shall be repeated if it is shown by bacteriological examination made by an approved agency that contamination persists in the system. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center PLUMBING 15400-11 SECTION 15492 - FUEL GAS PIPING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. The work under this section includes the furnishing of all labor, material and equipment and performing all operations in connection with fuel gas piping work, as indicated on the drawings, specified herein, or reasonably implied to complete the work. This includes but is not necessarily limited to: 1. Piping Material 2. Equipment 3. Installation 4. Testing B. The word "piping" in this section includes pipe, fittings, nipples, valves, and any accessory pertinent to mains and connections throughout the system. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The applicable requirements from the following Sections shall form a part of this section. Section 15010 Mechanical General Requirements Section 15400 Plumbing PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All materials, fixtures, and equipment shall be new and of the type and grade specified. All materials for the same general use shall be of the same type, grade and manufacturer. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. Protection: All equipment shall be protected against damage during storage and installation. B. Pressure Regulator PR-1: Gas pressure regulator shall be pilot-operated with the low pressure pilot integrally mounted to the actuator. The pressure regulator shall have a steel body with screwed ends, a nylon disk, and sized to meet the pressure and flow requirements specified on the drawing. Pressure Regulator shall be Fisher Type 99, or equal. 2.03 PIPING Carlsbad City Library Learning Center FUEL GAS PIPING 15492 -1 A. Gas Piping, Above Grade: Gas piping shall be black steel, schedule 40 per ASTM A 53 or ASTM A120, with malleable iron screw type fittings conforming to ANSI B16.3 and/or black steel welding fittings conforming to ANSI B16.9. B. Gas Piping, Buried: Buried gas piping shall be polyethylene per ASTM D 2513 and IAPMO IS 12, with heat fusion fittings per ASTM D 2513 and ASTM D 3261. Piping shall be marked per IAMPO IS 12-93 and shall indicate the manufacturers name, nominal pipe size, designation code, "SDR" number, and the words "GAS PIPING" over the complete length of the pipe. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Access Panels: Wall and ceiling access panels shall have a minimum of 16 gauge doors with continuous, concealed, fire rated hinges. Panels shall be stainless steel and sized suitable for removal or repair of valves or equipment, but not less than 8 inches by 8 inches for hand holes and 20 inches by 24 inches for scuttle holes. Access panels shall be Elmdor Model DW, J.R. Smith 4760 series for tile, masonry or dry wall construction, and Elmdor Model DWB, J.R. Smith 4765 series for plaster or wet wall construction, or equal. B. Pipe Sleeves: Pipe sleeves shall be schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe. C. Dielectric Unions: Dielectric unions or couplings shall be Epco, V-Line, or equal. D. Sealant: Sealant shall be silicone rubber, except at fire rated penetrations. Sealant shall be Dow Coming 785/5, General Electric SCS 1702, or equal. E. Gas Cocks: Gas cocks 2-inch and smaller shall all bronze, flat head for gas service, Crane No. 270, Walworth No. 590, or equal. Gas cocks 22-inches and larger shall be for 175 Ib. WWP with lubricated square head, ACF No. R-1430, Nordstrom No. 142, or equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. All work shall be performed by skilled mechanics under the supervision of a competent foreman and in accordance with the highest standards of practice of the trade B. All openings in pipes, fittings, or equipment shall be capped at the end of each work day. All materials and equipment shall have ample protection to prevent damage during construction. C. Access panels shall be provided for all valves and equipment which is concealed in floors, walls, or ceilings. D. The contractor shall be responsible for all damage to any part of the premises or its contents caused by leaks, breaks in piping or equipment furnished and/or installed by contractor, for a period of one year from the date of accepta nee of the work by the owner or his representative. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center FUEL GAS PIPING 15492-2 E. Equipment with damaged finish shall be removed and replaced with new equipment at the contractors expense. 3.02 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Extend gas piping to all outlets as shown on drawings and provide a gas cock at each outlet. B. Gas piping, concealed or exposed, shall be installed in a neat appearing manner, parallel or perpendicular to building lines. All gas piping shall have threaded fittings. C. Workmanship: All piping, except as shown otherwise on drawings, shall be run concealed in furred walls, partitions, furred ceilings, etc. Prior to installation, each piece of pipe and each fitting shall be inspected inside and outside to assure that there are no defects or obstructions. Threaded joints shall be assembled with an approved pipe joint compound applied to male thread only with not more than two threads left exposed. D. Excavation: The Contractor shall be prompt in installing all piping after excavation or cutting for same, so as to keep all excavations for this work open as short a time as possible. No piping, however, shall be permanently closed up, furred in or covered before inspection and approval of same by the Owner's representative. E. Bushings: No bushings or close nipples shall be used. Reducing fittings and shoulder nipples shall be used in all cases. F. Pipe Runs: Pipe runs shall be made with full pipe lengths using a minimum of joints. All piping shall be accurately cut to length. No piping shall be forced or sprung into place. All off-sets shall be made with fittings. Bending of pipe is not allowed. G. Pipe Support: Piping shall be supported at each change of direction, at ends of branches, at base and at top of all risers, and wherever necessary, to prevent sags, bending, or vibration of the piping. Pipe hangers and supports shall be selected as specified in Manufacturers Standardization Society of Valve and Fittings Industry (MSS) Standard SP-69 H. Pipe Isolation: All piping shall be isolated from the building with 1-1/4 inch hair felt between pipe and hangers/supports, pipe insulators, suspension clamps, and piping. I. Pipe Sleeves: All piping passing through concrete/masonry floors and walls, or fire rated partitions shall be provided with standard weight, steel pipe sleeves as follows: 1. All sleeves through floors above grade shall extend 1 inch above floor line. 2. All sleeves shall have 1 inch minimum clearance between the sleeve i.d. and the pipe. 3. Clearance between sleeves and piping in fire rated walls, floors, or partitions shall be sealed with Underwriters Laboratories listed and Factory Mutual approved sealant. Thickness shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the designated fire rating. Sealant shall be 3M Brand Fire Barrier Sealing System, DowSilicone RTV foam, or equal. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center FUEL GAS PIPING 15492-3 4. Clearance between sleeves and piping in non-fire rated walls, floors, or partitions shall be sealed with oakum, or equal. J. Escutcheons: All pipes passing through walls, floors, and ceilings in finished areas shall have chrome plated steel escutcheons. 3.03 TESTING A. Operational Test: Operational tests shall be made on all equipment and devices to determine proper compliance with specifications. All equipment shall function quietly and efficiently; and undue noise or vibration caused by malfunctioning of piping, equipment, etc., shall be promptly corrected before acceptance. B. Gas Piping: Gas piping shall be tested with compressed air to maintain not less than 60 psig for gas, with no perceptible drop in pressure. Test shall be made with a recording gage. Test shall be for not less than 24 hours. Charts shall be identified as to date and time test was started, identity of journeyman responsible for the test, and the signature of the inspector. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center FUEL GAS PIPING 15492-4 SECTION 15890 - DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. The work under this section includes the furnishing of all labor material, and equipment, and performing all operations in connection with heating, ventilating and air conditioning work, as shown and specified. B. The work includes but is not necessarily limited to: 1. Ductwork 2. Fire/Smoke Damper 3. Access Doors 1.02 REFERENCE TO OTHER SECTIONS A. The applicable requirements from the following Sections shall form a part of the heating, ventilating and air conditioning (HVAC) work and the Contractor shall consult them in detail for general and specific requirements. Section 15010 Basic Mechanical Requirements Section 15950 Controls Section 15990 Balancing Air & Water Systems PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All material and equipment used in the installation shall be new and in perfect condition when installed. Material, equipment and components shall be the standard catalog product of reputable manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacturing of such equipment. All articles provided for the same general purpose or use shall be of the same make. Submittal of any equipment for approval shall specifically indicate any item that does not meet the specification. If approval is given when such items have not been listed, removal of the equipment maybe required. 2.02 DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES A. All ducts shall be prime quality galvanized steel and shall be lock-forming quality (LFQ) with a galvanized coating of 1-1/4 ounces total for both sides of 1 square foot of sheet. 1. Round ducts and fittings shall be galvanized steel of spiral construction. The elbows shall be a minimum of 12 times the duct radius. B. Flexible Ducts: Flexible duct shall be factory fabricated assembly, consisting of a Carlsbad City Library Learning Center DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES 15890-1 galvanized spring steel wire helix, covered with a continuous non-perforated air sealed liner, wrapped with glass fiber insulation, 1 -1/2" thick (K = 0.25 @ 75 degrees F). The assembly shall be enclosed in a Class 1, fire resistive, vapor barrier jacket, factory sealed at both ends. Individual lengths of flexible ducts shall be a maximum of seven feet long and shall include factory fabricated steel collars. C. Fan Connections: Duct connections to fans, blowers and air handling units shall be made with flexible duct connector of approved design, with a minimum distance of 2 inches between ducts and fans and minimum 1/2 inch slack in flexible material. Flexible connectors shall be heat-resistant and waterproof, glass fiber with a non- porous, fire-resistant, neoprene coating (both sides). Material shall be approved by State of California Fire Marshal and Underwriter's Laboratories. Connection shall be easily removable with an ordinary screwdriver. Connections shall be Ventglass, Ventfabrics, Neoprene by Duro-Dyne, or equal. Flexible material shall overlap minimum 2 inches at seam and shall be closed airtight. D. Volume dampers shall be manufactured of 16 gauge sheet metal with locking quadrants and shall be opposed blade type. Where dimension of duct exceeds 19 inches by 12 inches, blades shall not be over 8 inches wide. Bearing shall be provided; holes punched in ductwork to serve as bearings will not be accepted. Damper quadrant sizes shall be as follows: Up to 40 square inches shall be 1/4 inch quadrant, up to 18 inches wide by 12 inches high shall be 3/8 inch quadrant, and over 18 inches by 12 inches shall be 1/2 inch quadrant. Dampers shall be caulked in the ducts to avoid by-pass. Damper blade position on all dampers shall be indicated by filing a notch in the exposed operation rod or splitter damper rod. Volume control dampers shall be installed in all branch ducts, whether shown on drawings or not, to allow balancing of the system. Where dampers, frames and blades constitute an obstruction in excess of 15% of the duct area, the duct shall be increased in size to receive the dampers. E. Access Doors: Duct access doors to all fire dampers shall be insulated access doors, as manufactured by Ventfabrics, Inc., Duro-Dyne, or equal. Doors shall be 24 gauge metal, 18 gauge frame, insulated 1/2 inch fiberglass, covered with 28 gauge metal, with loose pin hinges, and Ventfabric, Duro-Dyne latches, or equal. Door frame shall contain felt gasket, and a sponge rubber gasket shall be attached to back of each doorframe to insure tight seal between duct and frame. Finish shall be factory applied. Service shall be stenciled on door, e.g., "Fire Damper" in 1/2 inch letters. Size shall be 18 inch by 12 inch where space and duct size permit. On small ducts and in restricted space, 12 inch by 12 inch may be used. F. Volume damper inaccessible above ceiling and other locations shall be equipped with Ventfabrics No. 666, Duro-Dyne SRC, or equal, concealed type regulator with zinc-plated cover suitable for painting or equivalent instead of the locking damper quadrant specified above. G. Fire/Smoke Dampers 1. Type "FD-A": Fire dampers shall be approved and listed by the California State Fire Marshal. Provide submittal data indicating the California State Fire Marshal approved numbers before installation. Fire dampers shall be complete with fusible link with 165° F rating. Where damper frame and blade constitute an obstruction in excess of 15% of the duct area, the duct shall be Carlsbad City Library Learning Center DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES 15890-2 increased in size to receive the damper. All fire dampers shall be tested in accordance with SFM Test Standard 43.2, Title 19. 2. Type "FD-B": Fire dampers shall be approved and listed by the California State Fire Marshal. Provide submittal data indicating the California State Fire Marshal approved numbers before installation. Fire dampers shall be complete with fusible link with 165° F rating. All fire dampers shall be tested in accordance with SFM Test Standard 43.2, Title 19. 3. Type "FSD-C": Combination fire and smoke dampers shall be approved and listed by the California State Fire Marshal as a combination fire damper and leakage smoke damper. Leakage rating under UL555S shall be no higher than Class II at an elevated category. Combination fire and smoke dampers shall be complete with fusible link with 165° F rating and 120 volt electric motor operators. Where damper frame and blade constitute an obstruction in excess of 15% of the duct area, the duct shall be increased in size to receive the damper. All combination fire and smoke dampers shall be tested in accordance with SFM Test Standard 43.7, Title 19. Provide documentation that installed dampers were tested in accordance with SFM Standard 43.7. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. All work shall be performed by skilled mechanics, under the supervision of a competent foreman and in accordance with the best standards of practice of the trade. 3.02 DUCTWORK INSTALLATION A. Ductwork fabrication and installation shall conform to the recommendation of the latest edition of the HVAC Duct Construction Standards, as published by the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Assoc., Inc., (SMACNA). These standards shall govern type of seams and joints, reinforcing and supports, comer closures duct hangers, elbows, turning vanes (use double vane-type), tapers offsets; streamliners, branches from mains, tee connections, register grille and ceiling diffuser connections, volume dampers, access doors in ducts, fire damper installation, and plenums. B. Sheet Metal Installation: All necessary allowances and provisions shall be made in the installation of the ducts for the structural condition of the building, and ducts shall be transformed or divided as may be required, and where necessary to do this, the required area shall be maintained. All of these changes, however, shall be approved and installed as directed by the Owner's Representative. During the installation, the open ends of ducts shall be protected to prevent debris and dirt from entering same. Contractor shall install this work in accordance with the approved progress schedule and in cooperation with others, so there will be no delay in other trades. C. All ducts shall be sealed airtight by covering all duct joints and connections to equipment with a 4 inch minimum width of 6 ounce canvas pasted in with lagging adhesive or high pressure duct sealer. Duct exposed in non-conditioned spaces Carlsbad City Library Learning Center DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES 15890-3 shall have canvas and lagging painted with aluminum paint to match adjacent galvanized duct. D. Ducts passing through floors shall be sealed off in an approved manner, preserving both the fire rating of the structure and to prevent air or water leakage or transfer of noise between floors. E. All supply and return duct seams and joints exposed to weather shall be caulked watertight with acrylic sealant, and shall have 4 inch minimum width of 6 ounces canvas pasted on with lagging adhesive. F. Volume control dampers shall be installed in all branch ducts, whether shown on drawings or not, to allow balancing of system and adjust air quantities to all supply, return and exhaust outlets and outside air intakes. Dampers provided with outlets shall not be used for balancing. G. Flexible duct shall be installed in a fully extended condition, free of sags and kinks, and, as far as practical, using only the minimum length required to make the connection. Flexible ducts shall be supported independently of the air outlets, and where horizontal support is required, shall be suspended on 36-inch centers with a minimum 3/4 inch wide flat banding material. Connection of flexible duct (termination connections and joints) shall be made with 1/2 inch wide positive locking steel straps. H. Duct Air Leakage Test 1. General: Test all ductwork and plenums for leaks, using a portable high pressure blower and calibrated flow metering tube. Ducts may be tested in sections. Isolate and provide temporary caps as required. Make test before sections are concealed. 2. Duct Test Pressure: a. System pressure up to 1" w.g. test for 1 -1/4" w.g. b. System pressure 1" w.g. to 2" w.g. test for 2-1/2" w.g. c. System pressure 2" w.g. to 3" w.g. test for 3-3/4" w.g. d. System pressure 3" w.g. to 4" w.g. test for 5" w.g. 3. Procedures a. Seal all openings in duct and plenum section to be tested. b. Connect blower and flow metering tube to duct being tested, using a flexible duct connection or hose. c. Close damper on blower suction side, to prevent excessive buildup pressure. d. Start blower and gradually open damper on suction side of blower. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES 15890-4 e. Build up pressure in test section to static pressure indicated. f. Determine total leakage by make-up air flow measurement using a calibrated orifice tube with its individual calibrated curve and make repairs as required. g. Determine total leakage, allowable of 5%, based upon the total operating CFM of system being tested. Determine total leakage by summation of leakage for each section of system tested. 3.03 ELECTRICAL WORK A. Items covered under Electrical Section of Work: 1. All power wiring, conduits and connections serving motors, to disconnect switches for control circuits, and to control panels which are equipment mounted. 2. Disconnect switches shall be furnished, installed, wired and connected. 3. Wiring, gutters, junction boxes, outlets and miscellaneous devices shall be furnished, installed, wired and connected. 4. Final power connections to electrical power driven equipment. B. Items covered under Mechanical Section of Work: 1. All power wiring, conduits and connections serving motors on automatic (temperature) control devices and to control panels which are not factory mounted. 2. All automatic (temperature) control and interlock wiring, regardless of voltage and conduits for same, necessary for proper operation of equipment, shall be furnished, installed, wired and connected. This includes interlock wiring between motor starter, coils, interlocking relays, magnetic contactors, equipment control panels and temperature control devices. 3. Control transformer, push buttons, toggle switches, temperature control devices, etc., shall be furnished, installed, wired and connected. C. Items covered under both Mechanical and Electrical Section of Work: 1. It shall be the responsibility of both Contractors to provide equipment with the proper electrical characteristics for the electrical service provided. All necessary electrical components to provide a complete system shall be furnished. 3.04 TEST AND BALANCE A. The Mechanical Contractor shall in general, cooperate with the Test and Balance Agency and specifically Paragraph 1.7 of Section 15990 of the specifications. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES 15890-5 END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES 15890-6 SECTION 15990 - BALANCING AIR & WATER SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. The work in this section includes the adjusting and balancing of all heating, ventilation and air conditioning systems. B. The General Contractor will select and employ an impartial, independent balancing agency to provide testing and balancing services for the heating, ventilating and air conditioning system of this project. These services will be paid for by the General Contractor. Final approval of the balancing agency shall be the Owner's Representative. The balancing agency will have a contractual relationship with the General Contractor. C. The schedule for testing and balancing the HVAC systems shall be established by the General Contractor in coordination with the balancing agency. It is the balancing agency's responsibility to initiate this continuing coordination to determine his schedule for the final testing and balancing services and the periodic inspections required during construction. 1.02 REFERENCE TO OTHER SECTIONS A. The applicable requirements from the following sections shall form a part of balancing of air and water system work and the agency shall consult them in detail for general and specific requirements. Section 15010 Basic Mechanical Requirements Section 15400 Plumbing Section 15800 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning 1.03 QUALIFICATIONS OF THE BALANCING AGENCY A. The balancing agency shall be a member of the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB). B. To perform required professional services, the balancing agency shall have a minimum of one Test and Balance Engineer certified by the Associated Air Balance Council or the National Environmental Balancing Bureau. C. This certified Test and Balance Engineer shall be responsible for supervision and certification for the total work herein specified. D. The balancing agency shall submit records of experience in the field of air and hydronic system balancing or any other data as requested by the Owner's Representative. The supervisory personnel for the firm shall have at least five (5) years experience, and all the employees used in this project shall be qualified technicians in this specific field. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center BALANCING AIR AND WATER SYSTEMS 15990-1 E. The balancing agency shall furnish all necessary calibrated instrumentation to adequately perform the specified services. An inventory of all instruments and devices in possession of the balancing agency may be required by the Owner's Representative to determine the balancing agency's performance capability. F. The balancing agency shall have operated for a minimum of three (3) years under its current name. 1.04 STANDARDS A. The balancing agency shall perform the services specified herein in accordance with the Associated Air Balance Council's or National Environmental Balancing Bureau's NATIONAL STANDARDS, including revisions, to the date of the contract. B. All terms in this specification shall have their meaning defined as stated in the NATIONAL STANDARDS. C. If these specifications set forth more stringent requirements than the NATIONAL STANDARDS, these specifications shall prevail. 1.05 DOCUMENTS A. The Architect will provide the balancing agency one (1) copy of the following documents: 1. Project drawings (mechanical sepias if requested) and specifications. 2. Approved construction revisions pertaining to the HVAC systems. 3. Approved submittal data on HVAC equipment and systems to be installed by the Mechanical Subcontractor. 4. Approved HVAC shop drawings. 5. Approved HVAC wiring diagrams, control diagrams, and equipment brochures, as appropriate. 1.06 COORDINATION A. It will be necessary for the balancing agency to perform its services in close coordination with the Mechanical Subcontractor. B. The plans and specifications have indicated meters, valves, dampers, and other devices for the purposes of adjusting the system to obtain optimum operating conditions. It will be the responsibility of the Mechanical Subcontractor to install these devices in a manner that will leave them accessible and readily adjustable. The balancing agency shall provide guidance if there is a questionable arrangement of a control or balancing device. C. The General Contractor, Mechanical Contractor, Temperature Control Subcontractor, and the suppliers of the HVAC equipment shall all cooperate with the balancing agency to provide all necessary data on the design and proper application Carlsbad City Library Learning Center BALANCING AIR AND WATER SYSTEMS 15990-2 of the system components. In addition, they shall furnish all labor and materials required to eliminate any system deficiencies. 1.07 RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR A. The Mechanical Contractor shall complete the installation and start all HVAC systems to ensure they are working property, and shall perform all other items as described hereinafter, to assist the balancing agency in performing the testing and balancing of the HVAC systems. The Mechanical Contractor shall put all HVAC systems and equipment in full operation and shall continue the operating of them during each working day of testing and balancing. B. Air Distribution Systems 1. Verify installation for conformity to design. 2. Terminate all supply, return and exhaust ducts, and pressure test them for leaking, as required by specification. 3. Ensure that all splitters, extractors, and volume and fire dampers are property located and functional. Dampers serving requirements of minimum and maximum outside, return, relief, and exhaust air shall provide tight closure and full opening, with a smooth and free operation. 4. Verify that all supply, return, exhaust, and transfer grilles; registers' diffusers; and high-pressure terminal units are installed and operational. 5. Ensure that air-handling systems, units, and associated apparatus, such as heating and cooling coils, filter sections, access doors, etc., are blanked and/or sealed to eliminate excessive by-pass or leakage of air. 6. Ensure that all fans (supply, return, relief, and exhaust) are operating and free of vibration. All fans and drives shall be checked for proper fan rotation and belt tension. Overload protection shall be of proper size and rating. A record of motor current and voltage shall be made to verify that the motors do not exceed nameplate rating. 7. Make any necessary changes to the sheaves, belts, and dampers, as required by the balancing agency, at no additional cost to the Owner. 8. Install clean filters. C. Water Circulating Systems 1. Verify installation for conformity to design. 2. Check all pumps to verify pump alignment and rotations. 3. Ensure that systems are clean, with the proper strainer screens installed for normal operation. 4. Check all pump motors for current and voltage, to ensure that motors do not Carlsbad City Library Learning Center BALANCING AIR AND WATER SYSTEMS 15990-3 exceed nameplate rating. 5. Provide overload protection of proper size and rating. 6. Ensure that all water circulating systems shall be full and free of air; that expansion tanks are set for proper water level; and that all air vents were installed at high points of systems and are operating. 7. Check and set operating temperatures of heat exchangers to design requirements. 1.08 RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE TEMPERATURE CONTROL CONTRACTOR A. The Temperature Control Contractor shall complete the installation of the temperature control system, and operate and test all control systems to ensure they are functioning properly as designed. The Temperature Control Contractor shall assist the balancing agency in testing and balancing the HVAC systems, as described hereinafter. 1. Verify that all control components are installed in accordance with project requirements and are functional, including all electrical interlocks, damper sequences, air and water reset, and fire and freeze stats. 2. Verify that all controlling instruments are calibrated and set for design operating conditions. 3. Calibrate room thermostats after installation, and before the thermostat control verification tests are performed. The balancing agency shall prove the accuracy of final settings by taking temperature readings. The readings shall be in a typical conditioned space for each separately controlled zone. 4. The Temperature Control Contractor shall allow sufficient time in the project to provide assistance and instruction to the balancing agency in the proper use and setting of control components such as, but not limited to, computers, static pressure controllers, or any other device that may need set points changed, so that the testing and balancing work can be performed. 1.09 NOTIFICATION FOR TESTING AND BALANCING WORK TO BEGIN A. The General Contractor shall notify the balancing agency in writing when all heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems are complete and ready for testing and balancing. The Mechanical Contractor shall attest that he has completed all items as described in Section 1.7 of these specifications. B. If, upon commencing the work, the Balancing Contractor finds that the systems are not ready, or if a dispute occurs as to the readiness of the systems, the balancing agency shall request an inspection to be made by the Mechanical Engineer. This inspection shall establish, to the satisfaction of the represented parties, whether or not the systems meet the basic requirements for testing and balancing. Should the inspection reveal the notification to have been premature, all costs for the inspection and work previously accomplished by the balancing agency shall be paid for by the General Contractor. Furthermore, such items that are not ready for testing and Carlsbad City Library Learning Center BALANCING AIR AND WATER SYSTEMS 15990-4 balancing shall be completed and placed in operational readiness before testing and balancing services shall again be requested. 1.10 QUANTITIES A. In all cases where a device, operation, procedure, tool, equipment, or part of the equipment is herein referred to in the singular number, it is intended that such reference shall apply to as many such devices as required to complete the testing and balancing specified herein. PART 2 - RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE BALANCING AGENCY 2.01 SCOPE A. In accordance with Project Drawings and Specifications and as specified herein, the balancing agency shall provide all supervision, personnel, instruments, calibration equipment, and all other materials and services necessary to perform all testing and balancing of the heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems. All test data, including all pertinent calculations, shall be reported on appropriate forms. 2.02 GENERAL A. The testing and balancing of the heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems shall be performed by an independent balancing agency approved by the Owner's Representative. The balancing agency shall have a minimum of five years specialized experience in air and hydronic system balancing, and possess calibrated instruments, qualified Test and Balance Engineers, and skilled technicians to perform all required tests. The balancing agency shall be a certified member of the Associated Air Balance Council. B. The tests shall demonstrate the specified capacities and operation of all equipment and materials comprising the systems. The balancing agency shall then make available to the Owner's Representative such instruments and technicians as are required for spot checks of the system. C. The balancing agency shall not instruct or direct the Mechanical Contractor in any of the work. Any proposed changes or revision in the design shall be submitted to the Architect in writing. The Architect shall, in coordination with his Engineer, process the proposal as appropriate. 2.03 SERVICES A. Preliminary Report: Review plans and specifications prior to installation of any of the affected system. Submit a written report to the General Contractor indicating any deficiencies in the system that would preclude the proper adjusting, balancing, and testing of the system. B. During construction, the balancing agency shall inspect the installation of pipe systems, sheet metal work, temperature controls and other component parts of the heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems. The inspections shall be performed periodically as the work progresses. A minimum of two inspections are Carlsbad City Library Learning Center BALANCING AIR AND WATER SYSTEMS 15990-5 required as follows: (1) when 60% of the duct work is installed; (2) when 90% of the equipment is installed. The balancing agency shall submit a brief written report of each inspection to the Owner's Representative. C. Upon completion of the installation and start-up of the mechanical equipment by the Mechanical Contractor, the balancing agency shall test and balance the system components to obtain optimum conditions in each conditioned space in the building. If construction deficiencies are encountered that preclude obtaining optimum conditions, and the deficiencies cannot be corrected by the Mechanical Contractor within a reasonable period of time, the balancing agency shall cease testing and balancing services and advise the Owner in writing of the deficiencies. 2.04 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURES A. The balancing agency shall perform the following testing and balancing functions in accordance with the Associated Air Balance Council's NATIONAL STANDARDS: 1. Fan Speeds: Test and adjust fan RPM to achieve design CFM requirements. 2. Current and Voltage: Measure and record motor current and voltage. 3. Pitot Tube Traverse: Perform a Pitot tube traverse of main supply and return ducts to obtain total CFM 4. Outside Air: Test and adjust system minimum outside air by Pitot tube traverse. If a Pitot tube traverse is not practical, the percentage of outside air may be determined by calculations from the return air, outside air, and mixed air temperatures. Make allowances for heat of compression and motor heat where applicable. 5. Static Pressure: Test and record system pressures, including suction and discharge static pressure of each fan. 6. Air Temperature: Take wet-bulb and dry-bulb air temperatures on the entering and leaving side of each cooling coil. Dry-bulb temperature shall be taken on the entering and leaving side of each heating coil. 7. Zone Ducts: Adjust zone ducts to within design CFM requirements. At lease one zone balancing damper shall be completely open. 8. Main Ducts: Adjust main ducts to within design CFM requirements and traverse for total CFM quantities. 9. Branch Ducts: Adjust branch ducts to within design CFM requirements. Multi-diffuser branch ducts shall have at least one outlet or inlet volume damper completely open. 10. Tolerances: Test and balance each diffuser, grille, and register to within 10% of design requirements. 11. Identification: Identify the location and area of each grille, diffuser, register, and terminal coil. This information shall be recorded on air outlet data Carlsbad City Library Learning Center BALANCING AIR AND WATER SYSTEMS 15990-6 sheets. 12. Description: Record the size, type, and manufacturer of each diffuser, grille, and register on air outlet data sheets. 13. Terminal Boxes: Set volume regulators on all terminal boxes to meet design maximum and minimum CFM requirements. All associated temperature controls shall be checked for proper operation and calibration. If the terminal boxes have separate settings for heating and cooling CFM, the CFM quantities for each shall be recorded on air outlet data sheets. All diffusers connected to the terminal box shall be read in the heating and cooling modes and their readings recorded on air outlet data sheets. 14. Minimizing Drafts: Adjust all diffusers, grilles, and registers to minimize drafts in all areas. 2.05 CHILLED WATER AND HOT WATER PROCEDURES A. The various water circulating systems shall be filled, purged of air, and put into operation before hydronic balancing by the Mechanical Contractor. B. The flow of water through all coils shall be adjusted by manipulating balancing valves until the rated pressure drop through the coil or metering device is obtained. C. The balancing agency shall perform the following testing and balancing functions in accordance with the AABC NATIONAL STANDARDS: 1. Water Treatment: Examine the water in the system and determine if the water has been treated and cleaned. If it has not, request the Mechanical Contractor to clean and treat the water. 2. Strainers: Request that the Mechanical Contractor clean all strainers. 3. Air Vents: Check all air vents at the high points of the water system and determine if they are installed and operating. 4. Valves: Set all balancing valves and automatic temperature control by-pass valves to the full-open positioning for balancing. For three-way valves, the rated pressure drop shall first be adjusted with the three-way valve set so that all water flows through the coil. The by-pass balancing valve shall then be adjusted on each coil until equal pressure drop between supply and return connections is obtained, with the three-way valve set to by-pass the coil. 5. Pumps: Adjust chilled water, hot water, pump to meet design GPM requirements. Check pumps for proper operation. Pumps shall be free of vibration and cavitation. Measure and record operating current and voltage. 6. Central Plant: Adjust water flow from the central plant. 7. Tolerances: Proceed to balance all chilled water and hot water coils within 10% of design requirements. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center BALANCING AIR AND WATER SYSTEMS 15990-7 8. Marking: Mark all settings and record all data after completing the flow readings and coil adjustments. 2.06 VERIFICATION OF TEMPERATURE CONTROL A. The balancing agency shall be assisted by the Temperature Control Contractor in verifying the operation and calibration of all temperature control systems. The following tests shall be conducted: 1. Verify that all control components are installed in accordance with project requirements and are functional, including all electrical interlocks, damper sequences, air and water reset, and ionization detectors. 2. Verify that all controlling instruments are calibrated and set for design operating conditions. 3. Verify the accuracy of the final settings by taking temperature readings. The readings shall be in a typical conditioned space for each separately controlled zone. 2.07 TEST AND BALANCE REPORT A. The Test and Balance Report shall be complete with logs, data, and records as required herein. All logs, data, and records shall be typed on white bond paper and bound. The report shall be certified accurate and complete by the balancing agency's certified Test and Balance Engineer. B. Six (6) copies of the Test and Balance Report are required and shall be submitted to the Owner's Representative. C. The report shall contain the following general data in a format selected by the balancing agency. 1. Project Number 2. Contract Number 3. Project Title 4. Project Location 5. Project Architect 6. Project Mechanical Engineer 7. Test and Balance Agency 8. Test and Balance Engineer 9. General Contractor 10. Mechanical Subcontractor Carlsbad City Library Learning Center BALANCING AIR AND WATER SYSTEMS 15990-8 11. Dates Tests Were Performed 12. Certification D. The Test and Balance Report shall be recorded on report forms conforming to the recommended forms in the AABC NATIONAL STANDARDS or NEBB STANDARDS. At a minimum, the report shall include: E. Preface: A general discussion of the system, any abnormalities and problems encountered. F. Instrumentation List: The list of instruments including type, model, manufacturer, serial number, and calibration dates. G. System Identification: In each report, the zones, supply, return, and exhaust openings, and traverse points shall be numbered and/or lettered to correspond to the numbers and letters used on the report data sheets. A single line drawing shall be prepared for each floor or system to cross reference information on the data sheets. H. Air Handling Equipment Test Report Forms: Record the following on each air handling equipment test form: 1. Manufacturer, model number, and serial number. 2. All design and manufacturer rated data. 3. Total actual CFM by traverse; see the AABC NATIONAL STANDARDS or NEBB STANDARDS. 4. Suction and discharge static pressure of each fan, as applicable. 5. Outside air and return air total CFM. 6. Actual operating current, voltage, and brake horsepower of each fan motor. 7. Final RPM of each fan. 8. Fan and motor sheave manufacturer, model, size, number of grooves, and center distance. 9. Belt size and quantity. 10. Static pressure controls final operating set points. I. Pump Test Forms: Submit pump curve showing design, operating, and no-flow points of operation. Also, record the following items on each Pump Test form: 1. Manufacturer, size, and serial number. 2. All design and manufacturer's rated data. 3. Pump operating suction and discharge pressure and final total dynamic Carlsbad City Library Learning Center BALANCING AIR AND WATER SYSTEMS 15990-9 head. 4. No flow (pump discharge valve closed) suction and discharge pressure and corresponding total dynamic head. This procedure is to determine actual impeller size. 5. Rated and actual operating current, voltage, and brake horsepower of each pump motor. J. Heating and Cooling Coil Test Forms: Record the following items on each test form: 1. Manufacturer. 2. All design and manufacturers rated data. 3. Rated and actual water pressure drop across each coil and related GPM. 4. Rated and actual static pressure drop across each coil. 5. Entering and leaving water temperatures. K. Wet-bulb and dry-bulb temperatures entering and leaving each cooling coil; dry-bulb temperatures entering and leaving each heating coil. 2.08 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. At the time of final inspection, the balancing agency shall recheck, in the presence of the Owner's Representative, specific and random selections of data recorded in the certified Test and Balance Report. B. Points and areas for recheck shall be selected by the Owner's Representative. C. Measurements and test procedures shall be the same as the original test and balance. D. Selections for recheck, specific plus random, shall not normally exceed 15% of the total number tabulated in the report, except where special air systems require a complete recheck for safety reasons. E. If random tests demonstrate a measured flow deviation of 10% or more from that recorded in the certified Test and Balance Report, the report shall automatically be rejected. In the event the report is rejected, all systems shall be readjusted and tested, new data recorded, a new certified Test and Balance Report submitted, and a new inspection test made, all at no additional cost to the Owier. 2.09 OPPOSITE SEASON TEST A. The balancing agency shall perform an inspection of the HVAC system during the opposite season from that in which the initial adjustment were made. The balancing agency shall make any necessary modifications to the initial adjustments to produce optimum system operation. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center BALANCING AIR AND WATER SYSTEMS 15990-10 END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center BALANCING AIR AND WATER SYSTEMS 15990-11 SECTION 16010 ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Work Included: The work under this division of the specification includes all labor, materials, and appliances required to furnish and install the electrical work shown on the accompanying Drawings and herein specified, and except as otherwise distinctly specified herein, shall be complete and ready for use. B. The various sections of these specifications apply to any and all work performed under this division regardless of the apportioning of the work between two or more contractors. 1.02 WORK NOT INCLUDED A. The following equipment items and work shall be the responsibility of others: 1. Telephone system wires, cables, outlet plates other than that specified in Section 16740. Equipment and instruments are to be furnished and installed by Owner. 2. Division 15 mechanical and plumbing control raceways, outlets, conductors, equipment and connections. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Drawings and general provisions of the Introductory Information, Bidding Requirements, and Contract Requirements apply to this Section. B. Section 16100: Basic Electrical Materials and Methods C. Section 16110: Raceways D. Section 16120: Conductors E. Section 16400: Service and Distribution F. Section 16500: Lighting G. Section 16740: Telephone System 1.04 WORK SPECIFIED HEREIN A. Permits and Inspections B. Submittals C. Shop Drawings D. Product Data E. Seismic Restraints Submittals Carlsbad Library Learning Center 11/14/05 ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-1 F. Specified Equipment Models G. Code Rules, Standards, and Regulations H. Delivery, Storage and Handling I. Tests J. Cleaning K. Operating and Maintenance Instructions L. Locations M. Excavations N. Guarantee O. Cutting and Patching P. Site Inspections Q. Safety R. Utility Services S. Record Drawings T. Mechanical and Plumbing Power Wiring U. Wiring Diagram V. Plans and Drawings 1.05 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS Contractor shall secure and pay for all required electrical permits and inspections required for the proper execution and completion of the work by the governing authority and any other legally constituted public authority. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Make all submittals listed below and in accordance with Section Introductory Information, Bidding Requirements, and Contract Requirements. B. Contractor agrees that submittals processed by the architect are not change orders; that the purpose of the submittals by the Contractor is to demonstrate to the Architect that the Contractor understands the design concept, that he demonstrates his understanding by indicating which equipment and material he intends to furnish and install and/or by detailing the fabrication and installation methods he intends to use. Contractor further agrees that if deviations, discrepancies, or conflicts between the submittals and the contract documents are discovered either before, during or after the submittals are processed, the contract documents shall control and be followed. C. Material List: Submit complete list of electrical materials and equipment proposed for use in the work. Give name of manufacturer, brand name, and catalog number of each device. Carlsbad Library Learning Center 11/14/05 ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-2 For general construction materials such as wire, conduit, couplings, connectors, etc., give name of specific manufacturers intended for use in this project. Submit complete list at one time. Listing items "as specified" without both make and model or type designation, is not acceptable. It is the expressed intent of this paragraph to restrict materials used in this project to those named on the material list. Any material installed in the project which is not included in the material list may be rejected at the discretion of the architect. Do not install materials or equipment until written approval has been obtained from the architect. Before submitting for approval, check submittals to ascertain that materials and equipment meet all requirements of plans and specifications and conform to structural and space conditions. Mark submittal sheets covering several types of sizes of equipment to clearly indicate specific equipment being proposed. D. Shop Drawings: 1. Main Service and Distribution Switchboards 2. Panelboards 3. Custom Light Fixtures Make Shop Drawings to scale, showing overall dimensions and other dimensions required for proper installation of equipment. Identify clearly each item on Drawings to show piece of equipment it represents. Indicate corrosion resisting treatment and finish. For panelboards and switchboards, show size, number of poles, trip rating of each circuit breaker/switch size and circuit numbering system. For panelboards, show width of top, bottom, and side wire ways, and method of attaching circuit identification markers. For switchboards, submit factory generated shop drawings showing the horizontal and vertical bus current and short circuit ratings for each section. Drawings shall show neutral and ground busses. Drawings shall show all required over-current protective devices and accessories. Drawings shall indicate amount of bussed space available for future devices and any required provisions for bus extensions. Materials shall not be furnished or fabricated nor any work done for which submittals are required. Architect and/or Engineer shall review and approve all equipment submittals. E. Product Data: 1. Light Fixtures 2. Circuit Breakers 3. Switches 4. Receptacles 5. Outlets, boxes, pull boxes. 6. Fuses 7. Safety Switches 8. Lighting Control Panels 9. Raceways 10. Conductors 11. Emergency Battery Systems 12. Conductors Watertight Splice Kit 1.06A SEISMIC RESTRAINTS SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Illustrate and indicate types, styles, materials, strength, fastening provisions, and finish for each type and size of seismic restraint component used. Carlsbad Library Learning Center 11/14/05 ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-3 1. Anchor Bolts and Studs: Tabulate types and sizes, complete with report numbers and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an agency approved by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Shop Drawings: For anchorage and bracing not defined by details and charts on drawings. Indicate materials, and show designs and calculations signed and sealed by a professional engineer. 1. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads. 2. Details: Detail fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachment of restraints to both structural and restrained items. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacings identifying components and listing their strengths. Indicate direction and value of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events. 3. Pre-approval and Evaluation Documentation: By an agency approved by authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum ratings of restraints and the basis for approval (tests or calculations). C. Coordination Drawings: Plans and sections drawn to scale and coordinating seismic bracing for electrical components with other system and equipment, including other seismic restraints in the vicinity. D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of seismic restraints certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. 1.07 SPECIFIED EQUIPMENT MODELS Where manufacturer's specific model numbers are specified or shown, these indicate general acceptable types required. Modify the specified models to comply with all requirements, as specified or shown on the Drawings. 1.08 CODE RULES, STANDARDS, AND REGULATIONS All materials shall be new. All workmanship, materials, and equipment shall comply with the currently adopted edition of the following: A. California Building Code B. California Electrical Code C. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL) D. National fire Prevention Association (NFPA) E. California Code of Regulations (CCR) Titles. F. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory Listing and Labeling (NRTL): Items provided under this section shall be listed and labeled by a NRTL. The term "NRTL" shall be defined as OSHA Regulation 1910.7. G. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). H. National Manufacturer's Association (NEMA). When conflict exists between two or more governing Codes, the stricter requirement shall apply. 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Carlsbad Library Learning Center 11/14/05 ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-4 A. The contractor shall provide and maintain storage facilities and employ such measures as will preserve the specified quality and fitness of materials to be used in the work. 1. Deliver products to the job-site in undamaged condition, in manufacturer's original containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible. 2. Immediately on delivery, inspect shipments to assure compliance with requirements of Contract Documents and reviewed submittals, and that products are properly protected and undamaged. 3. Promptly remove damaged material and unsuitable items from the job-site, and promptly replace with material meeting the specified requirements, at no additional cost to the Owner. Immediately notify General Contractor if the shipment received (unacceptable) will impact the construction schedule while awaiting correct shipment. B. Store and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instruction and NEMA Standards. 1. Store products subject to damage by the elements in weather-tight enclosures. 2. Maintain temperature and humidity within the ranges required by manufacturer's instructions. C. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. Make periodic inspections of stored products to assure that products are maintained under specified conditions, and free from damage or deterioration. 1.10 TESTS A. Perform all tests required by the governing authority or legally constituted public authority. B. Perform tests as specified in accordance with Introductory Information, Bidding Requirements, and Contract Requirements and as requested by the architect to prove installation is in accordance with contract requirements. Perform tests in presence of the architect, and furnish test equipment, facilities and technical personnel required to perform tests. C. All work shall be tested and shall be clear and free of all grounds, faults, short circuits, opens, phases, and high resistance or wrong connections. All defects shall be promptly corrected by the Contractor and shall be retested to insure compliance of corrected work as specified. Any such corrections shall be at the expense of the Contractor. 1.11 CLEANING A. After other work such as sanding, painting, etc. has been completed, clean lighting fixtures, panelboards, switchboards and other electrical equipment to remove dust, dirt, grease, or other marks, and leave work in clean condition. B. Remove all unused material, scrap, and all other rubbish or trash resulting from Division 16 Work. C. Thoroughly clean the interior of all switchboards, panelboards, transformers, panels, cabinets, and boxes. 1.12 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. Provide in acceptable form, three (3) bound copies of operating and maintenance instruction manuals for equipment and systems where required in their respective technical sections. Carlsbad Library Learning Center 11/14/05 ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-5 B. Provide catalog cuts, functional description of operation, point-to-point wiring diagrams, operating and maintenance instructions, parts lists and other data useful and necessary for complete maintenance and operation of equipment. For signal systems, also include system diagrams showing interconnections between various units, terminal markings at each unit, and schematic diagrams of each typical component. C. Deliver manuals to the architect prior to final acceptance. 1.13 LOCATIONS The Drawings indicate the desired location or arrangement of outlets, equipment, etc. and are to be followed as closely as possible. Proper judgement must be exercised in executing the work so as to insure the best possible installation in the available space and to overcome difficulties owing to space limitations or interference of structural conditions wherever encountered. Verify and coordinate the location of all outlets and lighting fixtures with the architectural, structural, and mechanical drawings and with all Shop Drawings. Architectural elevations and reflected ceiling plans take precedence. 1.14 EXCAVATIONS A. Do all excavating necessary for the proper installation of the electrical work whether or not indicated on the Drawings or specified. . B. After the installation of work requiring excavations has been inspected and approved by building officials, fill with clean earth and tamp to the compaction required to insure that no settlement will occur, and leave the ground firm and even with natural grade. Remove from the premises ail excavated earth which is not used for backfill. C. Carefully remove and place where they will not be damaged all plants, shrubs, turf and surfacing that occur in the area of the excavation. Replace as directed. Repair to match the adjacent work all sidewalks, driveways, or other cement or asphalt surfaces which are damaged during excavation. 1.15 GUARANTEE In addition to the guarantees required in other sections of the specifcations, all materials and equipment provided and installed under this division of the specifications shall be guaranteed by the contractor for a period of one year from the date of acceptance of the work by the Owner. Should any trouble develop during this period due to defective materials or faulty workmanship, the contractor shall furnish all necessary labor and materials to correct the trouble without cost to the owner. 1.16 CUTTING AND PATCHING Do all cutting and patching of the construction work, and of existing walks, pavements, and buildings which may be required for the proper installation of the electrical work. Patch with the same materials, workmanship, and finish, and accurately match all surrounding work. 1.17 SITE INSPECTIONS Carefully examine the site and existing buildings, compare the Drawings with the existing electrical conditions, and become thoroughly familiarized with all existing conditions within the scope of this Carlsbad Library Learning Center 11 /14/05 ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-6 work. By the act of submitting a bid, the Contractor deems to have accepted such conditions, and to have made allowance therefore in preparing his figure. 1.18 SAFETY A. Contractor is solely and completely responsible for condition of the premises on which the work is performed and for safety of all persons and property on the site during performance of the contract. This requirement is not limited to normal working hours, but shall apply continuously. B. Conform with all governing safety regulations. 1.19 UTILITY SERVICES A. The Owner will arrange and apply for connection to electrical utility service and will pay for any required service or connection fee. B. The Contractor shall arrange and pay for any inspections required by the electrical, telephone and cable TV utility service companies. 1.20 RECORD DRAWINGS At completion of work, Contractor shall deliver to the architect an up-to-date set of "as built" Record Drawings. Such Drawings shall be in a permanent form and suitable for reproduction. The Architect will provide prints of the Contract Drawings as necessary to facilitate such work. See Introductory Information, Bidding Requirements, and Contract Requirements. Record Drawings shall show the complete layout and routes of all interior and exterior branch circuits, raceways, and wiring if not entirely shown on the Drawings. Record Drawings shall show the complete layout and routes of all feeders to switchboards, panelboards, and equipment. 1.21 MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING WIRING A. General Requirements: 1. Work hereunder includes power raceways and conductors to mechanical and plumbing equipment. 2. All mechanical and plumbing control (line or low voltage) raceways, outlets, conductors, equipment and connections shall be furnished and installed under plumbing/mechanical work. 3. Verify exact location of mechanical/plumbing equipment, power stub-ups, power outlets, and extent of power wiring. 4. Mechanical/plumbing equipment control wiring, control equipment, motors and associates apparatus, including motors for pumps, compressors, fans, and "package" mechanical equipment will be furnished and installed under other divisions of work. 5. Unless otherwise shown, magnetic motor controllers (motor starters) will be furnished and installed under other divisions of work. B. Thermal Overload Protection: Furnish and install thermal overload protection for motors where overload protection is not furnished as part of mechanical equipment. 1.22 WIRING DIAGRAMS Diagrams shall be schematic, line to line type, using standard symbols and with components arranged in logical sequence, so that system operation can be checked easily. Where special symbols are used or where function of components is not obvious, include suitable legend or functional guide. Number all terminals for external wiring connections on diagrams. Carlsbad Library Learning Center 11/14/05 ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-7 1.23 PLANS AND DRAWINGS A. The Drawings, which constitute an integral part of the contract, shall serve as working Drawings. They indicate the general layout of the complete electrical system and show arrangements of branch circuits, outlets, switches, controls, panelboards, service equipment, fixtures and other work. B. Field verification or correction of scale dimensions or plans is directed, since actual locations, distances, and levels are to be governed by local field conditions. The Electrical Contractor shall check Architectural, Structural, Plumbing and Mechanical Plans to avoid possible installation conflicts. Should drastic changes from original plans be necessary and to resolve such conflicts, this contractor shall notify the Architect and shall secure from him written approval and agreement concerning necessary changes and adjustments before altered installation work is started. C. Discrepancies shown on different plans, or between plans and actual field conditions, shall be brought to the attention of the Architect promptly in form of an R.F.I, for resolution. D. These Drawings may be superseded by later revised or detailed Drawings or Specifications prepared by the Architect or his representative and the Contractor shall conform to all reasonable changes without extra cost to the Owner. All items not specifically mentioned in the Specifications or noted on the Drawings, but which obviously are required to make the working installation complete, shall be included automatically. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Library Learning Center 11/14/05 ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-8 SECTION 16100 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Outlet Boxes B. Supports C. Cabinets and Boxes D. Circuit Breakers E. Panelboards F. Switches, Flush Tumbler Type G. Wall Box Dimmer Switches H. Manual Motor Starting Switches I. Floor Boxes J. Receptacles K. Outlet Plates L. Nameplates M. Plywood Terminal Boards N. Safety Switches O. Fuses P. Wiring Methods Q. Mounting Heights R. Branch Circuits S. Cutting, Forming, Patching, Sealing T. Painting and Finishes U. Motor Controllers Carlsbad Library Learning Center 11/14/05 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16100-1 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Introductory Information, Bidding Requirements, and Contract Requirements apply to this Section. B. Section 16010: Electrical General Requirements 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submit materials list, product data, and shop drawings in accordance with Introductory Information, Bidding Requirements, and Contract Requirements and 16010. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 OUTLET BOXES A. Standard Galvanized Sheet Steel, One Piece Pressed Boxes: Appleton, Bowers, Raco, Steel City, or equal, Knockout Boxes, galvanized after fabrication, not less than 4-inch square trade size and 2-1/8-inch deep for raceways under 1-inch size and not less than 4- 11/16-inch square trade size, and 2-1/8-inch deep for raceways 1-inch size and larger, unless otherwise shown on the drawings. Use standard galvanized steel plaster rings and fittings or appropriate type for box and/or device to be installed. Sectional boxes assembled by means of screws not acceptable. B. Cast Boxes: Appleton, Crouse-Hinds, or equal, cast metal type with threaded hubs. Use cast metal boxes in exterior locations where surface mounted exposed raceway system is used and for surface mounted weatherproof outlets or devices, regardless of location. C. Tile or Masonry Boxes: For tile, brick, or concrete block, use masonry boxes with square comers, steel city GW series, or equal; or standard 4-inch square (or larger) box with square cover, universal #52C-54. Use boxes deep enough so that conduits enter boxes without bending and so that cutting or inside surfaces of concrete blocks or bricks will not be required. Standard sheet steel boxes with extensions and plaster rings are not acceptable. D. Plaster Rings: Use for all concealed work (power, telephone, computer, signal, data, etc.) except for flush tile boxes. Depth of plaster rings to reach finished surface, including plaster, wood paneling, sprayed on material or other finishes. 2.02 SUPPORTS A. Inserts, hangers, brackets and miscellaneous supports for electrical equipment and raceways must be designed with minimum safety factor of 4, based on ultimate strength of material used. For empty raceways, include weight of 4 type THNN wires of maximum permissible size. B. Secure hangers, brackets, raceway straps, supports and electrical equipment to surfaces by means of toggle bolts on hollow masonry; expansion shields and machine screws or standard preset inserts on concrete or solid masonry; machine screws or bolts on metal surfaces; wood screws on wood construction. Wood or fiber plugs or concrete nails not acceptable. Carlsbad Library Learning Center 11/14/05 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16100-2 C. Power driven or velocity driven inserts may be used where their use does not affect finished appearance of work, but may not be used in tension. They may not be used in prestressed slabs, beams, purlins, or in precast members. D. Inserts: Unistrut #P-3245, Elcen Figure 64, Grinnel Figure 282, Code Devices Inc. #1, or equal. Finish black if malleable iron; factory finish if steel. 2.03 CABINETS AND BOXES A. Details of Construction: Per NRTL Standards for cabinets and boxes. Furnish heavier than standard gauge metal, where shown on the drawings. B. Cabinet Fronts: Cold rolled, drawing quality steel, with rust resistant treatment before priming. C. Doors and Covers: Provide hinged doors with concealed butt hinges for cabinets; provide screw-on covers for pull boxes, unless hinged covers are indicated. For flush boxes, provide cover which overlaps box 3/4-inch on all sides. D. Locks: Furnish locks on cabinet doors, keyed alike with and same as for panelboards. E. Flush Mounting Trim: Fasten to cabinet with adjustable clamps. F. Knockouts: Blank off all unused knockouts. G. Weatherproof Boxes: Provide NEMA Type 3R boxes in outdoor and wet location. Equip boxes with conduit hubs and gaskets. H. Equipment Mounting Boards: Cover entire inside rear surface of telephone and signal cabinets with 3/4-inch thick plywood boards, medium density overlaid both sides. 2.04 CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Circuit breakers, molded case type, approved and listed by NRTL and conforming to following requirements: 1. Operating Mechanism: Enclosed, quick make and quick break on automatic and manual operation, trip free of handle on overload, with common trip for multiple pole type. Single pole breakers with handle ties are not acceptable. 2. Interrupting capacity ratings equal to or greater than values shown on the drawings. In no case shall rating be less than 10,000 RMS symmetrical amps under 277 volts. B. Circuit breakers manufactured by General Electric, Westinghouse, Square D, Gould, Cutler Hammer, G.T.E. Sylvania, or Siemens. 2.05 PANELBOARDS A. General Requirements: 1. UL approved and as manufactured by Westinghouse, Square D, Gould, Cutler Hammer, G.T.E. Sylvania, or Siemens. 2. Minimum cabinet size, 20-inch wide by 5-3/4-inch deep, height as required. Circuit breakers shall be bolt on type, as specified herein under "circuit breakers". Provide nameplate as specified herein. B. Construction: 1. Dead front safety type, enclosed in steel cabinet, complete with door, door lock, permanently fixed circuit identification numbers, (adhesive applied, not acceptable), Carlsbad Library Learning Center 11/14/05 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16100-3 directory, neutral bar, ground bars and lugs for all cable connections. Cabinets, as specified herein, under "Cabinets and Boxes." 2. Equip panelboard with type, size, and number of circuit breakers, arranged and permanently numbered as shown on the drawings. Stick-on circuit breaker numbers are not allowed. 3. Panels bussed according to requirements as shown. Bus shall be tin plated aluminum, extending full height of panel, to provide for all future breakers. Provide one bus for each phase and terminals on neutral bar and ground bars for circuits in panel, including spares and spaces for future circuits. 4. Where panelboard has a top or bottom compartment for time switches and/or contactors, the compartment shall be separated from the panelboard by a steel barrier of the same gauge as the cabinet and shall have a separate externally hinged, readily accessible lockable door in the panelboard front. 5. Furnish lugs with approved connectors for size of conductors feeding panel. Provide double lugs and extra gutter space for parallel feeder conductors. 6. Provide typewritten directory under transparent protective cover, set in metal frame inside the cabinet door. Submit a copy of this directory for record purposes. 7. Circuit breakers, bolted in place and removable from front without disturbing other units. C. Handle Lock Off Attachments: Provide handle lock-off attachment for each branch circuit breaker indicated on the drawings and lock each circuit breaker handle in open or closed position with a clip secured by a set screw. 2.06 SWITCHES A. Unless otherwise specified or shown, use 20 amp, specification grade, quiet type switches, flush mounted, rated 120/277 volts ac. Verify color of all switches with Architect prior to installation. B. Standard Toggle Type: Catalog number listed below is for 20 amp single pole switch with ivory handle. Where required, furnish different color, 2 pole, 3 way and 4 way, and key switches of the same grade. 1. Pass and Seymour #20 ACM, Leviton or Hubbell #1221-1. 2.07 WALL BOX DIMMER SWITCHES A. Dimmers shall be of the type (incandescent or fluorescent), voltage and wattage that is required on the Drawings. B. Dimmers shall be completely solid state with a voltage compensating circuit to minimize flicker due to line voltage variations. C. All devices shall mount individually in an outlet box and shall be gangable without removing side sections or derating capacity. D. Dimmers shall incorporate an air gap switch which shall be accessible without removing the face plate. The air gap switch shall be capable of meeting all applicable requirements of UL 20 for air gap switches in incandescent dimmers. E. Multi-gang face plate shall include mounting frame for proper device alignment and face plate attachment. F. At locations with multiple devices, one seamless, multi-gang face plate shall be provided. Coordinate proper outlet box size and face plate type. Carlsbad Library Learning Center 11/14/05 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16100-4 G. Manufactured by Lutron (Nova T Series). Verify color of all dimmers with Architect prior to submittals. 2.08 MANUAL MOTOR STARTING SWITCHES A. General Requirements: 1. Number of poles, voltage rating and thermal overloads as required by motor controlled. 2. Maximum over-current trip setting, per National Electrical Code. 3. Provide nameplate as specified herein. B. For Single Phase Motors, 1 HP Max: General electric type CR-101. Westinghouse Class 10-015, or equal, with heater elements removable from front, and trip rating clearly marked on element for easy identification from front. C. For Single Phase Motors Larger than 1 Hp, and 3-phase Motors: General Electric type CR- 1062, Westinghouse Class 10-100, Square D Class 2510, or equal, NEMA size O and Size 1, with chart on inside of cover showing trip range of heater elements. 2.09 RECEPTACLES A. General Requirements: 1. Receptacles shall be 2 pole, 3 wire grounding type, flush mounted, rated 20 amp, 125 volt. Conductors shall be terminated on side screws and ground conductor on ground screws. Back wiring is not acceptable. Grounding via outlet receptacle mounting screw (self grounding) is not acceptable. 2. Verify color of all receptacles with architect prior to submittals. Isolated ground receptacles shall be orange. 3. Single simplex receptacles, ground fault interrupter receptacles and isolated ground receptacles shall be of comparable grade to the duplex receptacles specified below. B. Standard Type: Catalog number listed below is for ivory duplex convenience receptacles. 1. Pass and Seymour or Leviton or Hubbell #5362 -1. C. Weatherproof Outlets, Duplex: Use duplex receptacles specified above and provide outlet box and plates as follows: 1. Surface Mounting: Appleton or Grouse Hinds Type FD cast box with steel cover listed for NEMA 3R with attachment plug cap insert (receptacle in use). 2. Flush Mounting: Outlet box as specified under "outlet boxes" and steel cover listed for NEMA 3R with attachment plug cap insert (receptacle in use). D. Special Purpose Outlets: Provide receptacles with NEMA configuration as shown on the Drawings. Receptacles shall be of the same manufacturer as standard type. E. Receptacles, switches and special purpose outlets shall be provided as indicated in the electrical legend, noted, or scheduled on the Drawings. 2.10 OUTLET PLATES A. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings, smooth finish thermo-plastic, specification grade, equal to Pass & Seymour, Hubbell or Leviton P-Line. Verify color of all plates with Architect prior to submittals. B. Where conduits are exposed: Galvanized, raised type, Steel City Series RS, Bowers #449 through 465, Appleton #8361 through 8377, or equal. Carlsbad Library Learning Center 11/14/05 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16100-5 C. Gang Plates: Use gang-type plates for multiple units. D. Screws: Use plate screws with same finish and color as plates. 2.11 NAMEPLATES A. Construction: Laminated phenolic plastic, black front and back, white core, with lettering etched through outer covering. Use 3/16-inch high lettering at thermal overload switches, receptacles, wall switches, and similar devices, where nameplate is attached to device plate. Use 1/4-inch high lettering at all other locations. Engraving directly on device plates with black enamel filled lettering is acceptable in lieu of separate plastic nameplates. Fasten with epoxy glue or stainless steel screws, double stick tape is not acceptable. B. Inscription: If detailed on plans, use inscription exactly as shown; otherwise, describe adequately function or use of equipment involved. 1. For panelboards and switchboards: Include panel designation, voltage and phase of supply, e.g., "PAMELA, 120/208V, 3 PHASE". 2. For Motors: Make nameplate on controller of particular machine exactly the same as designation of respective motor, e.g., "FAN E12." 3. For Power Receptacles: Indicate voltage and phase, e.g., "208/120V, 3 PHASE". 2.12 PLYWOOD TERMINAL BOARDS A. 3/4-inch plywood terminal boards, sized and located, as shown on the Drawings and as required for mounting equipment. B. Secure to wall with sufficient fasteners to support load of 16 Ibs/sq. ft., but not less than 200 Ibs., for any board. Use galvanized or cadmium plated bolts, screws, and washers for attaching terminal boards. 2.13 SAFETY SWITCHES A. Heavy duty, totally enclosed, externally operated, with interlocked cover, provisions for locking cover in closed position and locking switch in open or closed position, General Electric, Square D, Westinghouse, Siemens, or equal. B. Enclosures: NEMA Type 1, Indoors: NEMA Type 3R outdoors. C. Voltage and current ratings, number of poles and fuse rating (if any), as shown on Drawings or as required by equipment or branch circuit. D. Fuses and nameplates as specified herein. 2.14 FUSES A. All fuses on this project shall be U.L. Class L or Class RK1 or Class RK5 unless shown otherwise on the Drawings. All fuses shall be labeled as current-limiting amperes, with or without dual element and time delay, as shown on the Drawings. 1. Bussmann, Economy, Shawmut, Little Fuse. 2.15 FLOOR OUTLETS, FLUSH TYPE A. Power Duplex Screw Brass Floor Box Cover: 20 amp grounding type duplex convenience receptacle as specified herein under "receptacles". Hubbell #5-3925 Duplex Flap. Carlsbad Library Learning Center 11 /14/05 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16100-6 B. Data, Alarm, and Telephone Combination Brass Floor Box Covers: Hubbell #8-2725 Combination. C. 5-1/4 Inch Diameter Brass Carpet Flange at Each Outlet: Hubbell #8-3182. D. Data, Alarm, Power, and Telephone Floor Boxes: Pressed, formed steel, 54 cubic inches minimum, fully adjustable. 1. Hubbell #B-2527. 2.16 FLOOR BOXES AND FITTINGS Boxes shall be stamped steel, flush type with brass covers. Boxes shall be concrete tight, adjustable and shall be equipped with brass carpet flange. 2.17 MOTOR CONTROLLERS UL 508, NEMA ICS 1, and NEMA ICS 2. Controllers shall have thermal overload protection in each phase. Magnetic-type motor controllers shall have undervoltage release protection. Controller shall have two normally open and two normally closed auxiliary dry control contacts, and red pilot light to indicate when motor is "off and green pilot light when motor is running. Provide pilot lights nameplates. Controller shall have hand/off/automatic selector switch. Connections to selector switch shall be such that only normal automatic regulatory control devices are bypassed when switch is in "hand" position. Safety control devices, such as low and high pressure cutouts, high temperature cutouts, and motor overload protective devices, shall be connected in motor control circuit in "hand" and "automatic" positions. Control circuit connections to hand/off/automatic selector switch or to more than one automatic regulatory control device shall be made in accordance with indicated or manufacturer's approved wiring diagram. Selector switch shall have means for locking in any position. Controller disconnecting means shall be capable of being locked in open position. Overload protective devices shall provide adequate protection to motor windings; be thermal inverse-time-limit type; and include manual reset-type pushbutton outside of motor controller case. Cover of combination motor controller and manual switch or circuit breaker shall be interlocked with operating handle of switch or circuit breaker so that cover cannot be opened unless handle of switch or circuit is in "off position. Minimum short circuit withstand rating of combination motor controller shall be rms symmetrical amperes as indicated. Provide controllers in hazardous locations with classifications as indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 WIRING METHODS Wiring method for electrical connections of outlets shown on the Drawings shall be insulated conductors installed in raceways, except where specifically indicated or specified otherwise. 3.02 FUSES A. Furnish and install fuses of proper type and rating suitable for use. Mount so that fuse label/rating faces forward. B. Provide 3 spare fuses for each type and size used, in original factory packaging. Provide lockable cabinet in the main electrical room containing spare fuses. 3.03 SWITCHES, FLUSH TUMBLER TYPE Where shown near doors, mount switches flush, not less than 6-inch or more than 12-inch from trim on the strike jamb side, in accordance with door swing shown on Architectural Drawings. Carlsbad Library Learning Center 11 /14/05 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16100-7 Where cabinets are shown near door on same side as switch, mount switch as close to trim as architectural and structural work permits. 3.04 MOUNTING HEIGHTS A. Unless otherwise shown, mount equipment as shown on the Drawings and as follows: (Dimensions are to centerline of outlet above finish floor, except as stated): EQUIPMENT MOUNTING HEIGHT 1. Panelboard: a. Over 29-inches high 6 feet-6 inches to top of enclosure b. 29-inches high or less 5 feet-6 inches to top of enclosure 2. Disconnect Switches 3 feet-6 inches to top of enclosure 3. Manual Motor Starting Switches 4 feet-0 inches B. If 2 or more panelboards or cabinets are mounted adjacent to each other, mount with top edges of trims on same level, based on mounting height of largest panel. 3.05 BRANCH CIRCUITS A. Connect switches and branch circuits to outlets, equipment and lighting fixtures as indicated on plans, panelboard, and equipment schedules with #12 minimum conductors in concealed raceways per National Electrical Code. All conductors shall be installed in raceways. 1/2 inch is the minimum raceway size. B. Make installation in strict accordance with branch circuit panelboard numbering as shown on the Drawings. C. Raceways, outlets, and wiring connected to emergency system shall be separate (not combined) from the normal system. 3.06 NAMEPLATES A. Provide nameplates on following equipment: 1. Switchboards, panelboards, safety switches, circuit breakers, manual motor starting switches, motor starters, control centers, control panels, fire alarm control panels, time switches, control panels, combination fused disconnect starters, and special system outlets. Provide nameplates to each switch or circuit breaker in switchboards and power panels. 2. Wall switches controlling outlets for lighting fixtures or other equipment, where outlet is out of sight of switch. B. Fasten nameplates securely to equipment with #4 Phillips round head, cadmium plated steel self tapping screws, or nickel plated brass bolts. Epoxy glue or double stick tape is not acceptable. 3.07 CUTTING, FORMING, PATCHING, SEALING A. General: 1. Provisions will be made under other sections for all slots openings, recesses, chases, etc., and wood blocking required for electrical work. Notify General Contractor in ample time, when and where such provisions are necessary. 2. Furnish and install all conduit sleeves, inserts and supports for electrical work, unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings. Carlsbad Library Learning Center 11/14/05 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16100-8 3. Remove sleeves after forms have been removed. Caulk space around conduit watertight and fire rated as required. 4. Use expanding type pour foam to seal unused underground and underfloor stubbed up feeder and signal raceways and service raceways, in conformance with utility companies' requirements. 5. Firestopping: Provide through-penetration firestop systems for Division 16 penetrations through fire-resistance-rated assemblies in accordance with other sections of the specifications. 6. Where electrical equipment or materials of this Division penetrate fire separations, maintain the integrity of the separation by providing Code approved fire rated penetrations or by providing an enclosure around the penetration or by providing UL listed fire barrier around the equipment which effectively continues the separation. B. Concrete and Masonry Construction: 1. Install outlet and equipment in concrete slabs, wall, beam, or other location where structural value of construction may be affected, as directed and approved by Architect. Move or alter any outlet and electrical equipment required to be moved or altered due to structural conditions, at no additional cost to Owner. 2. Install pipe sleeves through full thickness of concrete and provide 1/2-inch minimum clearance around raceways. 3. Sleeves 2-inch diameter and smaller, 30 gag. steel. Sleeves 2-1/2-inch diameter and larger, 26 Ga. steel. Approved plastic sleeves may be used in lieu of steel sleeves. 4. Where conduit will be installed after concrete slab is poured and construction requires watertight membrane, furnish and install permanently anchored standard weight galvanized steel pipe sleeve, extending 2-inch above finish floor and having 1/2-inch min. clearance around conduit. Do not remove these sleeves. Caulk space watertight around conduits. 5. Where outlets are shown at tilt-up concrete walls, verify, before installation, if outlets are flush or surface mounted. C. Wood Construction: 1. Bore or cut holes in structural members for raceways and cables neatly and as small as possible, and as approved by the Architect. 2. In stud walls, place conduits or cables in center of plates or studs using neat holes. Notching of studs is not permitted. D. Steel Construction: Do not weld or burn any structural steel member. Obtain specific approval of Architect before field welding or burning that is not indicated on approved Shop Drawings. Do not bum holes in beam flanges or narrow members. 3.08 PAINTING AND FINISHES A. Factory Finish: Pull and junction boxes, telephone and signal systems, terminal cabinets and boxes, clock and fire alarm terminal cabinets and boxes, panelboard cabinets, equipment enclosures, etc., factory finished as follows: 1. Surface Mounted Boxes: One prime coat over galvanizing, one coat of light gray enamel. 2. Flush Mounted Boxes: Galvanized only. 3. Fronts: One prime coat, one finish coat of light gray enamel. B. Equipment Enclosures: Transformer cases, high voltage equipment including switch gear, special equipment enclosures, etc., to be manufacturer's standard, unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings. C. Field Painting: Carlsbad Library Learning Center 11/14/05 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16100-9 1. Unless otherwise specified herein and in other sections of Division 16, or shown on the Drawings, all exterior exposed metal, and all interior exposed metal in rooms where walls are painted, will be painted under general work. Leave electrical work in clean, dry, smooth condition suitable for painting. 2. Paint all exposed ferrous metals which are not galvanized or factory finished and located in rooms or spaces where walls are not required to be painted. Use one coat of approved asphaltic aluminum paint over prime coat. This also applies to damp, unfinished locations such as pipe tunnels, and crawl spaces below ground floor. 3. Where field painting of metals is required under electrical work (other than work specified under subparagraph "C=2" above), metal to be painted shall be cleaned, pretreated, primed, and given two finish coats of paint as follows: a. Cleaning: Remove rust, scale, grease, oil, dirt, preservative coatings or other deleterious matter. Treat all bare and clean metal with primer pretreatment, before priming. b. Primer Pretreatment: Formula 117 for metal MIL-P-15328B. c. Primer. 1) Steel and iron not galvanized: Red lead base primer FS TT-OP-86e, Type III or basic lead silico chromate primer FS TT-P-615d(2), Type III. 2) Aluminum: Zinc Chromate Primer. 3) Galvanized steel and nonferrous metals: Zinc dust zinc oxide primer FS TT-P-641d, Type II. Apply second coat as soon as possible after priming to provide for proper bonding to primer coat. d. Finish Coats, Interior: One coat of enamel undercoater and one coat of semigloss enamel, color as selected by Architect. e. Finish Coats, Exterior: One coat of exterior synthetic enamel undercoater and one coat of exterior synthetic industrial enamel, color as selected by the Architect. 4. Do not paint the following: a. Transformer cases, switchboards, high voltage switch gear and equipment. b. Lighting fixtures, and factory finished fixture hangers and pendant stems. c. Switch and receptacle plates which have factory finish other than prime coat or galvanizing. d. Panelboards, except as required under general work. e. Stenciling: After all field painting is completed, paint all stenciled identification of high voltage conduits, etc., as shown on the Drawings, specified, or required by codes. 3.09 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS A. A seismic restraint is a fixed device (a seismic brace, an anchor bolt or stud, or a fastening assembly) used to prevent vertical or horizontal movement, or both vertical and horizontal movement, of an electrical system component during an earthquake. B. All electrical equipment shall be braced or anchored in accordance with the requirements of the California Building Code Seismic Zone 4. Electrical equipment seismic restraints shall be designed by a California registered professional engineer legally qualified and experienced in providing seismic engineering services. C. Seismic restraints are required for (but not limited to): switchboards, panelboards, transformers, emergency battery units, lighting control panels, light fixtures and raceways. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Library Learning Center 11/14/05 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16100-10 SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Raceways. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Drawings and general provisions of the Introductory Information, Bidding Requirements, and Contract Requirements apply to this Section. B. Section 16010: Electrical General Requirements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submit Materials List, Product Data, and Shop Drawings in accordance with Introductory Information, Bidding Requirements, and Contract Requirements and 16010. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS A. General Requirements: 1. Raceways manufactured under supervision of UL Factory Inspection and Label Service, with NRTL label and manufacturer's name on each length of raceway. 2. Fittings: Conform to same requirements as raceway, except as specified herein. B. Rigid Steel Conduit: 1. Standard weight, threaded, zinc coated on outside by hot dipping, shreaderizing or metallizing process, with protective finish coating on outside and inside and shall meet UL No. 6. 2. Fittings: Threaded type, hot-dipped galvanized rigid steel, zinc coated per UL No. 6; set screw type or thread less type, not acceptable. C. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): 1. Hot-dipped galvanized and shall meet UL No. 1242. 2. Fittings: Same as for rigid steel conduit. D. Rigid PVC Conduit: 1. Schedule 40-rigid polyvinyl chloride electrical conduit, listed by NRTL for direct underground burial, manufactured from high impact, non-conducting, self- extinguishing material. PVC shall meet UL No. 651. 2. Couplings, adapters, expansion fittings: Conform to same requirements as rigid PVC conduit. Use solvent cement for all PVC joints, as recommended by conduit manufacturer. E. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): 1. Hot-dipped galvanized and shall meet UL No. 797. 2. Fittings: Carlsbad Library Learning Center 11/14/05 RACEWAYS 16110-1 a. Steel or malleable iron, except that body of compression ring type fittings only, may be pressure cast. Pressure cast material for nuts of compression ring type fittings, or for any part of other types of fittings, not acceptable. b. Gripping ring type, tomic "Tap on", T & B, "Socks", or equal. c. Indenter type, Briegl, Duro, or equal. Apply two sets of diametrically opposite indentations for each connection to tubing. d. Compression ring type, Appleton, Efcor, Steel City, T & B, or equal. e. Set screw type of fittings 2 inch trade size and smaller, not acceptable. F. Flexible Conduit: 1. Continuous zinc coating on steel strips employed therein. 2. Fittings: Steel or malleable iron of type which clamps conduit securely to fittings T & B "Tite Bite" or equal, or squeeze type, Appleton, Steel City, Efcor, or equal; or screw-in type made of pressure cast material, steel city, Efcor, or equal. 3. Screw-in type made of sheet metal or set screw type of fittings, not acceptable. G. Liquid Tight Flexible Conduit: 1. Galvanized flexible conduit with extruded PVC covering. 2. Fittings: Watertight type with body and gland nut of steel or malleable iron with provisions for grounding flexible conduit to fitting, Appleton ST Series, Pyle-National CT Series, Efcor "Liquid Tite," or equal. H. Expansion Joints: Sliding conduit type with bonding strap and clamps, Appleton or Grouse- Hinds Type XJ, O.Z. Type AX, or equal. I. Unions and Concrete Tight Couplings: 1. Rain-tight Unions: Appleton or Grouse-Hinds Type UNF, or equal. 2. Concrete Tight Couplings: O.Z. Type SSP, T & B "Erickson" coupling, or equal. J. Pull Line: 1/8 inch diameter braided line of yellow polypropylene, or jet-line #232, or equal, line of continuous fiber polyolefin; min. breaking strength, 200 Ibs. Furnish and install pull line in all empty (unused) raceways. 2.02 RACEWAY SUPPORTS A. Single Raceway Hangers: 12 gauge, 1-5/8 inch deep x 1-5/8 inch wide. Steel City #C-149, Elcen Figure 13, Unistrut #J1205 through #J1260, or equal, with 3/8 inch minimum diameter steel rod. B. Channel: Steel City #B-900, Elcen Figure 600, Unistrut #P-1000, or equal, channel with 3/8 inch minimum diameter steel rods and with raceway clamps, as specified below. Provide diagonal bracing in two directions every 40 feet minimum. C. Raceway Clamps: Steel City #C-105, Elcen figure 650, Unistrut #P-1111 through P-1124, or equal, for rigid conduit; and Steel City#C-106, Elcen Figure 651, Unistrut#P-1426 through P-1431, or equal, for EMT. D. Riser Supports: Steel City #C-210, Elcen Figure 39, Unistrut #U991-7 through U991-60, or equal. E. Finish: 1. Hangers, channels, clamps, supports and rods, electro galvanized finish after fabrication. 2. Pipe straps and single hole clamps, electro galvanized finish, after fabrication. 3. Steel bolts, screws, nuts and washers, electro galvanized finish, after fabrication. Carlsbad Library Learning Center 11/14/05 RACEWAYS 16110-2 F. Plumbers strap tape is not acceptable. G. Inserts, hangers, brackets and miscellaneous supports for electrical equipment and raceways must be designed with min. safety factor of 4, based on ultimate strength of material used. For empty raceways, include weight of 4 type THHN wires of maximum permissible size at 40 percent fill. H. Secure hangers, brackets, raceway straps, supports and electrical equipment to surfaces by means of toggle bolts on hollow masonry; expansion shields and machine screws or standard preset inserts on concrete or solid masonry; machine screws or bolts on metal surfaces; wood screws on wood constructions. Wood or fiber plugs or concrete nails, not acceptable. I. Power driven or velocity driven inserts may be used where their use does not affect finished appearance of work, but may not be used in tension. They may not be used in prestressed slabs, beams or purlins, or in precast members. J. Inserts: Unistrut #P-3245, Elcen Figure 64, Grinnel Figure 282, Code Devices In. #1, or equal. Finish black if malleable iron; factory finish if steel. PARTS EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Furnish and install a raceway system for installation of conductors and for connection of all outlet boxes, junction boxes, panelboards, cabinets, gutters, motors, starters, etc. B. All raceways shall be threaded rigid steel (RGS) except as follows: 1. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) may be used only in interior dry locations such as: a. In furred spaces, and in underfloor spaces, if installed above ground (not in contact with earth or fill). b. In hollow partitions including hollow concrete blocks. c. For exposed work indoors above switch height. 2. Rigid PVC Conduit may be used: a. For direct earth burial outside of building foundations, if buried not less than 24 inches below the finished grade. In concrete slabs where specifically indicated on the Drawings. b. For installation under concrete floor slab which is placed directly on earth or fill. c. Transition to EMT or RGS raceways from under floor PVC conduits shall be just above wall sill plates at floor line. 3. Flexible conduit shall be 3-foot minimum and 6-foot maximum, and used: a. To connect motor terminal boxes or transformers to conduit stubs or outlets. b. To connect table outlets to conduit stubs or outlets. c. To connect lighting fixtures to outlets. d. To connect primary and secondary transformer feeders. 4. Liquid tight flexible conduit shall be used wherever flexible conduit connections are required and such connections are in outdoor, exterior, wet, or damp locations. C. For PVC conduits, maintain continuity of conduit system ground by installing copper grounding wire inside PVC conduit, per National Electrical Code; ground this wire at each accessible location (manhole, pull box, cabinet, outlet and junction box, etc.), and at each termination. D. Route raceways to clear all access openings. Carlsbad Library Learning Center 11/14/05 RACEWAYS E. Where conduits pass through exterior concrete or masonry walls below grade, or through floor slab on fill below grade, make entrance watertight. Install pipe sleeves in concrete with 1/2 inch minimum clearance around conduit and caulk with oakum and mastic, or use gland type conduit entrance seal. F. Underground conduits which terminate inside building below grade, or which slope so that water might flow into building shall be sealed at termination after installation of conductors. Install caps on spare (empty) conduits. G. On each exposed raceway passing through floor, wall or ceiling in a finished room, install chromium plated steel plate having a screw or spring clamping device and concealed hinge. H. Raceways, boxes, outlets, and wiring connected to emergency system shall be separate (not combined) from the normal system. I. Identify raceways for feeder and branch circuits connected to emergency battery system. Use red and yellow bands of adhesive tape (2 inches wide each tape) encircling raceway. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, and at 10 foot intervals in straight runs. J. Install labels on outlets connected to emergency battery system as follows: 1. Exposed Boxes: Pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive plastic label on cover. 2. Concealed Boxes: Plasticized card-stock tags. 3. Labeling Legend: Permanent, waterproof listing of the work "Emergency" and the circuit number. K. For outside of building foundations, install underground conduits 24 inches minimum below finish grade. L. For under concrete slab, install underground conduits to be 12 inches minimum below building finish floor. 3.02 BENDING A. Field bending, not exceeding 30 degree is allowed for PVC conduit 2 inch trade size and smaller. Use electric heat box or hot air blower specifically designed for bending PVC conduit; bending by means of open flame, not acceptable. All other bends shall be factory made. B. Make bends for exposed stub-ups completely below the surface. Make stubs vertical and arrange neatly as shown on the Drawings. 3.03 EXPANSION JOINTS A. Where embedded conduits cross building expansion joints, provide sliding conduit expansion joints with bonding strap and clamps. B. Where exposed raceways or raceways in furred spaces cross building expansion joints, use offset flexible conduits. 3.04 BUSHINGS Where insulated conduit bushings are required, insulating material must be permanently fastened to bushing. Carlsbad Library Learning Center 11/14/05 RACEWAYS 16110-4 3.05 RACEWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS A. Install raceways for communication systems, such as telephone, public address, television, and antenna distribution as follows: 1. Raceway runs shall not exceed 75 feet for 1/2 inch and 3/4 inch sizes; and shall not contain more than two 90 degree bends or equivalent. To comply with these requirements, furnish and install additional pull boxes or junction boxes, whether or not shown on the Drawings. 2. Bend radius to centerline of raceways 1 inch trade size and larger shall be not less than 10 times nominal diameter of raceway. 3.06 RACEWAYS IN MASONRY WALLS Raceways 1-1/2 inch trade size, max., may be installed in masonry walls, in grout space only. Do not displace reinforcing steel. Horizontal runs not allowed; vertical runs and boxes, 10 inch minimum from openings. 3.07 UNDERGROUND CONDUITS Make bend radius to centerline of all underground conduits not less than 10 times nominal diameter of conduit. This requirement also applies to all conduit systems entering buildings from outside building to termination inside building (e.g., pull box, cabinet, stub-up, etc.). 3.08 EXPOSED RACEWAYS Where exposed, install raceways straight and true with respect to each other, adjacent construction and building lines. Raceways shall be installed parallel or perpendicular to building walls. 3.09 STUBS Unless otherwise specified or shown, where conduits turn up in accessible floor areas or under removable partitions, install coupling flush with finish floor surface (exclusive of floor covering). Provide flush threaded plug in this coupling where conduit is not to be extended. Label each stub indicating system it serves and location of other end (e.g., "Computer System to Telephone Backboard"; "Power System to Panel PA"; "Alarm System to Alarm Cabinet"). 3.10 SPARE RACEWAYS For flush mounted panelboards, install empty raceways from panelboards to accessible spaces above. Unless otherwise shown, install minimum of six 3/4-inch raceways for each panelboard. 3.11 RUNNING THREADS Do not use running threads. Use raintight unions or concrete tight couplings. 3.12 FLASHING Provide flashing for raceways projecting through roof if not covered under other sections of the specifications. Flash raceways passing through the roof membrane with Stormtite 1100-4 four pound seamless lead flashing assemblies. 3.13 FIRESTOPPING PENETRATIONS IN FIRE-RATED ASSEMBLIES Carlsbad Library Learning Center 11/14/05 RACEWAYS Contractors shall provide proper sizing when providing sleeves or core-drilled holes to accommodate their through penetrating items. All voids between sleeve or core-drilled hole and pipe passing through, shall be firestopped in accordance with other sections of the specifications. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Library Learning Center 11/14/05 RACEWAYS •ic-i-m c SECTION 16120 CONDUCTORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Conductors. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Drawings and general provisions of the Introductory Information, Bidding Requirements, and Contract Requirements apply to this Section. B. Section 16010: Electrical General Requirements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submit Materials List and Product Data and Shop Drawings in accordance with Introductory Information, Bidding Requirements, and Contract Requirements and 16010. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUCTORS, 600 VOLTS OR LESS Conductors: THWN/THHN insulation, copper. Conductors #10 AWG and smaller shall be solid; conductors #8 AWG and larger shall be stranded. 2.02 WIRING MATERIALS A. Connectors for Copper Conductors #10 AWG and Smaller: 1. Pre-insulated Spring Pressure Type: Scotchlok Types Y, R, G and B; Ideal "Wing Nut"; T & B Series PT, or equal. 2. Splice Cap Type: Un-insulated metal cap applied with proper indenter tool which provides deformation of cap in two directions at right angles to each other, Buchanan, or equal. B. Connectors for Fixture Leads: Use pre-insulation spring pressure type specified above for conductors, or set screw type, Marr, ideal, or equal. C. Connectors and lugs for copper conductors #8 AWG and larger: Pressure or compression type, Burndy, Dossert, T & B, or equal. D. Lugs for Parallel Conductors: Provide multiple lugs where parallel conductors are used. E. Watertight Splice Kits: Epoxy resin type, suitable for the type, size and number of conductors being spliced. Submit descriptive data of splice kits. F. Electrical Tapes: 1. Friction Tape: Per ASTM D-69. 2. Rubber Tape: 0.030 inches thick, per ASTM D-119. Carlsbad Library Learning Center 11/14/05 CONDUCTORS 3. Plastic Tape: 0.007 inches thick, minimum, 3M Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company, "Scotch" #35, Johns Manville "Dutch Brand" #120, Plymouth "Slipknot Grey" #3472, or equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 WIRING METHODS A. General Requirements: 1. Do not use blocks, tackle or other mechanical means to pull in wires #8 AWG or smaller. 2. Use #12 AWG or larger conductors for light and power circuits and #14 AWG or larger conductors for control circuits. 3. Unless otherwise specified or shown, leave at least 9 inches of free conductors at each unconnected outlet. Tape free ends of conductors and coil neatly in outlet box. Provide blank plate. B. Splicing and Termination of Conductors: 1. Conductors #10 AWG and Smaller: a. Twist conductors together to be electrically and mechanically secure, and solder them; or join conductors together by means of pre-insulated spring pressure connectors, or uninsulated splice caps applied with proper indenter tool designed for the specific type of cap used. Twist conductors together before applying splice caps. b. Insulate splices, joints and free ends of conductors with insulation equivalent to that of conductors by taping with rubber and friction tapes, or with high dielectric strength plastic tape. c. If splice caps are used, plastic insulating caps may be used. After applying splice caps, use insulating caps rated for the temperatures to which they may be subjected and install as recommended by the manufacturer. 2. Conductors #8 AWG and Larger: a. Splice and terminate conductors by means of connectors and terminal lugs. b. Do not use split bolt type connectors. c. After initial set has been taken, retighten all pressure type connectors and lugs. d. Insulate all splices, joints, and free ends of conductors as specified above under "B1b". e. Where aluminum lug is bolted with steel or copper bolt, use Belleville spring washer and flat washer. Belleville washer, either hardened and tempered steel, tin plated, or stainless steel. Flat washer, mild steel, tin plated, and slightly larger than Belleville washer. 3. Underground Splices: Conductor splices installed underground in handholes and similar locations, shall be made watertight. C. Color Coding: 1. All wiring throughout shall be color coded as follows: a. 120/208 Volt Systems: 1) Phase A-Black 2) Phase B - Red 3) Phase C-Blue 4) Neutral - White 5) Ground - Green 2. Isolated ground conductors shall be green with yellow stripe. On feeders use colored tape, alternating bands of green and yellow tape to provide a minimum of three bands of green and two bands of yellow. 3. Color code all branch circuit and feeder conductors. Carlsbad Library Learning Center 11/14/05 CONDUCTORS 16120-2 4. Use wire with insulation of required color. For other types of wire, which may not be available in specified colors, use self-adhesive wrap around, 1 inch wide, plastic tape in colors specified. 5. Where tape is used for color coding, mark each conductor at all accessible locations (panelboards, junction boxes, pullboxes, auxiliary gutters, outlets, switches, control centers, etc.). 6. For signal system such as fire alarm, intercommunication, etc., make color coding in strict accordance with programs, or schedules prepared by the equipment manufacturer, or as otherwise directed by Architect. D. Marking: In addition to color coding, identify circuits with pre-marked, self adhesive, wrap around type markers, "Scotchcode" as manufactured by the 3M Company as follows: 1. Where 2 or more branch circuits or control wires of same color pass through or terminate in same accessible location (panelboard, junction box, outlet box, gutter, wireway, pullbox, etc.), mark each appropriately to distinguish it from others of same color. If wires are branch circuit conductors, mark with the correct panel and circuit 3.02 CONDUCTORS IN VERTICAL RACEWAYS Provide support for conductors in vertical raceways as required in NEC Article 300-19. 3.03 600-VOLT WIRING TEST Test 600-volt wiring and less to verify that no short circuits or accidental grounds exist. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Library Learning Center 11/14/05 CONDUCTORS SECTION 16400 SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Main and Distribution Switchboards B. Seismic Restraints C. Utility Companies Services D. Grounding 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Drawings and general provisions of the Introductory Information, Bidding Requirements, and Contract Requirements apply to this Section. B. Section 16010: Electrical General Requirements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submit Materials List and Product Data and Shop Drawings in accordance with Introductory Information, Bidding Requirements, and Contract Requirements and 16010. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MAIN AND DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS A. The main and distribution switchboards shall be a "N.R.T.L listed assembly" and shall be factory assembled. This project was designed using Siemens, ITE equipment as reference; acceptable alternatives will only be considered if they meet the Contract Document requirements and have the same (or smaller) dimensions as the switchboards shown on the Drawings. Acceptable alternatives may be: Square D, Cutler-Hammer or General Electric. Voltage, phase, wire, location, arrangement and components as shown on the Drawings. B. Circuit breakers and fused switches as specified in Section 16100 and as shown on the Drawings, and shall be bolted onto the bussing. C. The main switchboard shall include all required provisions for metering and main disconnect equipment such as meter socket and ring, current transformer space and connections, test blocks, factory nameplate and all other equipment required by the serving utility and applicable codes whether or not shown on the Drawings or described herein. D. The main and distribution switchboards shall be free standing unit of angle iron or formed code gauge steel construction, welded together to form a rigid self-framework, and shall be enclosed on all four sides and top. Top, trim, front and back panels shall be die formed of code gauge, but not less than 12 gauge steel with no raw metal edges on the front. Carlsbad Library Learning Center 11/14/05 SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION 16400-1 Switchboard access shall be front only, NEMA 1 interior and NEMA 3R (weather-proof) exterior. E. The main and distribution switchboards shall be factory finished fray enamel, applied after all surfaces are bonderized with two coats of primer and one coat of light gray. All front plates shall be baked to obtain maximum finish hardness. F. Bussing shall be flat busbar tin plated aluminum. Dimensions of bus bars shall be based upon the ampacity shown on the plans. Current density shall not exceed 1000 amperes per square inch. Bussing shall extend the full height of distribution sections. All busbar connections shall be fitted accurately to provide contact over the entire area of the joints and branches. Joints shall be flat, and fastened with cadmium plated steel bolts with lock washers. Bus bars shall be rigidly supported, braced for 65, 000 amps symmetrical (unless shown otherwise on the drawings), and spaced according to the UL and NEC Standards for bare busbar. Provide louvers for adequate ventilation. The vertical and horizontal bus shall be drilled and tapped on proper centers for complete flexibility to accommodate new and future circuit breakers, fused switches, devices, and bus extensions. Bus shall have manufacturer's name plate indicating ampacity of conductors and bus extensions allowed. Provide full capacity (same size as the hot phases and size neutral and ground bus bars. G. Exterior plates and blank spaces for future space not presently utilized shall be held in place by rigid supports aligned with screw holes and arranged to prevent screws and plates from falling against energized parts. Interiors shall be fastened to the enclosure by adjustable supports with means to provide for proper alignment. H. Circuit breakers and fused switches shall be supplied with nameplates as specified in Section 16100. PARTS EXECUTION 3.01 UTILITY COMPANIES SERVICES A. Contact the serving power and telephone utility companies prior to submission of bid to confirm service requirements. B. Perform all communications and coordination with respective utility representatives as necessary, to meet all utility requirements regarding inspection and approval of customer- provided facilities, and to ensure timely installation of utility-provided facilities. 3.02 GROUNDING A. General Requirements 1. Permanently and effectively ground conduit systems, fire sprinkler system, water piping, supports, cabinets, switchboards, equipment cases, motor frames, etc., and system neutral conductors per National Electrical Code. 2. Grounding details shown on plans are minimum. If additional requirement, such as clamps, conductors, etc., is required per National Electrical Code, furnish and install same without additional cost to Owner. 3. Use ground clamps or exothermic welds specifically designed for grounding purposes. Where ground conductor is in conduit, use ground clamp which grounds both conductor and conduit. B. Ground Rods: Unless otherwise shown, use copper clad steel ground rods, 3/4 inch diameter by 10 feet long. Carlsbad Library Learning Center 11/14/05 SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION 16400-2 C. Tests: Make ground resistance tests in presence of Architect to show compliance with National Electrical Code. Submit a copy of test results to the Architect. 3.03 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS Contractor shall obtain from the switchboard manufacturer all necessary structural calculations and drawings required to meet seismic conditions as indicated in Section 16100, relative to floor standing switch gear. He shall be responsible for obtaining final approval from the proper authorities. Provide a minimum of four 1/2 inch diameter by 12 inches long by 4 inch hook hot dipped galvanized steel anchor bolts per switchboard section, with oversized washers under nuts. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The contractor shall engage the services of a recognized independent testing agency to perform inspections and tests as herein specified. 1. Testing agency shall be member of the International Electrical Testing Association (NETA). The testing agency should have been engaged in such practices for & minimum of five years. The testing agency shall meet the "qualifications of testing firm" requirements of the "Electrical Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems" published by NETA (latest edition). 2. The testing agency shall provide all material, equipment, labor, and technical supervision to perform such tests and inspections. The Contractor shall make available to the testing agency a copy of the latest revised contract documents. The testing agency shall provide a letter certifying that all equipment (equipment required to be tested under paragraph below) has been field verified to meet the ratings indicated in the contract documents. 3. Testing agency shall inspect and test the following equipment/systems in accordance to the Electrical Acceptance testing Specifications for Electric Power Distribution Equipment and Systems published by NETA (latest edition): a. Switchboard assemblies. b. Panelboards. c. Switches and Circuit breakers in switchboards d. Grounding systems. e. Cables (in all feeders), Low-Voltage, 600 volt Maximum. f. Emergency Battery System. g. The Contractor shall submit test report to Architect. Test report shall include: summary of the project, description of equipment tested, description of test, test results, analysis and recommendations. Report defective materials and workmanship; include complete records of adjustments and remedial efforts. Materials and workmanship found defective shall be fixed or replaced and re- tested. 4. Testing agency shall perform a coordination study. Coordination study shall meet NETA 6.2 Coordination Studies specifications. Contractor shall implement study recommendations. Submit study report to Architect. 5. Upon satisfactory completion of tests, apply a label to tested components indicating test results, person responsible and date. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Library Learning Center 11/14/05 SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION 16400-3 SECTION 16500 LIGHTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Lighting Fixtures B. Ballasts C. Lamps 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Drawings and general provisions of Introductory Information, Bidding Requirements, and Contract Requirements apply to this Section. B. Section 16010: Electrical General Requirements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submit Materials List and Product Data and Shop Drawings in accordance with Introductory Information, Bidding Requirements, and Contract Requirements and 16010. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Provide lighting fixtures as specified and shown on the Drawings. B. Lighting fixtures shall have all parts and fittings necessary to completely and properly install the fixture. All fixtures shall be wired from outlet to socket with #14 AWG Underwriters' Type "AF" or "CF" fixture wire. C. All fixtures of one type shall be of one manufacturer and of identical finish and appearance. D. All fixtures shall be complete with accessories, end caps, plaster framed, yokes, hangers, etc., which are required for the specific installation. E. The catalog numbers included in the description of the various types of lighting fixtures shall be basically considered to establish the type or class of the fixtures with a particular manufacturer only. The fixture length, number of lamp component materials, accessories, and all other features required to fulfill the total description of the fixture, based on all Drawings and Specification information, shall be compiled with, regardless of whether or not the catalog number specifically includes the catalog number and the description, the Contractor shall either resolve the conflict with the Architect prior to submittal of his bid, or furnish the fixture to meet the intent, as later interpreted by the Architect, without change in Contract price. F. Fixture catalog numbers called out are for individual units. Where two or more units are combined for continuous row installation, the Contractor shall furnish and install the Carlsbad Library Learning Center 11/14/05 LIGHTING 16500-1 necessary lighting fixtures and accessories for the total row length as shown on the Drawings. 2.02 FLUORESCENT LAMP BALLASTS A. General Requirements: Unless otherwise indicated, features include the following: 1 . Designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated at full light output. 2. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent. 3. Sound Rating: A. 4. Certified Ballast Manufacturer Certification: Indicated by label. 5. Power Factor: 98 percent, minimum. 6. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. 7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: Less than 1 .7. 8. Transient Protection: Comply with IEEE C62.41 for Category A1 locations. B. Electronic Ballasts for Linear Lamps: Unless otherwise indicated, features include the following, besides those in "General Requirements" paragraph above: 1 . Encapsulation: Without voids in potting compound. 2. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail. C. Ballasts for Compact Lamps in Recessed Fixtures: Unless otherwise indicated, additional features include the following: 1. Type: Electronic fully encapsulated in potting compound. 2. Flicker: Less than 5 percent. 2.03 HIGH-INTENSITY-DISCHARGE LAMP BALLASTS A. General: Comply with ANSI C82.4. Unless otherwise indicated, features include the following: 1 . Type: Constant wattage auto-transformer or regulating high-power-factor type, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Operating Voltage: Match system voltage. 3. Minimum Starting Temperature: -22 degrees F for single lamp ballasts. 4. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 degrees F. 5. Open-circuit operation that will not reduce average life. 2.04 LAMPS A. Fluorescent Color Temperature and Minimum Color-Rendering Index: 3500 K and 82 CRI, unless otherwise indicated. B. HID lamps shall be manufactured by Sylvania, General Electric, or Phillips, as indicated on the Drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Unless specifically shown on the Drawings otherwise, all lighting fixtures and/or fixture stems shall be placed symmetrically, with respect to the ceiling tile pattern or other architectural ceiling and wall modules. B. Surface mounted fluorescent fixtures shall be mounted on sections of mineral tile or other approved non-combustible material, the non-combustible material to extend 1-1/2 inch Carlsbad Library Learning Center 11/14/05 LIGHTING o beyond the ballast housing and wiring channels. Only if the fixture must be mounted on cellulose acoustic tile or other non-fireproof material, fixture shall be mounted on factory fabricated 1-1/2 inch spacers. Spacers shall not be used where finished ceiling is of plaster, mineral tile or other approved non-combustible material or where fixture has UL approval for mounting directly to non-fireproof (low density) material. C. Where either surface or recessed fixtures are shown to mount on or lay in a suspended "Tee" ceiling, the fixtures shall have two additional #12 gauge hanger wires installed directly from the structure above to diagonally opposite corners of each fixture housing, and be slightly loose for recessed fixtures to be able to seat in the "Tee" system. Seismic clips from fixtures to tees shall be provided; twice the number of hanger wires for each fixture. D. In addition to the hanger wires above, surface mounted fixtures on a suspended 'Tee" ceiling shall be attached to a main runner with a positive clamping device made of material with a minimum of 14 gauge. Rotational spring catches do not apply. E. Support downlight fixtures (recessed or surface) from structure above with two #12 gauge hanger wires and with EMT or channel laid across ceiling support channels. F. Support pendant fixtures with factory finished stem hangers and ball aligners, with provision for one inch vertical adjustment. Provide two stems for a single fixture. Mount continuous rows of fixtures with an additional stem hanger greater than number of fixtures in the row. Provide an aircraft type safety cable, 8 gauge and 100 pound breaking strength minimum, in each pendant stem. Secure safety cable from light fixture housing to building structure above. G. The Electrical Contractor shall provide the Owner with, in addition to all the lamps specified, 20 percent of the total number of lamps used in this project for each different lamp type (for future use), lamps shall be equal to those installed, lamps shall be stored in their original cartons. Verify with Owner for storage location of all lamps. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Library Learning Center 11/14/05 LIGHTING SECTION 16740 TELEPHONE SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Telephone System. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Drawings and general provisions of the Introductory Information, Bidding Requirements, and Contract Requirements apply to this Section. B. Section 16010: Electrical General Requirements PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Raceways shall be as specified in Section 16110. B. Boxes and plates shall be as specified in Section 16100. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. General: Provide empty raceways with pull cords between outlets as shown on the Drawings. B. Raceway runs shall not exceed 75 feet and shall not contain more than two 90 degree bends or equivalent. To comply with these requirements, furnish and install additional pullboxes or junction boxes, whether or not shown on the Drawings. C. Bend radius to centerline of raceways, 1 inch trade size and larger, shall be not less than 10 times nominal diameter of raceway. D. Provide plywood terminal boards as shown on the Drawings. E. Provide pull cords in all telephone systems conduits. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Library Learning Center 11/14/05 TELEPHONE SYSTEM 16740-1 SECTION 16821 PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install the public address amplifier, sound reproducers, signal generators, and accessories required for a public address system, complete and operable, all in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS , A. Section 16010 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. 1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of other requirements of these Technical Specifications, all work specified herein shall comform to or exceed the applicable requirements of the following documents; provided, that wherever the provisions of said publication are in conflict with the requirements specified herein, the more stringent requirement shall apply. B. Codes: 1. NEC - National Electric Code, Article 800 2. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2005. C. Commercial Standards: 1. EIA: Electronic Industries Association Standards. 2. ANSI/EEE 241: Electric Power Systems in Commercial Buildings, Recommended Practice for. 3. ANSI/NEMA 250: Enclosures for Electrical Equipment. 1.04 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate electrical characteristics and connection requirements. Indicate layout of equipment mounted in racks and cabinets, component interconnecting wiring, and wiring diagrams of field wiring to speakers and remote input devices. B. Product Data: Provide data showing electrical characteristics and connection requirements for each component. C. Block Diagram showing system relationships of major components and quantities and interconnecting cable requirements. D. Plans showing equipment locations, raceway, contractor requirements, control consoles and panel arrangments, equipment outlet devices, and special mounting details. E. Wiring diagrams showing terminal identification for field-installed wiring. F. Catalog literature. G. Test Reports: Indicate satisfactory completion of each test recommended by the manufacturer. H. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of product. I. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. J. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate that installation is complete and system performs according to specified requirements. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM 16821 -1 K. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of speakers, control equipment, and outlets for input/output connectors. L. Operation Data: Include instructions for adjusting, operating, and extending the system. M. Maintenance Data: Include repair procedures and spare parts documentation. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and Federal Communications Commission. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience with service facilities within 100 miles of Project. C. The firm installing the public address system shall have had prior successful installation, experience with public address systems similar in scope of the system of this project. D. The CONTRACTOR shall post a typewritten notice, at each amplifier, to indicate the name, address, and telephone number of the firm to call when service is necessary. Notice shall be mounted in a metal frame attached to the amplifier case. E. Supplier Qualifications: Authorized distributor of specified manufacturer with minimum five years documented experience. F. Installer Qualifications: Authorized installer of specified manufacturer with service facilities within 100 miles of Project. G. Products: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and indicated. H. Operation of the public address system shall be demonstrated to the ENGINEER to prove that under normal conditions coverage complies with this specification, there is no feedback, and that signal! access to the system is as required. 1.06 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Furnish service and maintenance of public address system for one year from Date of Substantial Completion. B. The CONTRACTOR shall respond to trouble calls with a competant repair person at the project site within 24 hours; CONTRACTOR shall also maintain a full inventory of replacement parts so that all routine repairs can be completed within 24 hours. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Except as otherwise shown, the CONTRACTOR shall provide public address system components of types, styles, sizes, and capacities specified. Said components shall comply with manufacturer's standard design, materials, and components. The system shall be constructed in accordance with published product information and as required for a complete and operable installation. Where material types are not indicated herein, the CONTRACTOR shall provide material complying with established industry standards. Capacities of all equipment and material shall be equal to or greater than that specified herein. All equipment shall be of the latest design and shall be new. B. The system shall provide loud speaker coverage throughout the building. Input signal access to the system shall be by a microphone located at the operator's console. See plans following this specification. 2.02 LOUDSPEAKERS Carlsbad City Library Learning Center PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM 16821 -2 A. Loudspeakers shall be furnished complete with matching transformers, housing, baffle, and grill, as required for the intended use. B. Flush-mounted ceiling reproducers shall comprise a complete acoustically-matched assembly of housing, faceplate, and matching transformer. Frequency range shall be 70 to 14,000 Hz. Housing shall be metal 16-gauge, rust-proofed, and shall be treated with an acoustical damping material on the interior surface. Faceplate shall be metal with a grille. Matching transformers shall provide a full range of 6 volume level adjustments and shall be mounte at the speaker. Speaker shall be 8-inch conical type, continuous rating to voice. Coil shall be 8 watts. Peak rating shall be 15 watts. Axial sensitivity with 1-watt input shall be 95dB at 4 feet. Ceramic magnets shall weigh 6 ounces. C. Wall mounted speaker assemblies located in finished office areas shall be as described for flush-mounted ceiling speakers, except that the housing shall be for surface-mounting on the wall; shall have a metaJ grille; and shall be furnished in grey-metal hammertone. 2.03 AMPLIFIERS A. All amplifiers shall encompass silicon solid-state circuitry with individual line protective fuses and power "on" indicators. All amplifiers shall be housed in an enclosed floor-standing or wall-mounted cabinet as required. Amplifier shall be sized by the CONTRACTOR to satisfy the requirements of this specification: 1. A line amplifier is required to accept a 600-ohm balanced input from the telephone system voice paging access equipment. Frequency response shall be 100 to 15,000 Hz; noise rejection shall be at least 72dB down at rated output. 2. A compressor-limiter amplifier is required for each paging channel (zone) indicated. Gain shall be 20 dB with a frequency response of plus or minus 1-1/2 dB between 50 and 60,OOOHz. The compressor-limiter amplifier shall provide 30 dB fo maximum compression with an attack time of 10 milliseconds and an adjustable recovery time between 1 and 2 seconds. Hum and noise levels shall be fitted with a V.U. meter and controls for adjusting volume and compression. 3. Power booster amplifier shall have no more than 2 percent total harmonic distraction with a response of plus or minus one dB over a range of 25 to 20,000 Hz. hum and noise level shall be 75dB below rated output. Output taps shall be provided for 25 and 70 volt balanced and unbalanced lines. For adjustment and operation of booster amplifier the CONTRACTOR shall provide 4 separate screwdriver adjustable volume controls, a power indicator light, and an input selector switch. 2.04 ACCESSORIES AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all miscellaneous equipment, cabling, terminals, etc, in addition to equipment specified herein to comprise a complete and operable public address system. B. A signal generator panel shall be provide for alarming of process malfunctions. Alarm signals shall be generated upon contact closures originated in the Main Control Board (MCB) and shall be distributed throughout the building after the public address system. Faces signals are required: 1. Simulated 780Hz bell tone, 48 pulses per minute. 2. Simulated siren, rising and falling between 250 and 780 Hz tome at 4 cycles per minute. 3. Steady 780 Hz tone. 4. Power booster amplifier shall have no more than 2 percent total harmonic distraction with a response of plus or minus one dB over a range of 25 to 20,000 Hz. hum and noise level shall be 75dB below rated output. Output taps shall be provided for 25 and 70 volt balanced and unbalanced lines. For adjustment and operation of booster amplifier the CONTRACTOR shall provide 4 separate screwdriver adjustable volume controls, a power indicator light, and an input selector switch. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM C. Finish plate-mounted attenuators are required for box mounting. Attenuators shall be as required for its related speaker, and shall be auto-transformer type. Switch contacts shall be silver plated. Finish plate shall be stainless steel with paint-filled scale. D. Public address cabling specified herein is intended to set quality requirements and is not meant to prevent the use of the cable normally furnished for public address systems of the quality specified. Cables shall have 300-volt insulation; shielding coverage shall be 100 percent, all conductors shall be tinned copper. E. Cable for low level (signal input) circuits shall be No. 16 AWG minimum, 3 conductors of tinned copper, color coded with polyethylene insulation. Conductors shall be cabled under a mylar/aluminum shield with No. 18 drain wire, under an overall PVC jacket. Nominal insulation thickness shall be 0.032 inch, nominal jacket thickness 0.030 inch, and nominal overall diameter 0.30 inch. F. Speaker cable shall be 2-conductor No. 18 AWG minimum, color coded with polyethylene insulation. Conductors shall be cabled under a mylar/aluminum shield, with No. 18 AWG drain wire, under an overall PVC jacket. Insulation thickness shall be 0.018 inch nominal, jacket thickness shall be 0.028 inch nominal, and overall diameter shall be 0.23 inch nominal. PARTS EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. All materials and equipment shall be installed in accordance with the printed recommendations of the manufacturer and the requirements of the Contract Documents. Equipment shall be installed plumb and square, shall be adequately ventilated, and shall be securely anchored. B. Although the raceway shown on the Drawings may not conform to the CONTRACTOR-chosen routing of cable, it is incumbent upon the CONTRACTOR to provide the raceway system required at no additional cost to the CITY. 3.02 WORKMANSHIP A. Conductor terminations at screw terminals shall be accomplished with hooked, spade lugs. Shielding shall be continuous and shall be grounded at the amplifier which shall be frame grounded. Wiring shall be cabled within enclosures and banded neatly to terminals. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Speakers shall be mounted to minimize the possibility of acoustic feedback between telephone stations and loudspeakers. Speakers, grilles, and backboxes all shall be mounted to eliminate acoustic resonance and vibration. Wiring throughout the system shall be identified in accordance with approved shop drawings; identification shall be applied at all terminations and access fittings. B. Location: As indicated on plan sheets following this section in Technical Specification. 3.04 EXECUTION OF TEST PROCEDURES A. The CONTRACTOR shall operate all equipment, in the presence of the ENGINEER, to demonstrate signal input from malfunction panel, microphone and telephone system. Prior to such test the CONTRACTOR shall have placed all speakers, adjusted speaker power output for proper paging coverage adn corrected all hum and feedback problems to the ENGINEER'S satisfaction. At completion of test, all adjustments shall be locked or sealed. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM 16821 -4 ; X1 /—i—<•—-•—-i—•—i • r)X-> rj"t~ci:d:iiiiil • '~r3 ^ ROOM LEGEND noTI ENTRY [T02l JANITOR / CUSTODIAN 055] WOMEN'S RESTROOM |W1 MEN'S RESTROOM [Togl KITCHEN / STAFF LOUNGE (B) fW| HOMEWORK CENTER (B) [Wl HOMEWORK CENTER (B) fWl HOMEWORK CENTER (B) RTOI HOMEWORK CENTER (B) [Tm COORDINATOR'S OFFICE (B) [Tin CHILDREN / FAMILY AREA (A-3) pml ADULT AREA (A-3) |Ti4l UNISEX RESTROOM RlSl KITCHEN (A-3) rnslSTORniME ROOM (A-3) RlFI ADULT COMPUTER AREA (A-3) Ran STAFF WORKSTATION (A-3) ["tail RECEPTION / INFO DESK (A-3) fWl STAFF WORKROOM (B) (l23~| ELEVATOR MACHINE ROOM nai ELEVATOR LOBBY fWI UTILITY CLOSET [1271 ELECTRICAL CLOSET 11281 UTILITY CLOSET SYMBOL LEGEND (C) CONTROL PANEL CM) MICROPHONE MANUEL ONCINAARCHITECTS INC.ARCHITECTUREPLANNING INTERIORS CITY OF CARLSBAD ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT GROUND LEVEL P/A PLAH CARLSBAD CITY LIBRARY LEARNING CENTER APPROVED BY: WILLIAM E. PLUUMER DEPUTY CITY ENGINEER PEft 2»17» EXP:OM1-M DATE OWN BY: _ CHKD BY: . RVWD BY: . PROJECT NO. 4001 DRAVMNG NO. 434-5 •i:H-'-K. o ,/f ® ©11 0© ® ROOM LEGEND QOT] ENTRY [W1 JANITOR / CUSTODIAN [Wl WOMEN'S RESTROOM R041 MEN'S RESTROOM Q06] KITCHEN / STAFF LOUNGE (B) [Wl HOMEWORK CENTER (B) rnnn HOMEWORK CENTER (B) [iTOl HOMEWORK CENTER (B) RlOl HOMEWORK CENTER (B) fTiTI COORDINATOR'S OFFICE (B) ITTn CHILDREN / FAMILY AREA (A-3) [Ti3l ADULT AREA (A-3) [TT4l UNISEX RESTROOM |Ti5"| KITCHEN (A-3) Riel STORYTIME ROOM (A-3) [Tl9l ADULT COMPUTER AREA (A-3) fWI STAFF WORKSTATION (A-3) fWI RECEPTION / INFO DESK (A-3) [1221 STAFF WORKROOM (B) [l23~| ELEVATOR MACHINE ROOM Q2|] UTILITY CLOSET |W1 ELECTRICAL CLOi QH] UTILITY CLOSET SYMBOL LEGEND FLUSH MOUNTED CEILING REPRODUCER (SPEAKER), PER SPECIFICATIONS MANUEL ONCINA ARCH7ECT5MC.ARCHITECTURE PLANNING INTERIORS B711 La Jaia Bwd. CITY OF CARLSBAD ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT GROUND LEVEL P/A RCP CARLSBAD CITY LIBRARY LEARNING CENTER APPROVED BY: WILLIAM E. PtUMMER DEPUTY CITY ENGINEER PE«:i«17» EXP: 03-31-06 DATE OWN BY: . CHKD BY:. RVWD BY; . PROJECT NO. 4001 DRAWING NO. 434-5 ROOM LEGEND PSOTI ENTRY / RECEPTION f202"| COMPUTER TRAINING ROOM (A-3) HOT! MEN'S RESTROOM H04"| WOMEN'S RESTROOM f255"l LARGE GROUP ROOM (A-3) fl5T| LARGE GROUP ROOM (A-3) r2oT| HALLWAY (1551 MEDIUM GROUP ROOM (A-3) [2091 RECEPTION AREA (A-3) FliTTI CART STORAGE (S-2) ITiTI GENERAL STORAGE (S-2) Hill STAFF WORKROOM (B) r2T3l COLLECTION (A-3) rSlTI SERVER ROOM (S-2) rem LARGE GROUP ROOM (A-3) f216l INDIVIDUAL TUTORING OFFICE (B) rsrn INDIVIDUAL TUTORING OFFICE (B) ITJFI INDIVIDUAL TUTORING OFFICE (B) rSTFI INDIVIDUAL TUTORING OFFICE (B) r22tn MEDIUM GROUP ROOM (A-3) rSSTI HALLWAY (A-3) 11221 INDIVIDUAL TUTORING OFFICE (B) [22T1 INDIVIDUAL TUTORING OFFICE (B) 11241 INDIVIDUAL TUTORING OFFICE (B) [2251 INDIVIDUAL TUTORING OFFICE (B) H251 INDIVIDUAL TUTORING OFFICE (B) H2T| RESOURCE ALCOVE (A-3) f22T| COORDINATOR OFFICE (B) [2151 SMALL GROUP ROOM (A-3) f23T| JANITOR'S CLOSET H3T1 EXTERIOR TERRACE H331 EXTERIOR TERRACE SYMBOL LEGEND (C) CONTROL PANEL (u) MICROPHONE MANUEL ONCINAARCHITECTS PNC.ARCHfTECIUREPLANNINGINTERIORS CITY OF CARLSBAD ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT UPPER LEVEL P/A PLAI CARLSBAD CITY LIBRARY LEARNING CENTER APPROVED BY: WILLIAM E. PLUMMER DEPUTY CITY ENGINEER PE* 211T6 EXP. OM1-06 OWN BY: _ CHKD BY:. RVWD BY: PROJECT NO. 4001 DRAWING NO. 434-5 ROOM LEGEND SYMBOL LEGEND [loTl ENTRY / RECEPTION [2021 COMPUTER TRAINING ROOM (A-3) [2531 MEN'S RESTROOM [2oTl WOMEN'S RESTROOM [2051 LARGE GROUP ROOM (A-3) [2061 LARGE GROUP ROOM (A-3) [207] HALLWAY [2081 MEDIUM GROUP ROOM (A-3) [2091 RECEPTION AREA (A-3) [2101 CART STORAGE (S-2) [2111 GENERAL STORAGE (S-2) [2T2l STAFF WORKROOM (B) [2131 COLLECTION (A-3) )[2lT| SERVER ROOM (S-2) [liTI LARGE GROUP ROOM (A-3) [2161 INDIVIDUAL TUTORING OFFICE (B) f217l INDIVIDUAL TUTORING OFFICE (B) [2181 INDIVIDUAL TUTORING OFFICE (B) [2191 INDIVIDUAL TUTORING OFFICE (B) [2261 MEDIUM GROUP ROOM (A-3) [22T1 HALLWAY (A-3) f222~| INDIVIDUAL TUTORING OFFICE (B) [2231 INDIVIDUAL TUTORING OFFICE (B) [2241 INDIVIDUAL TUTORING OFFICE (B) [2251 INDIVIDUAL TUTORING OFFICE (B) [2261 INDIVIDUAL TUTORING OFFICE (B) [2271 RESOURCE ALCOVE (A-3) [2281 COORDINATOR OFFICE (B) [2291 SMALL GROUP ROOM (A-3) [2301 ELEVATOR LOBBY [23T1 JANITOR'S CLOSET [2321 EXTERIOR TERRACE f233l EXTERIOR TERRACE [23T1 EXTERIOR TERRACE FLUSH MOUNTED CEILING REPRODUCER (SPEAKER). PER SPECIFICATIONS MANUB.ONCMAAKCHTCCTS INC.ARCHITECTURE PLANNWS INTERIORS•711 LoJMatHO. CITY OF CARLSBAD ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT UPPER LEVEL P/A RCP CARLSBAD CITY LIBRARY LEARNING CENTER APPROVED BY: WILLIAM E. PLUMMER DEPUTY CrTY ENGINEER PE* 28176 EXP: OM1-M DATE OWN BY: _ CHKD BY: .RVW BY: . PROJECT NO. 4001 DRAWNG NO. 434-5 APPENDIX "A" RESIDENT NOTIFICATION EXAMPLE CITY OF CARLSBAD ROAD WORK ABC CONTRACTORS OFFICE # (760)XXX-XXXX FIELD # (760)XXX-XXXX Dear resident: As a part of the City of Carlsbad's ongoing pro- gram to maintain its streets, your street will be resurfaced with asphalt concrete over the exist- ing roadway surface. This construction will re- quire the closing of your street to through traffic for one day. Your street, from XYZ St. to DEF Ave. will be closed to through traffic and resur- faced on: MON. TUB. WED. THU. FRI. DATE: XX/XX/XX from 7:OOA.M. to 5:00 P.M. If you don't plan to leave your home by 7:00 A.M. on the above date please park your car on an adjacent street in your neighborhood that will not be resurfaced. Streets scheduled for resurfacing can be determined by calling either the Contrac- tor or the City of Carlsbad's Project Inspector. When walking to and from your car, remember not to walk on the newly overlaid street or you will have black residue on the bottom of your shoes. Please do not drive, walk on, walk pets, play, or skate on the newly overlaid asphalt. Also, please refrain from watering your lawns, washing cars, etc., approximately 6-8 hours after the asphalt is laid as running water will cause damage to the new surface. ABC is the Contractor that will be performing the resurfacing work for the city and you may call them at the above phone number if you have any questions regarding the project. Resurfacing of your street will not occur on the day your trash is collected. Mail delivery may be delayed if the postman cannot reach the mailbox that day. If u have a moving company scheduled for that day please call and inform the Contractor of the date. If you have any concerns which cannot be addressed by the Contractor, you may call the Sty's Project Inspector @ (xxx) xxx-xxxx. Thank you for your cooperation as we work to make a better City of Carlsbad. Revised 10/08/03 Contract No. 3771 and 4001 Page 100 of 99 Pages Appendix B LEARNING CENTER CONDITIONAL USE PERMIT 1 PLANNING COMMISSION RESOLUTION NO. 5894 2 A RESOLUTION OF THE PLANNING COMMISSION OF THE CITY OF CARLSBAD, CALIFORNIA, APPROVING A 4 CONDITIONAL USE PERMIT TO ALLOW THE OPERATION 5 OF THE CITY'S LEARNING CENTER ON PROPERTY , v»*L<.UVUIUj. LOCATED ON THE EAST SIDE OF EUREKA PLACE BETWEEN BASSWOOD AVENUE AND CHESTNUT 7 AVENUE IN LOCAL FACILITIES MANAGEMENT ZONE 1. g CASE NAME: LEARNING CENTER CASE NO.: CUP 04-12 10 WHEREAS, City of Carlsbad, "Developer/Owner," has filed a verified application with the City of Carlsbad regarding property described as12 13 . Lots 9 and 10 of Optimo Tract, Subdivision of Tract 234, 14 Thum lands, Map #1681, in the City of Carlsbad, County of San Diego, State of California, according to the map thereof 15 No. 1805, filed at request of First National Bank of Oceanside 16 17 ("the Property"); and 18 WHEREAS, said verified application constitutes a request for a Conditional Use •19 Permit as shown on Exhibits "A" - "O" dated April 20, 2005, on file in the Planning 21 Department, LEARNING CENTER - CUP 04-12, as provided by Chapter 21.42 and/or 21.50 22 of the Carlsbad Municipal Code; and 24 WHEREAS, the Planning Commission did, on the 20th day of April 2005, hold a 25 duly noticed public hearing as prescribed by law to consider said request; and 26 27 WHEREAS, at said public hearing, upon hearing and considering all testimony 28 and arguments, if any, of all persons desiring to be heard, said Commission considered all factors relating to the CUP. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT HEREBY RESOLVED by the Planning Commission of the City of Carlsbad as follows: A) That the foregoing recitations are true and correct. B) That based on the evidence presented at the public hearing, the Commission APPROVES LEARNING CENTER - CUP 04-12, based on the following findings and subject to the following conditions: I Findings; 2 .. 1. That Hie requested use is necessary or desirable for the development of the community in .that the use provides needed learning opportunities for adults and children aimed at increasing the literacy level of those who participate, is essentially in harmony with the various elements and objectives of the General Plan hi that it will provide a needed learning opportunity in an urbanized location where it can be conveniently utilized by residents of the community, and is not detrimental to existing uses specifically permitted in the zone in which the proposed use is located, in that the site has previously 8 provided a home for similar activities (e.g., Girls' Club, Montessori School) without being detrimental to the area and, when renovated, the facility will be more compatible with the neighborhood by providing additional on-site parking and 10 improved circulation. 2. That the site for the intended use is adequate in size and shape to accommodate the use, in that the project site can accommodate the proposed project while complying with 13 .all applicable development standards for the site, including setback requirements, !4 structure height limits, lot coverage limits, and providing all required parking on- site.15 16 3. That all the yards, setbacks, walls, fences, landscaping, and other features necessary to . - adjust the requested use to existing or permitted future uses in the neighborhood will be provided and maintained, in that the proposed project wfll provide: setbacks (20-foot front 18 and rear yards, 10-foot side yards); existing fencing/wans around the property perimeter; . j <j and landscaping in all yard setbacks. 20 4. That the street system serving the proposed use is adequate to properly handle all traffic 21 generated by the proposed use, in that the proposed project will generate a maximum 22 of 280 ADT which can be accommodated by the surrounding street system, including Tamarack Avenue, 1-5, and Eureka Place. 23 24 5. The project is consistent with the City-Wide Facilities and Improvements Plan, the Local Facilities Management Plan for Zone 1 and all City public facility policies and ordinances. The project includes elements or has been conditioned to construct or 26 provide funding to ensure that all facilities and improvements regarding: sewer 27 collection and treatment; water, drainage; circulation; fire; schools; parks and other recreational facilities; libraries; government administrative facilities; and open space, 8 related to the project will be installed to serve new development prior to or concurrent with need. Specifically, the project has been conditioned to provide proof from the Carlsbad Unified School District that the project has satisfied its obligation for school facilities. 6. That the project is consistent with the City's Landscape Manual (Carlsbad Municipal Code Section 14.28.020 and Landscape Manual Section IB). 7. The Planning Commission has reviewed each of the exactions imposed on the Developer contained in this resolution, and hereby finds, in this case, that the exactions are imposed to mitigate impacts caused by or reasonably related to the project, and the extent and the degree of the exaction is in rough proportionality to the impact caused by the project. Conditions; 2 3 Note: Unless otherwise specified herein, all conditions shall be satisfied prior to issuance of .Grading Permit or Building Permit, whichever comes first 4 5 1. If any of the following conditions fail to occur, or if they are, by then: terms, to be , implemented and maintained over time, if any of such conditions fail to be so implemented and maintained according to their terms, the City shall have the right to 7 revoke or modify all approvals herein granted; deny or further condition issuance of all g future building permits; deny, revoke or further condition all certificates of occupancy issued under the authority of approvals herein granted; record a notice of violation on the property title; institute and prosecute litigation to compel their compliance with said 10 conditions or seek damages for their violation. No vested rights are gained by Developer or a successor in interest by the City's approval of this Conditional Use Permit 2. Staff is authorized and directed to make, or require the Developer to make, all corrections 13 , and modifications to the Conditional Use Permit documents, as necessary to make them 14 internally consistent and in conformity with the final action on the project Development shall occur substantially as shown on the approved Exhibits. Any proposed development different from this approval, shall require an amendment to this approval. 16 , - 3. Developer shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state, and local laws and regulations in effect at the time of building permit issuance. 18 .19 4. If any condition for construction of any public improvements or facilities, or the payment of any fees in-lieu thereof, imposed by this approval or imposed by law on this Project are challenged, this approval shall be suspended as provided hi Government Code 21 Section 66020. If any such condition is determined to be invalid this approval shall be 22 invalid unless the City Council determines that the project without the condition complies with all requirements of law. 24 5. Developer/Operator shall and does hereby agree to indemnify, protect, defend and hold 25 harmless the City of Carlsbad, its Council members, officers, employees, agents, and representatives, from and against any and all liabilities, losses, damages, demands, claims and costs, including court costs and attorney's fees incurred by the City arising, directly 27 or indirectly, from (a) City's approval and issuance of this Conditional Use Permit, (b) City's approval or issuance of any permit or action, whether discretionary or non- discretionary, in connection with the use contemplated herein, and (c) Developer/Operator's installation and operation of the facility permitted hereby, including without limitation, any and all liabilities arising from the emission by the facility of electromagnetic fields or other energy waves or emissions. This obligation survives until all legal proceedings have been concluded and continues even if the City's approval is not validated. 6. Developer shall submit to the Planning Director a reproducible 24" x 36" mylar copy of the Site Plan reflecting the conditions approved by the final decision making body. •f 10 10. Prior to the issuance of the Building Permit, Developer shall submit to the City a Notice12 13 14 15 16 17 18 21 22 23 24 26 27 28 7. Prior to the issuance of a building permit, the Developer shall provide proof to the Director from the Carlsbad Unified School District that this project has satisfied its obligation to provide school facilities. 8. This project shall comply with all conditions and mitigation measures which are required as part of the Zone 1 Local Facilities Management Plan and any amendments made to that Plan prior to the issuance of building permits. 9. Building permits will not be issued for this project unless the local agency providing water and sewer services to the project provides written certification to the City that facilities will continue to be available until the time of occupancy. of Restriction to be filed in the office of the County Recorder, subject to the satisfaction of the Planning Director, notifying all interested parties and successors in interest that the City of Carlsbad has issued a Conditional Use Permit by Resolution No. 5894 on the property. Said Notice of Restriction shall note the property description, location of the file containing complete project details and all conditions of approval as well as any conditions or restrictions specified for inclusion in the Notice of Restriction, The Planning Director has the authority to execute and record an amendment to the notice which modifies or terminates said notice upon a showing of good cause by the Developer or successor in interest. 19 11. This Conditional Use Permit shall be reviewed by the Planning Director annually to determine if all conditions of mis permit have been met and that the use does not have a substantial negative effect on surrounding properties or the public health and welfare. If the Planning Director determines that the use has such substantial negative effects, the Planning Director shall recommend that the Planning Commission, after providing the permittee the opportunity to be heard, add additional conditions to reduce or eliminate the substantial negative effects. 25 12. This Conditional Use Permit is granted for an unlimited time period. This permit may be revoked at any time after a public hearing, if it is found that the use has a substantial detrimental effect on surrounding land uses and the public's health and welfare, or the conditions imposed herein have not been met 13. Developer shall submit and obtain Planning Director approval of a Final Landscape and Irrigation Plan showing conformance with the approved Preliminary Landscape Plan and the City's Landscape Manual. Developer shall construct and install all landscaping as shown on the approved Final Plans, and maintain all landscaping in a healthy and thriving condition, free from weeds, trash, and debris. 14. All roof appurtenances, including air conditioners, shall be architecturally integrated and concealed from view and the sound buffered from adjacent properties and streets, in substance as provided in Building Department Policy No. 80-6, to the satisfaction of the Directors of Community Development and Planning. 15. Developer shall submit and obtain Planning Director approval of an exterior lighting plan, 2 including parking areas. All lighting shall be designed to reflect downward and avoid any impacts on adjacent homes or property. 16. Developer shall construct trash receptacle and recycling areas enclosed by a six-foot high 5 masonry wall with gates pursuant to City Engineering Standards and Carlsbad Municipal Code Chapter 21.105. Location of said receptacles shall be approved by the Planning Director. Enclosure shall be of similar colors and/or materials to the project to the satisfaction of the Planning Director. 8 17. No outdoor storage of materials shall occur onsite unless required by the Fire Chief. When so required, the Developer shall submit and obtain approval of the Fire Chief and 10 the Planning Director of an Outdoor Storage Plan, and thereafter comply with the approved plan. 12 Engineering 13 14 IS. Prior to hauling dirt or construction materials to or from any proposed construction site within this project, Contractor shall apply for and obtain approval from, the City Engineer for the proposed haul route. 16 Grading 18 19. Prior to the issuance of a grading permit or building permit, whichever occurs first, .19 Developer shall submit to the City Engineer proof that a Notice of Intention for the start . of work has been submitted to the State Water Resources Control Board. 20. Based upon a review of the proposed grading and the grading quantities shown on the 22 Preliminary Grading Plan, a grading permit for this project is required. Developer shall apply for and obtain a grading permit from the City Engineer prior to issuance of a building permit for the project 24 25 Dedications/Improvements 21. Developer shall install improvements shown on the site plan and the following 27 improvements including, but not limited to, paving, base, sidewalks, curbs and gutters, grading, clearing and grubbing, sewer lateral, water service, retaining walls and onsite recycled water irrigation system, to City Standards to the satisfaction of the City Engineer. 22. Developer shall comply with the City's requirements of the National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permit. Developer shall provide improvements constructed pursuant to best management practices as referenced in the "California Storm Water Best Management Practices Handbook" to reduce surface pollutants to an acceptable level prior to discharge to sensitive areas. Plans for such improvements shall be submitted to and subject to the approval of the City Engineer. Said plans shall include but not be limited to notifying prospective owners and tenants of the following: A. All tenants shall coordinate efforts to establish or work with established disposal programs to remove and properly dispose of toxic and hazardous waste products. B. Toxic chemicals or hydrocarbon compounds such as gasoline, motor oil, C. Best Management Practices shall be used to eliminate or reduce surface pollutants 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 18 20 22 25 26 27 28 antifreeze, solvents, paints, paint thinners, wood preservatives, and other such fluids shall not be discharged into any street, public or private, or into storm drain March 24, 2005or storm water conveyance systems. Use and disposal of pesticides, fungicides, herbicides, insecticides, fertilizers and other such chemical treatments shall meet Federal, State, County and City requirements as prescribed in their respective containers. when planning any changes to the landscaping and surface improvements. 23. . All areas, including the modular structure, shall be protected by an approved automatic fire sprinkler system designed to NFPA Standard 13. CBC 904.2.1 24. An addressable Fire Alarm system designed in accordance with NFPA Standard 72 shall be provided in all areas, including the modular buildings. CBC 305.9 17 25. A KNOX Key Box(es) shaU be provided as directed by the City Fire Marshal. CFC 922.4 19 26. Type 1-Fire Rated Construction shall separate lower and upper floors of the Learning Center. CBC 303.2.2.2 21 27. Exterior Exit stairs shall comply with CBC 10063 J.I 28. The following items shall be deferred submittals: 24" a. Underground water supply works for fire sprinkler system; b. Overhead Fire Sprinkler plans; c. Fire Alarm system. Code Reminders: The project is subject to all applicable provisions of local ordinances, including but not limited to the following code requirements. 29. Approval of this request shall not excuse compliance with all applicable sections of the Zoning Ordinance and all other applicable City ordinances in effect at time of building permit issuance, except as otherwise specifically provided herein. 30. The project shall comply with the latest non-residential disabled access requirements pursuant to Title 24 of the State Building Code. 1 31. Premise identification (addresses) shall be provided consistent with Carlsbad Municipz 2 Code Section 18.04.320. 3 32. Any signs proposed for this development shall at a minimum be designed in confonnance with the City's Sign Ordinance and shall require review and approval of the Planning Director prior to installation of such signs. 7 NOTICE 8 Please take NOTICE that approval of your project includes the "imposition" of fees, 9 dedications, reservations, or other exactions hereafter collectively referred to for convenience as "fees/exactions." 11 You have 90 days from date of final approval to protest imposition of these fees/exactions. If 12 vou protest mem, you must follow the protest procedure set forth in Government Code Section 66020(a), and file the protest and any other required information with the City Manager for processing in accordance with Carlsbad Municipal Code Section 3.32.030. Failure to timely 14 follow that procedure will bar any subsequent legal action to attack, review, set aside, void, or annul their imposition. You are hereby FURTHER NOTIFIED mat your right to protest the specified fees/exactions 17 DOES NOT APPLY to water and sewer connection fees and capacity charges, nor planning zoning, grading or other similar application processing or service fees in connection with project; NOR DOES IT APPLY to any fees/exactions of which you have previously been given a NOTICE similar to this, or as to which the statute of limitations has previously otherwise 20 expired. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 •or T>i3cr» wo <&QA _7_ 1 || PASSED, APPROVED AND ADOPTED at a regular meeting of the Planning 2 3 || Commission of the City of Carlsbad, California, held on the 20th day of April 2005 by the 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 following vote, to wit:4 61! AYES: 8;; ABSENT: NOES: ABSTAIN: JEFERE N. SEGALL, Chairperson CARLSBAD PLANNING COMMISSION ATTEST: DONNEU Q „ Assistant Planning Director 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 SITE LEARNING CENTER CUP 04-12 BACKGROUND DATA SHEET CASE NO:CUP 04-12 CASE NAME: Learning Center APPLICANT: City of Carlsbad - Library REQUEST AND LOCATION: East side of Eureka Place between Basswood Avenue and Chestnut Avenue. LEGAL DESCRIPTION: Lots 9 and 10 of Optimo Tract Subdivision of Tract 2341 Thum lands. Map #1681. in the City of Carlsbad. County of San Diego. State of Calif to the map thereof No. 1805. filed at request of First National Bank of Oceanside. APN: 205-112-37 Acres: 1.14 Proposed No. of Lots/Units: N/A GENERAL PLAN AND ZONING Land Use Designation: RM Density Allowed: 4-8 du/ac Existing Zone: R-l-7.500 Density Proposed: N/A Proposed Zone: R-l Surrounding Zoning, General Plan and Land Use: General Plan Current Land Use Site North South East West R-l-7,500 R-3 R-l-7,500 R-l-7,500 OS RM RM RM RLM OS Learning Center (former Multi-family Single Family Single Family Holiday Park Girls Club facility) PUBLIC FACILITIES School District: Carlsbad Unified Water District: Carlsbad Sewer District: Carlsbad Equivalent Dwelling Units (Sewer Capacity): 9 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT Notice of Intent to Issue a Negative Declaration, dated March 24.2005 Certified Environmental Impact Report, dated Other, ; CITY OF CARLSBAD GROWTH MANAGEMENT PROGRAM LOCAL FACILITIES IMPACTS ASSESSMENT FORM (To be Submitted with Development Application) PROJECT IDENTITY AND IMPACT ASSESSMENT: FILE NAME AND NO: Learning Center CUP 04-12 LOCAL FACILITY MANAGEMENT ZONE: 1 GENERAL PLAN: RM ZONING: Rrl : DEVELOPER'S NAME: Citv of Carlsbad. Library ADDRESS: 1775 Dove Lane. Carlsbad. CA 92009 PHONE NO.: 760-602-2014 ASSESSOR'S PARCEL NO.: 205-112-37 QUANTITY OF LAND USE/DEVELOPMENT (AC., SQ. FT., DU): 1.14 ac ESTIMATED COMPLETION DATE: N/A - A. City Administrative Facilities: Demand in Square Footage: B. Library: Demand in Square Footage: C. Wastewater Treatment Capacity (Calculate with J. Sewer) D. Park: Demand in Acreage = E. Drainage: Demand in CFS = Identify Drainage Basin = (Identify master plan facilities on site plan) F. Circulation: Demand in ADT = (Identify Trip Distribution on site plan) G. Fire: Served by Fire Station No. = H. Open Space: Acreage Provided = I. Schools: (Demands to be determined by staff) J. Sewer: Demands in EDU Identify Sub Basin = (Identify trunk line(s) impacted on site plan) K. Water: Demand in GPD = 5.000 N/A N/A 1.980 GPD N/A 3.6 280 1 5.500 SF N/A IE City of Carlsbad Planning Department DISCLOSURE STATEMENT Applicant's statement or disclosure of certain ownership interests on all applications which will require discretionary action on the part of the City Council or any appointed Board. Commission or Committee. The following information MUST be disclosed at the time of application submittal. Your project cannot be reviewed until this information is completed Please print * Note ...Person is defined as "Any individual, firm, co-partnership, joint venture, association, social club, fraternal organization, corporation, estate, trust, receiver, syndicate, in this and any other county, city and county, city municipality, district or other political subdivision or any other group or combination acting as a unit" Agents may sign mis document; however, die legal name and entity of the applicant and property owner must be provided below. . 1. APPLICANT (Not the applicant's agent) Provide the CQfrypy.ETE. J.ICCAL names and addresses of A*.!, persons, having a financial interest in the application. If the applicant includes a corporation or partnership, include the names, title, addresses of all individuals owning more than 10% of the shares. IF NO INDIVIDUALS OWN MORE THAN 10% OF THE SHARES, PLEASE INDICATE NON- APPLICABLE (N/A) IN THE SPACE BELOW If a publiclv-owned corporation, include the names, titles, and addresses of the corporate officers. (A separate" page may be attached if necessary.) Corp/Part _ __ _ -rate &f4T. L\6'Y &.\t. Title Address \fJ'7S~ P^VC Lti '. Address 2. OWNER (Not the owner's agent) . Provide the rQlvypjr.ffTE. LEGAL names and addresses of ALL persons having any ownership interest in the property involved. Also, provide the nature of the legal ownership (i.e, partnership, tenants in common, non-profit, corporation, etc.). If the ownership includes a corporation or partnership, include the names, title, addresses of all individuals owning more than 10% of the shares. IF NO INDIVIDUALS OWN MORE THAN 10% OF THE SHARES, PLEASE INDICATE NON-APPLICABLE (N/A) IN THE SPACE BELOW. If a publiclv- nwned corporation, include the names, titles, and addresses of the corporate officers. (A separate page may be attached if necessary.) Title Titlc Address___^___ Address. 3. NON-PROFIT ORGANIZATION OR TRUST If ppy person identified pursuant to (1) or (2) above is a nonprofit organization or a trust list the ^ names and addresses of ANY person serving as an officer or director of the non-profit organization or as trustee or beneficiary of the. Non Profit/Trust Non Profit/Trust Title: Title_ : Address Address, 4. Have you had more than S250 worth of business transacted with any member of City staff, Boards, Commissions, Committees and/or Council within the past twelve (12) months? ( | Yes I I No If yes, please indicate person(s):_ NOTE: Attach additional sheets if necessary. I certify that all the above information is true and correct to the best ofjny^nowledge. 3/3/oyTfTISHP w*B*~ * «g^——— -— - »^v -— - ». , \jyf*fifl^ \^ ^« nj •^-m~-r*~~~ • —t , . Signature of owner/date Signatur3^fvapplicant7date ^ Print or type name of owner Print or type name of applicant Signature of owner/applicant's agent if applicable/date Print or type name of owner/applicant's agent Appendix C PRELIMINARY GEOTECHNICAL EVALUATION UPDATE PRELIMINARY GEOTECHNICAL EVALUATION UPDATE 3368 EUREKA PLACE, CARLSBAD SAN DIEGO COUNTY, CALIFORNIA FOR CARLSBAD CITY LIBRARY • 1775 DOVE LANE CARLSBAD, CALIFORNIA 92011 W.0.5016-A-SC JANUARY 3,2006 Geotechnical • Geologic • Environmental 5741 Palmer Way • Carlsbad, California 92008 • (760)438-3155 • FAX (760) 931-0915 January 3,2006 W.O.5016-A-SC Carlsbad City Library 1775 Dove Lane Carlsbad, California 92011 Attention: Ms. Cheryl Mast, Management Analyst Subject: Preliminary Geotechnical Evaluation Update, 3368 Eureka Place, Carlsbad, San Diego County, California Dear Ms. Mast: In accordance with your request, GeoSoils, Inc. (GSI) has performed a preliminary geotechnical investigation of the subject site. The purpose of the study was to evaluate the onsite soils and geologic conditions and their effects on the proposed site development from a geotechnical viewpoint. EXECUTIVE SUMMARY Based on our review of the available data (see Appendix A), field exploration, laboratory testing, and geologic and engineering analysis, the proposed additional development of the property appears to be feasible from a geotechnical viewpoint, provided the recommendations presented in the text of this report are properly incorporated into the design and construction of the project. The most significant elements of this study are summarized below: • Based on our conversation with you, it is our understanding that the proposed development will consist of an addition of a second story to the existing building and construction of a new structure (modular building), as well as a play area and retaining wall. Based on our review of the plans (Manuel Oncina Architects Inc., undated), demolition of the older existing building is also planned; and construction of a parking lot is planned for this area. • In general, the site is mantled by an artificial fill (previously placed under the observation and testing of GSI), which is directly underlain by Quaternary-age terrace deposits. The older existing building is underlain by undocumented artificial fill, including backfill, which is underlain by Quaternary-age terrace deposits. • All vegetation and/or deleterious materials should be removed from the site and property disposed of where settlement-sensitive improvements are proposed within their influence. Removals of compressible artificial fill will be necessary prior to fill placement in areas for settlement-sensitive improvements. Depths of removals are outlined in the "Earthwork Construction Recommendations" section of this report. In general, removals will be on the order of about 1 foot across the site area of proposed development and should be performed to at least 5 feet outside any proposed settlement-sensitive improvements. However, localized deeper removals cannot be precluded. Removals of undocumented artificial fill is recommended for the areas of proposed development where the existing older building is now located. These removals are estimated to be about 2 to 4 feet deep and should be performed to at least 5 feet outside any proposed settlement-sensitive improvements. However, localized deeper removals cannot be precluded. It should be noted that the Uniform Building Code/California Building Code ([UBC/CBC], International Conference of Building Officials [ICBO], 1997 and 2001) indicates that removals of unsuitable soils be performed across all areas to be graded, not just within the influence of the residential structure. Relatively deep removals may also necessitate a special zone of consideration, on perimeter/confining areas. This zone would be approximately equal to the depth of removals, if removals cannot be performed offsite. Thus, any settlement-sensitive improvements (walls, curbs, flatwork, etc.) constructed within this zone may require deepened foundations, reinforcement, etc., or will retain some potential for settlement and associated distress. This will require proper disclosure to all interested parties, should this condition exist at the conclusion of grading. • Based on site conditions and planned improvements, significant cut and/or fill slopes are not anticipated. • The expansion potential of tested onsite soils is generally very low (Expansion Index [E.I.] less than 20). However, soils with a low expansion potential may exist on the site. Conventional foundations may likely be utilized for these soil conditions; however, based on field mapping in the vicinity of the site, the presence of numerous paleoliquefaction features ("sand blows," liquefaction craters, sand filled fissures and injection dikes, sand vents, etc.), may exist within the site. Post-tension foundations will be required for soils having an E.I. of 51 or higher; or for relatively large differential fill thicknesses; or where there is the presence of paleoliquefaction features exist. Foundations for soils with a plasticity index of 15 or greater and an E.I. greater than 20 should be designed in accordance with the 1997 UBC (Section 1815 and/or 1816), and post-tension foundation recommendations may be used. • Saturated resistivity, pH, and soluble sulfate testing, performed by M.J. Schiff and Associates, Inc., indicates that the site soils are moderately corrosive to ferrous Carlsbad City Library W.O. 5016-A-SC Re:e:\wp9\5000\5016a.pgi Page TwoGeoSoils, Inc. metals, possess negligible sulfate exposure to concrete, and are neutral with regard to acidity/alkalinity. Additional comments and recommendations should be obtained from a corrosion engineer. • Regional groundwater was not observed during the field investigation and is not expected to be a major factor in development of the site. However, due to the nature of the site materials, seepage and/or perched groundwater conditions may develop throughout the site along boundaries of contrasting permeabilities (i.e., fillAerrace deposits contacts), and should be anticipated. This potential should be disclosed to all owners. Thus, more onerous slab design is warranted for mitigation of water and vapor transmission through the foundations and slabs. • Based on the available data, our evaluation indicates that the site has a very low potential for liquefaction. Therefore, no recommendations for mitigation are deemed necessary. • The seismic acceleration values and seismic design parameters provided herein should be considered and utilized by the structural/design engineer during the design of the proposed additional development. The adequacy of the existing foundations for support of an additional story should be evaluated by the structural engineer. • Our evaluation indicates there are no known active faults crossing the site. • Adverse geologic features that would preclude project feasibility were not encountered. • The recommendations presented in this report should be incorporated into the design and construction considerations of the project. The opportunity to be of service is sincerely appreciated. If you should have any questions, please do not hesitate to contact our office. Respectfully su GeoSoils, Inc. ranklin Engineering Geologist, CEG 1340 SLE/DWS/JPF/jk Distribution: (4) Addressee David W. Skelly Civil Engineer, RCE 47857 Carlsbad City Library File:e:\wp9\5000\5016a.pgi GeoSoils, Inc. W.O.5016-A-SC Page Three TABLE OF CONTENTS ^ SCOPE OF SERVICES 1 SITE CONDITIONS/PROPOSED ADDITIONAL DEVELOPMENT 1 SITE EXPLORATION 3 REGIONAL GEOLOGY 3 SITE GEOLOGIC UNITS 3 Artificial Rll (Map Symbol - A1) 3 Artificial Rll - Undocumented (Map Symbol - Afu) 5 Terrace Deposits - Lindavista Formation (Map Symbol - Qt) 5 FAULTING AND REGIONAL SEISMICITY 5 Regional Faults 5 Seismicity 7 Seismic Shaking Parameters 8 Seismic Hazards 8 GROUNDWATER 9 M LIQUEFACTION POTENTIAL 9 LABORATORY TESTING 10 General 10 Classification 10 Moisture-Density Relations 10 Laboratory Standard 11 Expansion Potential < 11 Direct Shear Test 11 Corrosion/Sulfate Testing 11 PRELIMINARY CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS 12 EARTHWORK CONSTRUCTION RECOMMENDATIONS 12 General 12 Site Preparation 12 Removals/Processing in Place (Unsuitable Surficial Materials) 12 PRELIMINARY RECOMMENDATIONS - FOUNDATIONS 13 Conventional Foundations - Very Low (E.I. 0 to 20) to Low (E.I. 21 to 50) ^ Expansion 13 ^ Foundation Design 14 Construction 14 GeoSoils, Inc. Post-Tensioned Slab Systems - Low Expansion (E.I. 21 to 50) and Plasticity >15 16 Soil Moisture Considerations 18 CORROSION 18 WALL-DESIGN PARAMETERS 18 General 18 Lateral Earth Pressures 19 Retaining Wall Backfill and Drainage 20 Wall/Retaining Wail Footing Transitions 20 UTILITIES 24 DRIVEWAY, FLATWORK, AND OTHER IMPROVEMENTS 24 DEVELOPMENT CRITERIA 26 Drainage 26 Landscape Maintenance 27 Gutters and Downspouts 27 Subsurface and Surface Water 27 Site Improvements 28 Tile Flooring 28 Additional Grading 28 Footing Trench Excavation 28 Trenching/Temporary Construction Backcuts 29 Utility Trench Backfill 29 SUMMARY OF RECOMMENDATIONS REGARDING GEOTECHNICAL OBSERVATION AND TESTING 30 OTHER DESIGN PROFESSIONALS/CONSULTANTS 31 PLAN REVIEW 31 LIMITATIONS 32 Carlsbad City Library Table of Contents Rle:e:\wp9\5000\5016agpi Page HGeoSoi Is, Inc. FIGURES: Figure 1 - Site Location Map 2 Figure 2 - Boring Location Map 4 Figure 3 - California Fault Map 6 Detail 1 - Typical Retaining Wall Backfill and Drainage Detail 21 Detail 2 - Retaining Wall Backfill and Subdrain Detail Geotextile Drain 22 Detail 3 - Retaining Wall and Subdrain Detail Clean Sand Backfill 23 ATTACHMENTS: Appendix A - References Rear of Text Appendix B - Boring Logs Rear of Text Appendix C - EQFAULT, EQSEARCH, and FRISKSP Rear of Text Appendix D - Laboratory Data Rear of Text Appendix E - General Earthwork and Grading Guidelines Rear of Text Carlsbad City Library Table of Contents Rle:e:\wp9\5000\5016a.gpi Page Hi GeoSoils, Inc. PRELIMINARY GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION 3368 EUREKA PLACE, CARLSBAD SAN DIEGO COUNTY, CALIFORNIA SCOPE OF SERVICES The scope of our services has included the following: 1. Review of the available geologic literature for the site (see Appendix A). 2. Subsurface exploration consisting of the excavation of four hand-auger borings for geotechnical logging and sampling (see Appendix B). 3. General area! seismicity evaluation (see Appendix C). 4. Appropriate laboratory testing of representative soil samples (see Appendix D). 5. Engineering and geologic analysis of data collected. 6. Preparation of this report. SITE CONDITIONS/PROPOSED ADDITIONAL DEVELOPMENT The site consists of a rectangular-shaped lot located at 3368 Eureka Place in Carlsbad, San Diego County, California (see Figure 1, Site Location Map). Two, one-story structures currently exist on the site, which are currently occupied by City of Carlsbad Head Start (child care facility). Existing improvements also include associated parking, utility improvements, play area, and landscaping. The site was previously investigated in 1993 (GeoSoils, Inc. [GSI]; 1993b, 1993c, 1993d, and 1993e). At that time, only one of the existing structures occupied the site. Later in 1993, portions of the site were graded to accommodate the construction of the second building. That building was recommended to have footings that were minimally 18 inches deep and 12 inches wide. The site is relatively flat with elevations estimated at about 95 feet Mean Sea Level (MSL). The proposed development includes an addition of a second story to the existing (newer) building and construction of a new structure (modular building), as well as a play area and retaining wall. Our review of the plans (Manuel Oncina Architects Inc., undated) indicate that demolition of the older existing building and construction of a parking lot in its place is proposed. It is assumed that the proposed development will consist of preparing the site for the construction of the new structure and associated utility and landscape improvements. Building loads are assumed to be typical for this type of relatively light construction (wood-frames, slabs-on-grade). It is anticipated that sewage disposal will tie into the municipal system. The need for import earth materials is unknown. GeoSoils, Inc. Base Map: TOPO!® ©2003 National Geographic, U.S.G.S. San Luis Rey Quadrangle, California-San Diego Co., 7.5-Minute, dated 1997, current 1999. Base Map: The Thomas Guide, San Diego Co. Street Guide and Directory, 2005 Edition, by Thomas Bros. Maps, page 1106. LOCATION AND SCALES APPROXIMATE Raprodmd wltti p«cmiasion granted by Thomas Bras. Maps. This map is copyrij^tod by Thomas Bros. Maps. It is unlawful to copy or raproduca IK or my part tharaof, wtwttwr for personal or resate. without permisston. Al rights Rasannd , Itsc.W.O. 5016-A-SC SITE LOCATION MAP Figure 1 SITE EXPLORATION Surface observations and subsurface explorations were performed on November 22,2005, by representatives of this office. A survey of line and grade for the subject lot was not conducted by this firm and should be provided by the project design engineer. Near-surface soil conditions were evaluated by four hand-auger borings within the site to evaluate soil and geologic conditions. The approximate location of each excavation is shown on the attached Boring Location Map (see Figure 2). Boring logs are presented in Appendix B. REGIONAL GEOLOGY The subject property is located within a prominent natural geomorphic province in southwestern California known as the Peninsular Ranges. It is characterized by steep, elongated mountain ranges and valleys that trend northwesterly. The mountain ranges are generally underlain by basement rocks consisting of pre-Cretaceous metasedimentary rocks, Jurassic metavolcanic rocks, and Cretaceous plutonic rocks of the southern California batholith. In the San Diego County region, deposition occurred during the Cretaceous period and Cenozoic era in the continental margin of a forearc basin. Sediments, derived from Cretaceous-age plutonic rocks and Jurassic-age volcanic rocks, were deposited into the narrow, steep, coastal plain, and continental margin of the basin. These rocks have been uplifted, eroded, and deeply incised. During early Pleistocene time, a broad coastal plain was developed from the deposition of marine terrace deposits. During mid- to late-Pleistocene time, this plain was uplifted, eroded, and incised. Alluvial deposits have since filled the lower valleys, and young marine sediments are currently being deposited/eroded within coastal and beach areas. SITE GEOLOGIC UNITS The site geologic units encountered during our subsurface investigation and site reconnaissance included undocumented artificial fill, artificial fill, and Quaternary-age terrace deposits. The earth materials are generally described below from the youngest to the oldest. Artificial nil (Map Symbol - Afi Artificial fill mantles the site in the area of proposed additional development. These materials were placed under the observation of GSI in 1993 (GSI, 1993b; 1993c; 1993d; and 1993e). These materials observed during our field investigation generally consisted of brown to orangish brown, moist to wet, silty sands. The upper 1 foot of these materials Carlsbad City Library W.0.5016-A-SC 3368 Eureka Place, Carlsbad January 3, 2006 Rte:e:\wp9\5000\50168Lpgi Page 3GeoSoils, Inc. HOLIDAY PARK i; ii I! \ \ 5 S I 2 i! i iill' m m D I n>I * » a o S § were weathered, and therefore loose, and contained numerous rootlets; accordingly, these materials are considered potentially compressible in their existing state, removal and recompaction of these materials is recommended if settlement-sensitive improvements are proposed within their influence. Our field and laboratory test results indicate that the materials below 1 foot are suitable for the support of structural fills or placement of fill materials. Artificial nil - Undocumented (Map Symbol - Afu) Undocumented artificial fill (including backfill) underlies the older existing building in the southwest portion of the site. Although these materials were not encountered in our subsurface investigation, our observations indicate these materials are generally about 2 to 4 feet thick. Inasmuch as documentation for these materials is not available, these materials are considered potentially compressible in their existing state; and removal and recompaction of these materials is recommended if settlement-sensitive improvements are proposed within their influence. Terrace Deposits - Undavlsta Formation (Map Symbol - Qt) The earth materials that were encountered underlying the site during this investigation and our previous investigation (GSI, 1993f) have been mapped as Quaternary-age terrace deposits (Tan and Kennedy, 2005). These terrace deposits have also been included as part of the Lindavista Formation (Weber, 1982). These materials underlie the artificial fill materials and consist of orangish brown, silty, sands. The materials generally were damp to moist and dense. Bedding structure was not readily observed, but regionally is typically flat lying to sub-horizontal. These sediments are typically massive to weakly bedded. FAULTING AND REGIONAL SEISMICITY Regional Faults Our review indicates that there are no known active faults crossing this site within the area proposed for development, and the site is not within an Earthquake Fault Zone (Hart and Bryant, 1997). However, the site is situated in an area of active as well as potentially active faulting. These include, but are not limited to, the San Andreas fault, the San Jacinto fault, the Elsinore fault, the Coronado Bank fault zone, and the Newport-lnglewood/Rose Canyon fault zone. The location of these, and other major faults relative to the site, are indicated on Figure 3 (California Fault Map). The possibility of ground acceleration, or shaking at the site, may be considered as approximately similar to the southern California region as a whole. Major active fault zones that may have a significant affect on the site, should they experience activity, are listed in the following table (modified from Blake, 2000a): Carlsbad City Library W.O.5016-A-SC 3368 Eureka Place. Carlsbad January 3, 2006 Ffle:e:\wp9V5000\501&Lpgi *•*»**•* Page 5GeoSoils, Inc. CALIFORNIA FAULT MAP 3366 Eureka Place 1100 1000 - - 900 -- 800 -- 700 -- 600 -- 500 -- 400 -- 300 -- 200-- 100-- 0-- -100 -400 -300 -200 -100 100 200 300 400 500 600 W.O. 5016-A-SC Figure 3 GeoSoils, Inc. >l ABBREVIATED FAULT NAME Rose Canyon Newport-lnglewood (Offshore) Coronado Bank Elsinore-Temecula Elsinore-Julian Elsinore-Glen Ivy Palos Verdes Earthquake Valley Newport-lnglewood (LA Basin) San Jatinto-Anza San Jacinto-San Jacinto Valley Chino-Central Ave. (Elsinore) APPROXIMATE DISTANCE MILES (KM) V 5.4 (8.7) 5.7(9.1) 21.4(34.4) 23.9 (38.5) 24.1 (38.8) 33.5 (53.9) 35.9 (57.7) 43.8 (70.5) 46.0 (74.0) 46.5 (74.8) 47.0 (75.6) 47.6 (76.6) Seismicitv The acceleration-attenuation relations of Bozorgnia, Campbell, and Niazi (1999), Campbell and Bozorgnia (1997), and Sadigh et al. have been incorporated into EQFAULT (Blake, 2000a). EQFAULT is a computer program developed by Thomas F. Blake (2000a), which performs deterministic seismic hazard analyses using digitized California faults as earthquake sources. The program estimates the closest distance between each fault and a given site. If a fault is found to be within a user-selected radius, the program estimates peak horizontal ground acceleration that may occur at the site from an upper bound ("maximum credible") earthquake on that fault. Site acceleration (g) is computed by one or more user-selected acceleration-attenuation relations that are contained in EQFAULT. Based on the EQFAULT program, peak horizontal ground accelerations from an upper bound event at the site may be on the order of 0.52 g to 0.72 g. The computer printouts of portions of the EQFAULT program are included within Appendix C. Historical site seismicity was evaluated with the acceleration-attenuation relations of Bozorgnia, Campbell, and Niazi (1999) and the computer program EQSEARCH (Blake, 2000b). This program performs a search of the historical earthquake records for magnitude 5.0 to 9.0 seismic events within a 100-mile radius, between the years 1800 to June 2005. Based on the selected acceleration-attenuation relationship, a peak horizontal ground acceleration is estimated, which may have effected the site during the specific event listed. Based on the available data and the attenuation relationship used, the Carlsbad City Library 3368 Eureka Place, Carlsbad File:e:\wp9\5000\5016a.pgi GeoSoils, Inc. W.O. 5016-A-SC January 3, 2006 Page 7 estimated maximum (peak) site acceleration during the period 1800 to June 2005, was 0.32 g. Site specific probability of exceeding various peak horizontal ground accelerations and a seismic recurrence curve are also estimated/generated from the historical data. Computer printouts of the EQSEARCH program are presented in Appendix C. A probabilistic seismic hazards analyses was performed using FRISKSP (Blake, 2000c), which models earthquake sources as 3-D planes and evaluates the site specific probabilities of exceedance for given peak acceleration levels or pseudo-relative velocity levels. Based on a review of this data, and considering the relative seismic activity of the southern California region, a peak horizontal ground acceleration of 0.40 g was calculated. This value was chosen as it corresponds to a 10 percent probability of exceedance in 50 years (or a 475-year return period). Computer printouts of the FRISKSP program are included in Appendix C. Seismic Shaking Parameters Based on the site conditions, Chapter 16 of the Uniform Building Code/California Building Code ([UBC/CBC], International Conference of Building Officials [ICBO], 1997 and 2001) seismic parameters are provided in the following table: iillW^l^iS™ 16 TABUE NOT ; : ": £ Seismic Zone (per Figure 16-2*) Seismic Zone Factor (per Table 16-1*) Soil Profile Type (per Table 16-J*) Seismic Coefficient C. (per Table 1 6-Q*) Seismic Coefficient Cv (per Table 1 6-R*) Near Source Factor N. (per Table 16-S*) Near Source Factor N, (per Table 16-T*) Distance to Seismic Source Seismic Source Type (per Table 16-U*) Upper Bound Earthquake (Rose Canyon) : SEISMIC PARAMETERS 4 0.40 S0 0.44N. 0.64NV 1.0 1-2 5.4 mi (8.7 km) B Mw 6.9 * Figure and Table references from Chapter 16 of the UBC (ICBO, 1997) Seismic Hazards The following list includes other seismic related hazards that have been considered during our evaluation of the site. The hazards listed are considered negligible and/or completely Carlsbad City Library 3368 Eureka Place, Carlsbad Rle:e:\wp9\5000\5016aipgi GeoSoils, Inc. W.O. 5016-A-SC January 3, 2006 mitigated as a result of site location, soil characteristics, and typical site development procedures: • Dynamic Settlement • Surface Fault Rupture • Ground Lurching or Shallow Ground Rupture • Seiche It is important to keep in perspective that in the event of a maximum probable or credible earthquake occurring on any of the nearby major faults, strong ground shaking would occur in the subject site's general area. Potential damage to any structure(s) would likely be greatest from the vibrations and impelling force caused by the inertia of a structure's mass than from those induced by the hazards considered above. This potential would be no greater than that for other existing structures, and improvements in the immediate vicinity. GROUNDWATER Subsurface water was not encountered within the property during field work performed in preparation of this report. Regional water (estimated at about sea level, or approximately 95 feet below the site) is not anticipated to adversely affect site development, provided that the recommendations contained in this report are incorporated into final design and construction. These observations reflect site conditions at the time of our investigation and do not preclude future changes in local groundwater conditions from excessive irrigation, precipitation, or that were not obvious at the time of our investigation. However, based on the permeability contrasts between any proposed fill and the terrace deposits, perched groundwater conditional may develop in the future due to excess irrigation, poor drainage or damaged utilities, and should be anticipated. Should manifestations of this perched condition (i.e., seepage) develop in the future, this office could assess the conditions and provide mitigative recommendations, as necessary. The potential for perched water to occur after development should be disclosed to all interested parties. LIQUEFACTION POTENTIAL Seismically-induced liquefaction is a phenomenon in which cyclic stresses, produced by earthquake-induced ground motion, create excess pore pressures in soils. The soils may thereby acquire a high degree of mobility, and lead to lateral movement, sliding, sand boils, consolidation and settlement of loose sediments, and other damaging deformations. This phenomenon occurs only below the water table; but after liquefaction has developed, it can propagate upward into overlying, non-saturated soil as excess pore water dissipates. Typically, liquefaction has a relatively low potential at depths greater than 45 feet and is virtually unknown below a depth of 60 feet. Carlsbad City Library W.O. 5016-A-SC 3368 Eureka Place, Carlsbad January 3, 2006 Re:e:\wp9\5000\W1&Lpgi G«0SoflS, ItlC. Liquefaction susceptibility is related to numerous factors and the following conditions should be concurrently present for liquefaction to occur: 1) sediments must be relatively young in age and not have developed a large amount of cementation; 2) sediments generally consist of medium to fine grained relatively cohesionless sands; 3) the sediments must have low relative density; 4) free groundwater must be present in the sediment; and 5) the site must experience a seismic event of a sufficient duration and magnitude, to induce straining of soil particles. The condition of liquefaction has two principal effects. One is the consolidation of loose sediments with resultant settlement of the ground surface. The other effect is lateral sliding. Significant permanent lateral movement generally occurs only when there is significant differential loading, such as fill or natural ground slopes within susceptible materials. No such loading conditions exist on the site. In the site area, we found there is a potential for seismic activity and a groundwater table deeper than 50 feet below the ground surface. However, the terrace deposits graded to dense with depth. Inasmuch as at least two of these five required concurrent conditions discussed above do not currently have the potential to affect the site, and evidence of paleoliquefaction features was not observed, and considering the recommended remedial removals, our evaluation indicates that the potential for liquefaction and associated adverse effects within the site is very low, even with a future rise in groundwater levels. The site conditions will also be improved by removal and recompaction of low density near-surface soils; and if evidence for paleoliquefaction is encountered during grading, the use of post-tension slabs would be recommended. Therefore, it is our opinion that the liquefaction potential does not constitute a significant risk to site development. LABORATORY TESTING General Laboratory tests were performed on representative samples of the onsite earth materials in order to evaluate their physical characteristics. The test procedures used and results obtained are presented below. Classification Soils were classified visually according to the Unified Soils Classification System. The soil classifications are shown on the Boring Logs in Appendix B. Moisture-Density Relations The field moisture contents and dry unit weights were determined for selected undisturbed samples in the laboratory. The dry unit weight was determined in pounds per cubic Carlsbad City Library '. W.O.5016-A-SC 3368 Eureka Place, Carlsbad January 3,2006 Rle:e:\wp9\5000\5016a.pg! Page 10 GeoSoils, Inc. foot (pcf), and the field moisture content was determined as a percentage of the dry weight. The results of these tests are shown on the Boring Logs in Appendix B. The maximum density and optimum moisture content was evaluated for the major soil type encountered in the excavations. The laboratory standard used was ASTM D-1557. The moisture-density relationships obtained for these soils are shown on the following table: LOCATION AND S DEPTH (FEET) B-2@0-2 i > - i -1 L SOIL-TYPE , Silty Sand, Orangish Brown MAXIMUM DENSITYr- <pcF) ^ i_- ,' 130.0 OPTIMUM MOISTURE CONTENT {%) 10.0 Expansion Potential Expansion testing was performed on a representative sample of site soil in accordance with the 1997 UBC Standard 18-2. The results of expansion testing are presented in the following table. LOCATION AND DEPTH (FEET)EXPANSION POTENTIAL B-2@0-2 Very Low Direct Shear Test Shear testing was performed on a representative, remolded sample of site soil in general accordance with ASTM test method D-3080 in a Direct Shear Machine of the strain control type. The shear test results are presented as follows: LOCATION AND k DEPTH (FEET) B-2 @ 0-2 PRIMARY" -| i "- 4_ v 4 s u \ COHESION 471 FRICTION ANGLE (DEGREES) 31 RESIDUAL COHESION (PSF) , 283 FRICTION ANGLE (DEGREES) 31 Corrosion/Sulfate Testing GSI conducted sampling of onsite materials for soil corrosivity on the subject project. Laboratory test results were completed by M.J. Schiff & Associates (consulting corrosion Carlsbad City Library 3368 Eureka Place, Carlsbad File:e:\wp9\5000\5016a.pgi GeoSoils, Inc. W.O.5016-A-SC January 3,2006 Page 11 engineers). The testing included evaluation of pH, soluble sulfates, and saturated resistivity. Test results indicate that the soil presents a negligible sulfate exposure to concrete, in accordance with Table 19-A-4 of the UBC (ICBO, 1997), and is moderately corrosive to ferrous metals based on saturated resistivity. Site soils are considered to be neutral, with respect fo acidity/alkalinity. A corrosion specialist should be consulted for the appropriate mitigation recommendations, as needed. Test results are presented in Appendix D. PRELIMINARY CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS Based upon our site reconnaissance, subsurface exploration, and laboratory test results, it is our opinion that the subject site appears suitable for the proposed additional development, from a geotechnical viewpoint. The following recommendations should be incorporated into the construction details. EARTHWORK CONSTRUCTION RECOMMENDATIONS General All grading should conform to the guidelines presented in Appendix Chapter A33 of the UBC (ICBO, 1997), the requirements of the City, and the General Earthwork and Grading Guidelines presented in Appendix E, except where specifically superceded in the text of this report. Prior to grading, a GSI representative should be present at the preconstruction meeting to provide additional grading guidelines, if needed, and review the earthwork schedule. During earthwork construction, all site preparation and the general grading procedures of the contractor should be observed and the fill selectively tested by a representative^) of GSI. If unusual or unexpected conditions are exposed in the field, they should be reviewed by this office and, if warranted, modified and/or additional recommendations will be offered. All applicable requirements of local and national construction and general industry safety orders, the Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA), and the Construction Safety Act should be met. Site Preparation Debris, vegetation, and all deleterious material should be removed from the building area prior to the start of construction. Removals/Processing in Place (Unsuitable Surficial Materials) Due to the weathered and relatively loose condition of the upper 1 foot of the artificial fill, these materials should be removed and recompacted to 90 percent of the laboratory Carlsbad City Library W.O. 5016-A-SC 3368 Eureka Place, Carlsbad January 3, 2006 Rle:e:\wp9WOm5016a.pgi G«OSoHS, lltC. Page 12 standard in areas proposed for settlement-sensitive improvements. If these materials have a high moisture content (75 percent or higher saturation), they should be allowed to aerate until near optimum moisture is reached. In general, the removal of unsuitable bearing materials will be about 1 foot However, deeper removals cannot be precluded. Removals should be performed to at least 5 feet outside any proposed settlement-sensitive improvements, or per the UBC/CBC (ICBO, 1997 and 2001), whichever is more onerous. Due to the potentially compressible state of the undocumented artificial fill, these materials should be removed (to competent terrace deposits) and recompacted to 90 percent of the laboratory standard in areas proposed for settlement-sensitive structures. The estimated depth of these removals is about 2 to 4 feet, but deeper removals cannot be precluded. Removals should be performed to at least 5 feet outside any proposed settlement-sensitive improvements, or per the UBC/CBC (ICBO, 1997 and 2001), whichever is more onerous. PRELIMINARY RECOMMENDATIONS - FOUNDATIONS The foundation design and construction recommendations are based on laboratory testing and engineering analysis of onsite earth materials by GSI. Recommendations for foundation systems are provided in the following sections. The foundation systems may be used to support the proposed structure, provided they are founded in competent bearing material. The proposed foundation systems should be designed and constructed in accordance with the guidelines contained in the UBC (ICBO, 1997). The suitability of the existing foundations for support of an additional story should be evaluated by the structural engineer. The following foundation construction recommendations are presented as a minimum criteria from a soils engineering viewpoint. The onsite soils expansion potentials are generally in the very low (E.I. 0 to 20) range. Soil in the low (E.I. 21 to 50) range may also be present onsite, and foundations underlain by these soils should be designed in accordance with the 1997 UBC, Section 1815 and/or 1816 and CBC (ICBO, 2001). Conventional Foundations - Very Low (E.1.0 to 20) to Low (E.I. 21 to 50) Expansion The following foundation construction recommendations assume that the soils in the top 7 feet from finish grade will have a very low expansion potential to low expansion potential (and plasticity less than 15). Recommendations by the project's design-structural engineer or architect, which may exceed the soils engineer's recommendations, should take precedence over the following minimum requirements. Final foundation design will be provided based on the expansion potential of the near surface soils encountered during grading. Carlsbad City Library W.0.5016-A-SC 3368 Eureka Place, Carlsbad January 3,2006 Rle:e:\wp9\5000V5016a.pgi G«0S0ilj IfiC. Page 13 Foundation Design 1. Conventional spread and continuous footings may be used to support the proposed residential structure, provided they are founded entirely in properly compacted fill or other competent bearing material. 2. An allowable bearing value of 2,000 pounds per square foot (psf) may be used for design of footings which maintain a minimum width of 12 inches (continuous) and 24 inches square (isolated), and a minimum depth of at least 12 inches into the properly compacted fill. The bearing value may be increased by one-third for seismic or other temporary loads. This value may be increased by 20 percent for each additional 12 inches in depth to a maximum of 2,500 psf. No increase in bearing value for increased footing width is recommended. 3. For lateral sliding resistance, a 0.35 coefficient of friction may be utilized for a concrete to soil contact when multiplied by the dead load. 4. Passive earth pressure may be computed as an equivalent fluid having a density of 250 pounds per cubic foot (pcf) with a maximum earth pressure of 2,500 psf. 5. When combining passive pressure and frictional resistance, the passive pressure component should be reduced by one-third. 6. All footings should maintain a minimum 7 foot horizontal distance between the base of the footing and any adjacent descending slope, and minimally comply with the guidelines depicted on Rgure No. 18-1-1 of the UBC (ICBO, 1997). Construction 1. Conventional continuous footings should be founded at a minimum depth of 12 inches below the lowest adjacent ground surface for one-story floor loads and 18 inches below the lowest adjacent ground surface for two-story floor loads. Interior footings may be founded at a depth of 12 inches below the lowest adjacent ground surface. Footings for one-story floor loads should have a minimum width of 12 inches, and footings for two-story floor loads should have a minimum width of 15 inches. All footings should have two No. 4 reinforcing bars placed at the top and two No. 4 reinforcing bars placed at the bottom of the footing. Isolated interior or exterior piers and columns should be founded at a minimum depth of 24 inches below the lowest adjacent ground surface. If low expansive soils are present within the top 7 feet, these elements should be tied together with a grade beam. Carlsbad City Library W.0.5016-A-SC 3368 Eureka Place, Carlsbad January 3,2006 Re:e:\wpg\j5ooa£Oi&Lpgi Page 14GeoSoils, Inc. 2. A grade beam, reinforced as above and at least 12 inches square, should be provided across any garage or large entrances. The base of the reinforced grade beam should be at the same elevation as the adjoining footings. 3. Concrete slabs should be underlain with a vapor barrier consisting of a minimum of 15-mil, polyvinyl-chloride membrane with all laps sealed. This membrane should be covered with 2 inches of sand to aid in uniform curing of the concrete and mitigate puncturing of the vapor barrier. The vapor barrier should be underlain with 4 inches of pea gravel. Sand used for slab underiayment should have a minimum sand equivalent (S.E.) of 30. 4. Concrete slabs should be a minimum of 5 inches thick, and minimally reinforced with No. 3 reinforcement bars placed on .18-inch centers, in two horizontally perpendicular directions (i.e., long axis and short axis). All slab reinforcement should be supported to provide proper mid-slab height positioning during placement of the concrete. "Hooking" of reinforcement is not an acceptable method of positioning. 5. Large slabs should be poured separately from the footings and be quartered with expansion joints or saw cuts. A positive separation from the footings should be maintained with expansion joint material to permit relative movement. 6. The concrete slabs should have an actual, minimum thickness of 4 inches, and the slab subgrade should be free of loose and uncompacted material prior to placing concrete. 7. Presaturation is not necessary for these soil conditions; however, the moisture content of the subgrade soils should be equal to or greater than optimum moisture to a depth of 12 inches below the adjacent ground grade in the slab areas, and verified by this office within 72 hours of the vapor barrier placement. 8. As an alternative, an engineered post-tension foundation system may be used. 9. Soils generated from footing excavations to be used onsite should be compacted to a minimum relative compaction 90 percent of the laboratory standard, whether it is to be placed inside the foundation perimeter or in the yard/right-of-way areas. This material must not alter positive drainage patterns that direct drainage away from the structural areas and toward the street. 10. The designers for any proposed subsurface structures or any other appurtenant structures should consider that excavation difficulties could be encountered in bedrock or rock fill blankets at depths greater than approximately 3 to 5 feet below proposed building pad grades. Carlsbad City Library W.O. 5016-A-SC 3368 Eureka Place, Carlsbad January 3,2006 Rle:e:\wp9\5000\5016a.pgi Page 15GeoSoils, Inc. 11. Foundations near the top of slope should be deepened to conform to the latest edition of the UBC (ICBO, 1997) and provide a minimum of 7 feet horizontal distance from the slope face. Rigid block wall designs located along the top of slope should be reviewed by a soils engineer. Post-Tensloned Slab Systems - Low Expansion (E.1.21 to 50V and Plasticity >15 This section of foundation design should be applied to soils having an E.I. of 51 or greater, and may be used for low expansion soils with a plasticity index of 15 or greater and an E.I. of 21 to 50. Recommendations for using post-tensioned systems for very low expansive soils is also presented, as an option. The recommendations presented below should be followed in addition to those contained in the previous sections, as appropriate. The information and recommendations presented below in this section are not meant to supercede design by a registered structural engineer or civil engineer familiar with post-tensioned slab design. Post-tensioned slabs should be designed using sound engineering practice and be in accordance with local and/or national code requirements. Upon request, GSI can provide additional data/consultation regarding soil parameters as related to post-tensioned slab design. From a soil expansion/shrinkage standpoint, a common contributing factor to distress of structures using post-tensioned slabs is fluctuation of moisture in soils underlying the perimeter of the slab, compared to the center, causing a "dishing" or "arching" of the slabs. To mitigate this possibility, a combination of soil presaturation and construction of a perimeter "cut-off wall should be employed. Perimeter cut-off walls should be a minimum of 12 inches deep for low or 18 inches deep for medium expansive soils. The cut-off walls may be integrated into the slab design or independent of the slab and should be a minimum of 6 inches thick. The 15-mil thick vapor barrier should be covered with a 2-inch layer of sand to aid in uniform curing of the concrete; and it should be adequately sealed to provide a continuous water-proof barrier under the entire slab. A minimum 4 inches of pea gravel should be placed below the visqueen. Specific soil presaturation is not required; however, the moisture content of the subgrade soils should be equal to, or greater than, the soils' optimum moisture content to a depth of 12 inches below grade, for very low to low expansive soils. Post-tensioned slabs should have sufficient stiffness to resist excessive bending due to non-uniform swell and shrinkage of subgrade soils. The differential movement can occur at the comer, edge, or center of slab. The potential for differential uplift can be evaluated using the 1997 UBC, Section 1816, based on design specifications of the Post-Tensioning Institute. The following table presents suggested minimum coefficients to be used in the Post-Tensioning Institute design method. Carlsbad City Library W.0.5016-A-SC 3368 Eureka Place, Carlsbad January 3,2006 FHe:e:\wp9\5000\5016apgi Page 16GeoSoils, Inc. Thomthwalte Moisture Index Correction Factor for Irrigation Depth to Constant Soil Suction Constant soil Suction (pf) Modulus of Subgrade Reaction (pti) Moisture Velocity -20 inches/year 20 inches/year 7 feet 3.6 75 0.7 inches/month The coefficients are considered minimums and may not be adequate to represent worst case conditions such as adverse drainage and/or improper landscaping and maintenance. The above parameters are applicable provided structures have positive drainage that is maintained away from structures. Therefore, it is important that information regarding drainage, site maintenance, settlements, and effects of expansive soils be passed on to future owners. Based on the above parameters, the following values were obtained from figures or tables of the 1997 UBC, Section 1816. The values may not be appropriate to account for possible differential settlement of the slab due to other factors. If a stiffer slab is desired, higher values of y™ may be recommended. ' V.' E.I.)OFSOIL SUBGRADE (per the UBC) em center lift em edge lift ym center lift ym edge lift VERYSLOW % " EXPANSION ' POTENTIAL " (E.I. * b-2t>r ^ 5.0 feet 2.5 feet 1.0 inch 0.3 inch * LOW EXPANSION POTENTIAL (E.1. 21-50) 5.0 feet 3.5 feet 1.7 inches 0.75 inch MEDIUM - EXPANSION POTENTIAL (E.I. =>l-«0) 5.5 feet 4.0 feet 2.7 inches 0.75 inch Deepened footings/edges around the slab perimeter must be used to minimize non-uniform surface moisture migration (from an outside source) beneath the slab. An edge depth of 12 inches should be considered a minimum. The bottom of the deepened footing/edge should be designed to resist tension, using cable or reinforcement per the structural engineer. Other applicable recommendations presented under conventional foundation methods should be adhered to during the design and construction phase of the project. Carlsbad City Library 3368 Eureka Place, Carlsbad Re:e:\wp9\5000\5016a.pgi GeoSoils, Inc. W.0.5016-A-SC January 3, 2006 Page 17 Soil Moisture Considerations Foundation systems and slabs shall not allow water or water vapor to enter into the structure so as to cause damage to another building component or to limit the installation of the type of flooring materials typically used for the particular application (California Civil Code). Therefore, the following should be considered by the structural engineer/foundation/slab designer to mitigate the transmission of water or water vapor through the slab: • Concrete slabs should be a minimum of 5 inches thick. • Concrete slab underiayment should consist of 2 inches of sand (S.E. j>30), underlain by a 15-mil vapor barrier (visqueen or equivalent), with all laps sealed per the UBC/CBC (ICBO, 1997 and 2001), which is, in turn, underlain by 2 inches of sand (S.E. j>30) placed upon a suitable slab subgrade. Per Table 19-A-2 of the UBC/CBC (ICBO, 1997 and 2001), concrete ("intended to have a low permeability when exposed to water") should have a maximum water/cement ratio of 0.50, and a minimum strength of 4,000 psi. • Slabs should be additionally sealed with a suitable slab sealant. • Additional recommendations regarding water or vapor transmission should be provided by the structural engineer/slab or foundation designer. Please be aware that the above are not a geotechnical requirement but should be implemented if the transmission of water or water vapor through the slab is undesirable. Should these recommendations not be implemented, then full disclosure of the potential for water or vapor to pass through the foundations and slabs and resultant distress should be provided to the interested parties, in writing. CORROSION Upon completion of grading, additional testing of soils (including import materials) for corrosion to concrete and metals should be performed prior to the construction of utilities and foundations. WALL DESIGN PARAMETERS General The design parameters provided below assume that either non expansive soils (typically Class 2 permeable filter material or Class 3 aggregate base) or very low expansive native Carlsbad City Library W.O.5016-A-SC 3368 Eureka Place, Carlsbad January 3,2006 Rte:e:\wp9WXA5016a4«i , JffC. Pag818 onsite materials (up to and including an E.I. of 20) are used to backfill any retaining walls. The type of backfill (i.e., select or native), should be specified by the wall designer, and clearly shown on the plans. Building walls, below grade, should be water-proofed. The foundation system for the proposed retaining walls should be designed in accordance with the recommendations presented in this and preceding sections of this report, as appropriate. Footings should be embedded a minimum of 18 inches below adjacent grade (excluding landscape layer, 6 inches) and should be 24 inches in width. There should be no increase in bearing for footing width. Recommendations for specialty walls (i.e., crib, earthstone, geogrid, etc.) can be provided upon request, and would be based on site specific conditions. Lateral Earth Pressures The recommended lateral earth pressures for the site soils and level backfill are as follows: " EQUIVALENT FLUID WEIGHT*. (PCF) ' > t CONDITIONS "" , Active At Rest Passive LEVEL** 45 65 200 * These equivalent fluid weights do not include other superimposed loading conditions due to traffic, structures, seismic events or adverse geologic conditions. When wall configurations are finalized, the appropriate loading conditions for superimposed loads can be provided upon request ** Level backfill behind a retaining wall is defined as compacted earth materials, properly drained, without a slope for a distance of 2H behind the wall. To design an unrestrained wall, such as a cantilever wall, the active earth pressure may be used. For a restrained wall (a wall that is not free to rotate greater than 0.002 times the wall height), the at-rest pressure should be used. Passive pressure is used to compute lateral soils resistance developed against lateral structural movement. Further, for sliding resistance, the friction coefficient of 0.35 may be used at the concrete and soil interface. In combining the total lateral resistance, the passive pressure or the frictional resistance should be reduced by 50 percent. The total depth of retained earth for design of cantilever walls should be the vertical distance below the ground surface measured at the wall face for stem design or measured at the heel of the footing for overturning and sliding. Wall footings should be designed in accordance with structural considerations. The passive resistance value may be increased by one-third when considering loads of short duration including wind or seismic loads. The horizontal distance between foundation elements providing passive resistance should be a minimum of three times the depth of the elements to allow full development of these passive pressures. Carlsbad City Library W.0.5016-A-SC 3368 Eureka Place, Carlsbad January 3,2006 GeoSoils, Inc. Page19 Retaining Wall Backfill and Drainage Positive drainage must be provided behind all retaining walls in the form of perforated pipe encased in gravel that is wrapped in geofabric and outlets. A backdrain system is considered necessary for retaining walls that are 2 feet or greater in height. Details 1,2, and 3, present the back drainage options discussed below. Backdrains should consist of a 4-inch diameter perforated PVC or ABS pipe encased in either Class 2 permeable filter material or Vz-inch to %-inch gravel wrapped in approved filter fabric (Mirafi 140 or equivalent). Drain outlets should not be more than 100 feet apart with a minimum of two outlets per wall. For low expansive backfill, the filter material should extend a minimum of 1 horizontal foot behind the base of the walls and upward at least 1 foot. For native backfill that has up to medium expansion potential, continuous Class 2 permeable drain materials should be used behind the wall. This material should be continuous (i.e., full height) behind the wall, and it should be constructed in accordance with the enclosed Detail 1 (Typical Retaining Wall Backfill arid Drainage Detail). For limited access and confined areas, (panel) drainage behind the wall may be constructed in accordance with Detail 2 (Retaining Wall Backfill and Subdrain Detail Geotextile Drain). Materials with an E.I. potential of greater than 65 should not be used as backfill for retaining walls. For more onerous expansive situations, backfill and drainage behind the retaining wall should conform with Detail 3 (Retaining Wall And Subdrain Detail Clean Sand Backfill). Due to below grade conditions sump pumps appear to be necessary at this time to outlet the collected water. Sump pumps should be devised by the project design engineer to not locally saturated the underlying soils. The use of weep holes, only, in walls higher than 2 feet, is not recommended. The surface of the backfill should be sealed by pavement, slabs, or the top 18 inches compacted with native soil (E.I. <90). Proper surface drainage should also be provided. For additional mitigation, consideration should be given to applying a water-proof membrane to the back of all retaining structures. The use of a waterstop should be considered for all concrete and masonry joints. Wall/Retaining Wall Footing Transitions Site walls are anticipated to be founded on footings designed in accordance with the recommendations in this report. Should wall footings transition from cut to fill, the civil designer may specify either: a) A minimum of a 2-foot overexcavation and recompaction of -cut materials for a distance of 2H, from the point of transition. b) Increase of the amount of reinforcing steel and wall detailing (i.e., expansion joints or crack control joints) such that a angular distortion of 1/360 for a distance of 2H on either side of the transition may be accommodated. Expansion joints should be placed no greater than 20 feet on-center, in accordance with the structural Carlsbad City Library W.0.5016-A-SC 3368 Eureka Place, Carlsbad January 3,2006 FUe:e:\wp9\5000\5016a.pgi Page 20 GeoSoils, Inc. DETAILS N . T . S . Provide Surface Drainage ©Waterproofing Membrane (optional) Weep Hole Finished Surface t or Flatter CD WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE (optional): Liquid boot or approved equivalent. ® ROCK: 3/4 to 1-1/2" (inches) rock. <D FILTER FABRIC: Mirafi 140N or approved equivalent; place fabric flap behind core. ® PIPE: 4" (inches) diameter perforated PVC. schedule 40 or approved alternative with minimum of 1% gradient to proper outlet point (Perforations down). ® WEEP HOLE: Minimum 2" (inches) diameter placed at 20' (feet) on centers along the wall, and 3" (inches) above finished surface (No weep holes for basement walls.). TYPICAL RETAINING WALL BACKFILL AND DRAINAGE DETAIL DETAIL 1 Geotechnical • Coastal • Geologic • Environmental DETAILS Provide Surface Drainage (Dwaterproofing Membrane (optional) Weep Hole Finished Surface (D WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE (optional): Liquid boot or approved equivalent. d> DRAIN: Miradrain 6000 or J-drain 200 or equivalent for non-waterproofed walls. Miradrain 6200 or J-drain 200 or equivalent for waterproofed walls (All Perforations down). <D FILTER FABRIC: Mirafi 140N or approved equivalent; place fabric flap behind core. <D PIPE: 4" (inches) diameter perforated PVC. schedule 40 or approved alternative with minimum of 1% gradient to proper outlet point. ® WEEP HOLE: Minimum 2" (inches) diameter placed at 20' (feet) on centers along the wall, and 3" (inches) above finished surface. (No weep holes for basement walls.) RETAINING WALL BACKFILL AND SUBDRAIN DETAIL GEOTEXTILE DRAIN DETAIL 2 Geotechnical • Coastal • Geologic • Environmental DETAILS N . T . S . Provide Surface Drainage Clean Sand Backfill ® WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE (optional): Liquid boot or approved equivalent. ® CLEAN SAND BACKFILL: Must have sand equivalent value of 30 or greater; can be densified by water jetting. <D FILTER FABRIC: Mirafi 140N or approved equivalent. © ROCK: 1 cubic foot per linear feet of pipe or 3/4 to 1-1/2" (inches) rock. © PIPE: 4" (inches) diameter perforated PVC. schedule 40 or approved alternative with minimum of 1% gradient to proper outlet point (Perforations down). © WEEP HOLE: Minimum 2" (inches) diameter placed at 20' (feet) on centers along the wall, and 3" (inches) above finished surface. (No weep holes for basement walls.) RETAINING WALL AND SUBDRAIN DETAIL CLEAN SAND BACKFILL DETAIL 3 Geotechnical • Coastal • Geologic • Environmental engineer's/wall designer's recommendations, regardless of whether or not transition conditions exist. Expansion joints should be sealed with a flexible, non-shrink grout. M c) Embed the footings entirely into native terrace deposits (i.e., deepened footings). If transitions from cut to fill transect the wall footing alignment at an angle of less than 45 degrees (plan view), then the designer should follow recommendation "a" (above) and until such transition is between 45 and 90 degrees to the wall alignment. UTILITIES Utilities should be enclosed within a closed utilidor (vault) or designed with flexible connections to accommodate differential settlement and expansive soil conditions. Due to the potential for differential settlement, air conditioning (A/C) units should be supported by slabs that are incorporated into the building foundation or constructed on a rigid slab with flexible couplings for plumbing and electrical lines. A/C waste wateriines should be drained to a suitable outlet. DRIVEWAY. FLATWORK. AND OTHER IMPROVEMENTS The soil materials on site may be expansive. The effects of expansive soils are cumulative, and typically occur over the lifetime of any improvements. On relatively level areas, when the soils are allowed to dry, the dessication and swelling process tends to cause heaving and distress to flatwork and other improvements. The resulting potential for distress to improvements may be reduced, but not totally eliminated. To that end, it is recommended that the developer should notify any homeowners or homeowners association of this long-term potential for distress. To reduce the likelihood of distress, the following recommendations are presented for all exterior flatwork: 1. The subgrade area for concrete slabs should be compacted to achieve a minimum 90 percent relative compaction, and then be presoaked to 2 to 3 percentage points above (or 125 percent of) the soils' optimum moisture content, to a depth of 18 inches below subgrade elevation. If very low expansive soils are present, only optimum moisture content, or greater, is required and specific presoaking is not warranted. The moisture content of the subgrade should be proof tested within 72 hours prior to pouring concrete. 2. Concrete slabs should be cast over a non-yielding surface, consisting of a 4-inch layer of crushed rock, gravel, or clean sand, that should be compacted and level prior to pouring concrete. If very low expansive soils are present, the rock or gravel or sand may be deleted. The layer or subgrade should be wet-down completely prior to pouring concrete, to minimize loss of concrete moisture to the surrounding earth materials. Carlsbad City Library W.O.5016-A-SC 3368 Eureka Place, Carlsbad January 3, 2006 Re:e:\wp9WXXA5016a4jgi GeoSOflS, IttC. Page 24 3. Exterior slabs should be a minimum of 4 inches thick. Driveway slabs and approaches should additionally have a thickened edge (12 inches) adjacent to all landscape areas, to help impede infiltration of landscape water under the slab. 4. The use of transverse and longitudinal control joints are recommended to help control slab cracking due to concrete shrinkage or expansion. Two ways to mitigate such cracking are: a) add a sufficient amount of reinforcing steel, increasing tensile strength of the slab; and, b) provide an adequate amount of control and/or expansion joints to accommodate anticipated concrete shrinkage and expansion. 5. In order to reduce the potential for unsightly cracks, slabs should be reinforced at mid-height with a minimum of No. 3 bars placed at 18 inches on center, in each direction. If subgrade soils within the top 7 feet from finish grade are very low expansive soils (Le., E.I. £20), then 6x6-W1.4xW1.4 welded-wire mesh may be substituted for the rebar, provided the reinforcement is placed on chairs, at slab mid-height. The exterior slabs should be scored or saw cut, Vz to % inches deep, often enough so that no section is greater than 10 feet by 10 feet. For sidewalks or narrow slabs, control joints should be provided at intervals of every 6 feet. The slabs should be separated from the foundations and sidewalks with expansion joint filler material. 6. No traffic should be allowed upon the newly poured concrete slabs until they have been property cured to within 75 percent of design strength. Concrete compression strength should be a minimum of 2,500 psi. 7. Driveways, sidewalks, and patio slabs adjacent to the house should be separated from the house with thick expansion joint filler material. In areas directly adjacent to a continuous source of moisture (i.e., irrigation, planters, etc.), all joints should be additionally sealed with flexible mastic. 8. Planters and walls should not be tied to the house. 9. Overhang structures should be supported on the slabs, or structurally designed with continuous footings tied in at least two directions. If very low expansion soils . are present, footings need only be tied in one direction. 10. Any masonry landscape walls that are to be constructed throughout the property should be grouted and articulated in segments no more than 20 feet long. These segments should be keyed or doweled together. 11. Utilities should be enclosed within a closed utilidor (vault) or designed with flexible connections to accommodate differential settlement and expansive soil conditions. Carlsbad City Library W.O. 5016-A-SC 3368 Eureka Place, Carlsbad January 3,2006 Rle:e:\wp9\5000\50168Lpgi Page 25GeoSofls, Inc. 12. Positive site drainage should be maintained at all times. Finish grade on the lots should provide a minimum of 1 to 2 percent fall to the street, as indicated herein. It should be kept in mind that drainage reversals could occur, including post-construction settlement, if relatively flat yard drainage gradients are not periodically maintained by the homeowner or homeowners association. 13. Air conditioning (A/C) units should be supported by slabs that are incorporated into the building foundation or constructed on a rigid slab with flexible couplings for plumbing and electrical lines. A/C waste water lines should be drained to a suitable non-erosive outlet. 14. Shrinkage cracks could become excessive if proper finishing and curing practices are not followed. Finishing and curing practices should be performed per the Portland Cement Association Guidelines. Mix design should incorporate rate of curing for climate and time of year, sulfate content of soils, corrosion potential of soils, and fertilizers used on site. DEVELOPMENT CRITERIA Drainage Adequate lot surface drainage is a very important factor in reducing the likelihood of adverse performance of foundations, hardscape, and slopes. Surface drainage should be sufficientto prevent ponding of water anywhere on a lot, and especially near structures and tops of slopes. Lot surface drainage should be carefully taken into consideration during fine grading, landscaping, and building construction. Therefore, care should be taken that future landscaping or construction activities do not create adverse drainage conditions. Positive site drainage within lots and common areas should be provided and maintained at all times. Drainage should not flow uncontrolled down any descending slope. Water should be directed away from foundations and not allowed to pond and/or seep into the ground. In general, the area within 5 feet around a structure should slope away from the structure. We recommend that unpaved lawn and landscape areas have a minimum gradient of 1 percent sloping away from structures, and whenever possible, should be above adjacent paved areas. Consideration should be given to avoiding construction of planters adjacent to structures (buildings, pools, spas, etc.). Pad drainage should be directed toward the street or other approved area(s). Although not a geotechnical requirement, roof gutters, down spouts, or other appropriate means may be utilized to control roof drainage. Down spouts, or drainage devices should outlet a minimum of 5 feet from structures or into a subsurface drainage system. Areas of seepage may develop due to irrigation or heavy rainfall, and should be anticipated. Minimizing irrigation will lessen this potential. If areas of seepage develop, recommendations for minimizing this effect could be provided upon request. Carlsbad City Library W.0.5016-A-SC 3368 Eureka Place, Carlsbad January 3, 2006 Rle:e:\wp9\5000\5016a4jgi Page 26GeoSoils, Inc. Landscape Maintenance Only the amount of irrigation necessary to sustain plant life should be provided. Over-watering the landscape areas will adversely affect proposed site improvements. We would recommend that any proposed open-bottom planters adjacent to proposed structures be eliminated for a minimum distance of 10 feet. As an alternative, closed-bottom type planters could be utilized. An outlet placed in the bottom of the planter, could be installed to direct drainage away from structures or any exterior concrete flatwork. If planters are constructed adjacent to structures, the sides and bottom of the planter should be provided with a moisture barrier to prevent penetration of irrigation water into the subgrade. Provisions should be made to drain the excess irrigation water from the planters without saturating the subgrade below or adjacent to the planters. Graded slope areas should be planted with drought resistant vegetation. Consideration should be given to the type of vegetation chosen and their potential effect upon surface improvements (i.e., some trees will have an effect on concrete flatwork with their extensive root systems). From a geotechnical standpoint leaching is not recommended for establishing landscaping. If the surface soils are processed for the purpose of adding amendments, they should be recompacted to 90 percent minimum relative compaction. Gutters and Downspouts As previously discussed in the drainage section, the installation of gutters and downspouts should be considered to collect roof water that may otherwise infiltrate the soils adjacent to the structures. If utilized, the downspouts should be drained into PVC collector pipes or other non-erosive devices (e.g., paved swales or ditches; below grade, solid tight-lined PVC pipes; etc.), that will carry the water away from the house, to an appropriate outlet, in accordance with the recommendations of the design civil engineer. Downspouts and gutters are not a requirement; however, from a geotechnical viewpoint, provided that positive drainage is incorporated into project design (as discussed previously). Subsurface and Surface Water Subsurface and surface water are not anticipated to affect site development, provided that the recommendations contained in this report are incorporated into final design and construction and that prudent surface and subsurface drainage practices are incorporated into the construction plans. Perched groundwater conditions along zones of contrasting permeabilities may not be precluded from occurring in the future due to site irrigation, poor drainage conditions, or damaged Utilities, and should be anticipated. Should perched groundwater conditions develop, this office could assess the affected area(s) and provide the appropriate recommendations to mitigate the observed groundwater conditions. Groundwater conditions may change with the introduction of irrigation, rainfall, or other factors. Carlsbad City Library W.O.5016-A-SC 3368 Eureka Place, Carlsbad January 3, 2006 Rle:e:\wp9\5000\5016a.pgi Page 27GeoSoils, Inc. Site Improvements If in the future, any additional improvements (e.g., pools, spas, etc.) are planned for the site, recommendations concerning the geological or geotechnical aspects of design and construction of said improvements could be provided upon request Pools and/or spas should not be constructed without specific design and construction recommendations from GSI, and this construction recommendation should be provided to the homeowners, any homeowners association, and/or other interested parties. This office should be notified in advance of any fill placement, grading of the site, or trench backfilling after rough grading has been completed. This includes any grading, utility trench and retaining wall backfills, flatwork, etc. Tile Flooring Tile flooring can crack, reflecting cracks in the concrete slab below the tile, although small cracks in a conventional slab may not be significant. Therefore, the designer should consider additional steel reinforcement for concrete slabs-on-grade where tile will be placed. The tile installer should consider installation methods that reduce possible cracking of the tile such as slipsheets. Slipsheets or a vinyl crack isolation membrane (approved by the Tile Council of America/Ceramic Tile Institute) are recommended between tile and concrete slabs on grade. Additional Grading This office should be notified in advance of any fill placement, supplemental regrading of the site, or trench backfilling after rough grading has been completed. This includes completion of grading in the street, driveway approaches, driveways, parking areas, and utility trench and retaining wall backfills. Footing Trench Excavation All footing excavations should be observed by a representative of this firm subsequent to trenching and prior to concrete form and reinforcement placement. The purpose of the observations is to evaluate that the excavations have been made into the recommended bearing material and to the minimum widths and depths recommended for construction. If loose or compressible materials are exposed within the footing excavation, a deeper footing or removal and recompaction of the subgrade materials would be recommended at that time. Footing trench spoil and any excess soils generated from utility trench excavations should be compacted to a minimum relative compaction of 90 percent, if not removed from the site. Carlsbad City Library W.0.5016-A-SC 3368 Eureka Place, Carlsbad January 3,2006 FBe:e:\wp9\5000\5016a4>gi Page 28CeoSoils, Inc. Trenching/Temporary Construction Backcuts Considering the nature of the onsite earth materials, it should be anticipated that caving or sloughing could be a factor in subsurface excavations and trenching. Shoring or excavating the trench walls/backcuts at the angle of repose (typically 25 to 45 degrees [except as specifically superceded within the text of this report]), should be anticipated. All excavations should be observed by an engineering geologist or soil engineer from GSI, prior to workers entering the excavation or trench, and minimally conform to CAL-OSHA, state, and local safety codes. Should adverse conditions exist, appropriate recommendations would be offered at that time. The above recommendations should be provided to any contractors and/or subcontractors, or homeowners, etc., that may perform such work. Utility Trench Backfill 1. All interior utility trench backfill should be brought to at least 2 percent above optimum moisture content and then compacted to obtain a minimum relative compaction of 90 percent of the laboratory standard. As an alternative for shallow (12-inch to 18-inch) under-slab trenches, sand having a sand equivalent value of 30 or greater may be utilized and jetted or flooded into place. Observation, probing and testing should be provided to evaluate the desired results. 2. Exterior trenches adjacent to, and within areas extending below a 1:1 plane projected from the outside bottom edge of the footing, and all trenches beneath hardscape features and in slopes, should be compacted to at least 90 percent of the laboratory standard. Sand backfill, unless excavated from the trench, should not be used in these backfill areas. Compaction testing and observations, along with probing, should be accomplished to evaluate the desired results. 3. All trench excavations should conform to CAL-OSHA, state, and local safety codes. 4. Utilities crossing grade beams, perimeter beams, or footings should either pass below the footing or grade beam utilizing a hardened collar or foam spacer, or pass through the footing or grade beam in accordance with the recommendations of the structural engineer. Carlsbad City Library W.O. 5016-A-SC 3368 Eureka Place, Carlsbad January 3,2006 Re:e:\wp9\5000\5016a.pgi Page 29 GeoSoils, Inc. SUMMARY OF RECOMMENDATIONS REGARDING GEOTECHNICAL OBSERVATION AND TESTING We recommend that observation and/or testing be performed by GSI at each of the following construction stages: • During grading/recertification. • During excavation. • During placement of subdrains, toe drains, or other subdrainage devices, prior to placing fill and/or backfill. • After excavation of building footings, retaining wall footings, and free standing walls footings, prior to the placement of reinforcing steel or concrete. • Prior to pouring any slabs or flatwork, after presoaking/presaturation of building pads and other flatwork subgrade, before the placement of concrete, reinforcing steel, capillary break (i.e., sand, pea-gravel, etc.), or vapor barriers (i.e., visqueen, etc.). • During retaining wall subdrain installation, prior to backfill placement. • During placement of backfill for area drain, interior plumbing, utility line trenches, and retaining wall backfill. • During slope construction/repair. • When any unusual soil conditions are encountered during any construction operations, subsequent to the issuance of this report. • When any developer or homeowner, improvements, such as flatwork, spas, pools, walls, etc., are constructed, prior to construction. GSI should review and approve such plans, prior to construction. • A report of geotechnical observation and testing should be provided at the conclusion of each of the above stages, in order to provide concise and clear documentation of site work, and/or to comply with code requirements. • GSI should review project sales documents to homeowners/homeownr > associations for geotechnical aspects, including irrigation practices, the condif .is outlined above, etc., prior to any sales. At that stage, GSI will provide homeowners maintenance guidelines which should be incorporated into such documents. Carlsbad City Library W.0.5016-A-SC 3368 Eureka Place, Carlsbad January 3,2006 File:e:\wp9V5000\S016a4>gi Page 30 GeoSoils, Inc. OTHER DESIGN PROFESSIONALS/CONSULTANTS The design civil engineer, structural engineer, post-tension designer, architect, landscape architect, wall designer, etc., should review the recommendations provided herein, incorporate those recommendations into all their respective plans, and by explicit reference, make this report part of their project plans. This report presents minimum design criteria for the design of slabs, foundations and other elements possibly applicable to the project. These criteria should not be considered as substitutes for actual designs by the structural engineer/designer. Please note that the recommendations contained herein are not intended to preclude the transmission of water or vapor through the slab or foundation. The structural engineer/foundation and/or slab designer should provide recommendations to not allow water or vapor to enter into the structure so as to cause damage to another building component, or so as to limit the installation of the type of flooring materials typically used for the particular application. The structural engineer/designer should analyze actual soil-structure interaction and consider, as needed, bearing, expansive soil influence, and strength, stiffness and deflections in the various slab, foundation, and other elements in order to develop appropriate, design-specific details. As conditions dictate, it is possible that other influences will also have to be considered. The structural engineer/designer should consider all applicable codes and authoritative sources where needed. If analyses by the structural engineer/designer result in less critical details than are provided herein as minimums, the minimums presented herein should be adopted. It is considered likely that some, more restrictive details will be required. If the structural engineer/designer has any questions or requires further assistance, they should not hesitate to call or otherwise transmit their requests to GSI. In order to mitigate potential distress, the foundation and/or improvement's designer should confirm to GSI and the governing agency, in writing, that the proposed foundations and/or improvements can tolerate the amount of differential settlement and/or expansion characteristics and other design criteria specified herein. PLAN REVIEW Final project plans (grading, precise grading, foundation, retaining wall, landscaping, etc.), should be reviewed by this office prior to construction, so that construction is in accordance with the conclusions and recommendations of this report. Based on our review, supplemental recommendations and/or further geotechnical studies may be warranted. Carlsbad City Library W.0.5016-A-SC 3368 Eureka Place, Carlsbad January 3,2006 File:e:\wp9\5000\5016a.pgi Page 31GeoSoils, Inc. LIMITATIONS The materials encountered on the project site and utilized for our analysis are believed ^ representative of the area; however, soil and bedrock materials vary in character between excavations and natural outcrops or conditions exposed during mass grading. Site conditions may vary due to seasonal changes or other factors. Inasmuch as our study is based upon our review and engineering analyses and laboratory data, the conclusions and recommendations are professional opinions. These opinions have been derived in accordance with current standards of practice, and no warranty, either express or implied, is given. Standards of practice are subject to change with time. GSI assumes no responsibility or liability for work or testing performed by others, or their inaction; or work performed when GSI is not requested to be onsite, to evaluate if our recommendations have been properly implemented. Use of this report constitutes an agreement and consent by the user to all the limitations outlined above, notwithstanding any other agreements that may be in place. In addition, this report may be subject to review by the controlling authorities. Thus, this report brings to completion our scope of services for this portion of the project. All samples will be disposed of after 30 days, unless specifically requested by the client, in writing. Carlsbad City Library W.O.5016-A-SC 3368 Eureka Place, Carlsbad January 3, 2006 Rle:e:\wp9\5000\5016a.pgi Page 32GeoSoils, Inc. APPENDIX A REFERENCES APPENDIX A REFERENCES Blake, Thomas F., 2000a, EQFAULT, A computer program for the estimation of peak horizontal acceleration from 3-D fault sources; Windows 95/98 version. , 2000b, EQSEARCH, A computer program for the estimation of peak horizontal acceleration from California historical earthquake catalogs; Updated to June, 2003, Windows 95/98 version. , 2000c, FRISKSP, A computer program for the probabilistic estimation of peak acceleration and uniform hazard spectra using 3-D faults as earthquake sources; Windows 95/98 version. Bozorgnia,Y., Campbell K.W., and Niazi, M., 1999, Vertical ground motion: Characteristics, relationship with horizontal component, and building-code implications; Proceedings of the SMIP99 seminar on utilization of strong-motion data, September 15, Oakland, pp. 23-49. California Department of Conservation, Department of Mines and Geology, 1995, Landslide hazards in the northern part of the San Diego Metropolitan area, San Diego County, California, San Marcos quadrangle, Landslide Hazard Identification Map No. 35, DMG Open-File Report 95-04. California, State of, 2001, Senate Bill 800, Burton. Liability: construction defects, February 23; approved by Governor September 20, 2002; filed with Secretary September 20,2002; effective January 1, 2003. Campbell, K.W. and Bozorgnia, Y., 1997, Attenuation relations for soft rock conditions; in EQFAULT, A computer program for the estimation of peak horizontal acceleration from 3-D fault sources; Windows 95/98 version, Blake, 2000a. GeoSoils, 1993a, Notice of footing excavation observation, 3368 Eureka Place, W.0.1541.1, dated September 22. , I993b, Field testing report, Girls Club, Eureka, Carlsbad, W.0.1541.1-SD, dated September 10. , 1993c, Field testing report, Girls Club, Eureka, Carlsbad, W.0.1541.1-SC, dated September 9. , 1993d, Field testing report, Carlsbad Girls Club, 3368 Eureka, Carlsbad, W.0.1541.1-SC, dated September?. GeoSoils, Inc. , 19936. Reid testing report, Carlsbad Girls Club, 3368 Eureka, Carlsbad, W.0.1541.1 -SC, dated September 3. , I993f, Preliminary geotechnical study, Carlsbad Girl's Club, 3368 Eureka Place, Carlsbad, California, W.0.1541 -SD, dated March 26 . Hart, E.W. and Bryant, WA, 1997, Fault-rupture hazard zones in California, Alquist-Priolo earthquake fault zoning act with index to earthquake fault zones maps; California Division of Mines and Geology Special Publication 42, with Supplements 1 and 2,1999. International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO), 2001, California building code, California code of regulations title 24, part 2, volume 1 and 2. , 1997, Uniform building code: Whittier, California, vol. 1,2, and 3. Jennings, C.W., 1994, Fault activity map of California and adjacent areas: California Division of Mines and Geology, Map sheet no. 6, Scale 1:750,000. Manual Oncina Architects, Inc., undated, Project site plan, Carlsbad City Library Learning Center, Project No. 4001. Sadigh, K., Egan, J., and Youngs, R., 1987, Predictive ground motion equations, in Joyner, W.B. and Boore, D.M., 1988, Measurement, characterization, and prediction of strong ground motion, in Von Thun, J.L, ed., Earthquake engineering and soil dynamics II, recent advances in ground motion evaluation, American Society of Civil Engineers Geotechnical Special Publication No. 20, pp. 43-102. Sowers and Sowers, 1970, Unified soil classification system (After U.S. Waterways Experiment Station and ASTM 02487-667) jn Introductory Soil Mechanics, New York. State of California, 2003, State Bill 800, Title 7 - Chapter 2: Actionable Defects, dated January. Tan, S.S., and Kennedy, M.P., 2005, Geologic map of the Oceanside 30' x 60' quadrangle, California., State of California, Department of Conservation, Map No. 2, scale 1:100,000. Weber, F. Harold Jr., 1982, Geologic map of northcentral coastal area of San Diego, California, California Division of Mines and Geology, 1:24,000 scale. Carlsbad City Library Appendix A FHe:e:\wp9V5000\5016apgi *»«-•• Page 2GeoSoils, Inc. APPENDIX B BORING LOGS UNIFIED SOIL CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM CONSISTENCY OR RELATIVE DENSITY Mafor Divisions . Group Symbols Typical Names CRITERIA m 6 •5 GW WeHjraded gravels and gravel- sand mixtures, little or no fines Standard Penetration Test GP Poorly graded gravels and gravel-sand mixtures, little or no fines Penetration Resistance N (Wows/ft) Relative Density BM Sitty gravels gravel-sand-silt mixtures GC Clayey gravels, gravel-sand-clay mixtures SW Weft-graded sands and gravelly sands, little or no fines 0-4 4-10 10-30 30-50 >50 SP Poorly graded sands and gravelly sands, little or no fines Very loose Loose Medium Dense Very dense SM Sidy sands, sand-silt mixtures SC Clayey sands, sand-day mixtures 1: S1!slf Highly Organic Soils ML Inorganic sflts, very fine sands, rock flour, silty or clayey fine sands CL Inorganic days of low to medium plasticity, gravelly days, sandy days, silty days, (ten days Penetration Resistance N (blows/It) Standard Penetration Test Consistency Unconfined Compressive Strength (tons/If) OL Organic silts and organic silty days of tow plasticity MH Inorganic silts, micaceous or diatomaceous fine-sands or sHts, elastic sttts CH Inorganic days of high plasticity, fat days OH Organic days of medium to high plasticity <2 2-4 4-8 8-15 15-30 >30 Very Son Soft Medium Stiff Very Stiff Hard <0.25 0.25 -.050 0.50-1.00 1.00-2.00 2.00-4.00 >4.00 FT Peat, mucic, and other highly organic soils 3/4'#10 #40 #200 U.S. Standard Sieve Unified SoH Classification Cobbles Gravel coarse fine Sand coarse medium fine Silt or Clay MOISTURE CONDITIONS Dry Absence of moisture: dusty, dry to the touch Slightly Moist Below optimum moisture content for compaction Moist Near optimum moisture content Very Moist Above optimum moisture content Wet visible free water; below water table MATERIAL QUANTITY trace 0 - 5 % few 5-10% little 10-25% some 25-45% OTHER SYMBOLS C Core Sample S SPT Sample B Bulk Sample T Groundwater Op Pocket Penetrometer I BASIC LOG FORMAT: I Group name. Group symbol, (grain size), color, moisture, consistency or relative density. Additional comments: odor, presence of roots, mica, gypsum, I coarse grained partides, etc. (EXAMPLE: I Sand (SP), fine to medium grained, brown, moist, loose, trace silt, little fine gravel, few cobbles up to 4" in size, some hair roots and rootlets. File:Mgr c;\SoilClassif.wpd PLATE B-1 BORING LOG GeoSoils, Inc. 1 W.O. 5016-A-SC •...— PROJECT; CartebBd Lforary BORING B-1 SHEET 1 OF 1 Carlsbad DATE EXCAVATED 11-22-05 2" f 8 s- "• Sample m i | 1 .i 1 1* 8 SM SM £ ft% I 117.3 j- ¥i S.8 £ | 1 63.1 SAMPLE METHOD: Hand Auger |H Standard Penetration Test __ 5L Gmimrtwatnr ^ Uncfsturbed, Ring Sample Description of Material .•f '.^ ' +s* 'N» , ,,x*' ARTIRCIAL FILL: @ 0' SILTY SAND, dark brown, moist to wet, loose; fine to medium, numerous rootlets. @ T As per 0', medium dense. @ 3' As per 1', orangish brown. m TERRACE DEPOSITS: @ 4' SILTY SAND, orangish brown, moist, dense. Total Depth = 6' No Groundwater Encountered Backfilled 11-22-2005 ' \ Cartsbad GeoSoils, Inc. ^2 » » 4 GeoSoils, Inc. BORING LOG IV.O. S016-/V-SC I PROJECT: Carlsbad Library Carlsbad i Sample j,1 1 • - 5- > •I \I SM SM f Dry Unit Wt ft121.7 * 9.9 Saturation (%7ZB BOR/WG B-2 SHEET 1 OF 1 DATE EXCAVATED 11-22-05 SAMPLE METHOD: Hand Auger 1LI Standard Penetration Test ^| Undisturbed. Rhg Sample Description of Material i* :? S i? . V .iy~ ,i>. .<^\ ARTIFICIAL FILL: @ 0' SILTY SAND, dark brown, moist to wet, loose; fine to medium, numerous rootlets. @ 1* As per 0', medium dense. @ 2' As per 1', orangish brown. TERRACE DEPOSITS: @ 3' SILTY SAND, orangish brown, moist, dense. Total Depth = 6' No Groundwater Encountered Backfilled 11 -22-2005 GeoSoils, Inc. PMTE M I GeoSoils, Inc. PROJECT: Carlsbad Library Carlsbad i 5- - Sample i CD j i i SM SM Dry Unit Wt (per)|j BORING LOG W.O. 501&A-SC m ^ BORING B-3 SHEET 1 OF 1 DATE EXCAVATED 11-22-05 SAMPLE METHOD: Hand Auger i| Standard Penetration Test -±L Gioundwator 4 Undoturbed, Ring Sample Description of Mdterial * *>> '*>*' ARTIFICIAL FILL @ 0' SILTY SAND, dark brown, moist to wet, loose; fine to medium, numerous rootlets. @ 1' As per 0', medium dense to dense. @ 3' As per 1', orangish brown. m TERRACE DEPOSITS: @ 4' SILTY SAND, orangish brown, moist, dense; fine to medium. Total Depth = 6' No Groundwater Encountered Backfilled 11 -22-2005 'carisbad GeoSoils, Inc. PLAJE M | 4 GeoSoiis, Inc. BORING LOG W.O. 5016-A-SC PROJECT; Cartebad Ubrary Carisbwl g 1o ' 5- k Sample *£ 'Undtoturbed' i | SM SM •Dry Unit Wt(pcf)116.5 Moisture (%)5.5 Saturation (%)35.0 BORING B-4 SHEET 1 OF 1 DATE EXCAVATED 11-22-05 SAMPLE METHOD: Hand Auger § Sbnda/rfPenefrafon TesfX 2. fimunrtentar 1 Undisturbed. Ring Sample Description of Material .^*,«^»*?'*-**.~^ ' •** '.•if* — *'»>> [»^»!J* ••*> *x*..^* •-"••' *^f* .*/*• ' •** .^r- •-?•ijo '*^*fc .'^* •f^> ARTIFICIAL FILL: @ 0' SILTY SAND, dark brown, moist, medium dense; few rocks, fine to medium. @ 1' As per 0', orangish brown, dense. TERRACE DEPOSITS: @ 2* SILTY SAND, orangish brown, damp, dense. Total Depth = 4' No Groundwater Encountered Backfilled 11-22-2005 car*** GeoSoiis, Inc. pM7F M I 4 APPENDIX C EQFAULT, EQSEARCH, AND FRISKSP MAXIMUM EARTHQUAKES 3368 Eureka Place 1 .gV-» .1 .01 .001 .1 1 10 Distance (mi) 100 W.O. 5016-A-SC Plate C-1 RETURN PERIOD vs. ACCELERATIONBOZ. ET AL.(1999)HOR PS UNC 1\\\\ Oooo k ^ \\\\ \ \ \\\\k s s ^• — — — 0 O 0 O 0 v- EARTHQUAKE RECURRENCE CURVE 3368 Eureka Place iuu - 10- (0<u >• 1 -z •S2 <D LU «4— ° 1 - <DJDC 3 Z S'is .01 - D E3 001 - ^s. LULL Mil is^— —^~^^_ MII "V^^^ *^% IMI >X^ "X, < • MM i^N MM MM ^"^x MM Mil IMI MM 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.5 9.0 Magnitude (M) W.O. 5016-A-SC Plate C-3 PROBABILITY OF EXCEEDANCE BOZ. ET AL(1999)HOR PS UNC 1 100 75yrs 100 yrs 0.00 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 Acceleration (g) 1.25 1.50 W.O. 5016-A-SC Plate C-4 APPENDIX D LABORATORY TEST RESULTS SCHIFF ASSOCIATES www.schiffcjssoclates.com Consulting Corrosion Engineers - Since 1959 Table 1 - Laboratory Tests on Soil Samples GeoSoils, Inc. Carlsbad Library Your #5016-A-SC, MJS&A W5-1736LAB 2-Dec-05 Sample ID Resistivity as-received saturated PH Electrical Conductivity iielSSilSiS Units ohm-cm ohm-cm mS/cm B-2 ©0-2' 35,000 4,600 13. 0.11 Chemical Analyses Cations calcium magnesium sodium Anions carbonate bicarbonate chloride sulfatc Other Tests ammonium nitrate sulfide Redox Ca2+ Mg* Na'+ co3 2- HCO3'' SCU2- NH4I+ NO,1" S2' mg/kg mg/kg mg/kg mg/kg mg/kg mg/kg mg/kg mg/kg mg/kg qua! 40 56 ND ND 104 15 63 na na na mV nayMsms^s^s^ss^ss^^^^s^s^s^^&m &S?SSS!!l<3^^ Electrical conductivity in millisiemens/cm and chemical analysis were made on a 1:5 soil-to-water extract, mg/kg = milligrams per kilogram (parts per million) of dry soil. Redox = oxidation-reduction potential in millivolts ND = not detected na = not analyzed 431 West Baseline Road • Claremont, CA 91711 Phone: 909.626.0967 • Fax: 909.626.3316 W.O. 5016-A-SC Page 1 of 1 Plate D-1 APPENDIX E GENERAL EARTHWORK AND GRADING GUIDELINES GENERAL EARTHWORK AND GRADING GUIDELINES General These guidelines present general procedures and requirements for earthwork and grading as shown on the approved grading plans, including preparation of areas to filled, placement of fill, installation of subdrains, and excavations. The recommendations contained in the geotechnical report are part of the earthwork and grading guidelines and would supercede the provisions contained hereafter in the case of conflict. Evaluations performed by the consultant during the course of grading may result in new or revised recommendations which could supercede these guidelines or the recommendations contained in the geotechnical report. The contractor is responsible for the satisfactory completion of all earthwork in accordance with provisions of the project plans and specifications. The project soil engineer and engineering geologist (geotechnical consultant), or their representatives, should provide observation and testing services, and geotechnical consultation during the duration of the project. EARTHWORK OBSERVATIONS AND TESTING Geotechnical Consultant Prior to the commencement of grading, a qualified geotechnical consultant (soil engineer and engineering geologist) should be employed for the purpose of observing earthwork procedures and testing the fills for general conformance with the recommendations of the geotechnical report, the approved grading plans, and applicable grading codes and ordinances. The geotechnical consultant should provide testing and observation so that determination may be made that the work is being accomplished as specified. It is the responsibility of the contractor to assist the consultants and keep them apprised of anticipated work schedules and changes, so that they may schedule their personnel accordingly. All remedial removals, clean-outs, prepared ground to receive fill, key excavations, and subdrain installation should be observed and documented by the project engineering geologist and/or soil engineer prior to placing and fill. It is the contractor's responsibility to notify the engineering geologist and soil engineer when such areas are ready for observation. Laboratory and Field Tests Maximum dry density tests to determine the degree of compaction should be performed in accordance with American Standard Testing Materials test method ASTM designation D-1557. Random or representative field compaction tests should be performed in accordance with test methods ASTM designation D-1556, D-2937 or D-2922, and D-3017, GeoSoils, Inc. at intervals of approximately ±2 feet of fill height or approximately every 1,000 cubic yards placed. These criteria would vary depending on the soil conditions and the size of the project. The location and frequency of testing would be at the discretion of the geotechnical consultant. Contractor's Responsibility All clearing, site preparation, and earthwork performed on the project should be conducted by the contractor, with observation by a geotechnical consultant, and staged approval by the governing agencies, as applicable. It is the contractor's responsibility to prepare the ground surface to receive the fill, to the satisfaction of the soil engineer, and to place, spread, moisture condition, mix, and compact the fill in accordance with the recommendations of the soil engineer. The contractor should also remove all non-earth material considered unsatisfactory by the soil engineer. It is the sole responsibility of the contractor to provide adequate equipment and methods to accomplish the earthwork in accordance with applicable grading guidelines, codes or agency ordinances, and approved grading plans. Sufficient watering apparatus and compaction equipment should be provided by the contractor with due consideration for the fill material, rate of placement, and climatic conditions. If, in the opinion of the geotechnical consultant, unsatisfactory conditions such as questionable weather, excessive oversized rock or deleterious material, insufficient support equipment, etc., are resulting in a quality of work that is not acceptable, the consultant will inform the contractor, and the contractor is expected to rectify the conditions, and if necessary, stop work until conditions are satisfactory. During construction, the contractor shall property grade all surfaces to maintain good drainage and prevent ponding of water. The contractor shall take remedial measures to control surface water and to prevent erosion of graded areas until such time as permanent drainage and erosion control measures have been installed. SITE PREPARATION All major vegetation, including brush, trees, thick grasses, organic debris, and other deleterious material, should be removed and disposed of off-site. These removals must be concluded prior to placing fill. In-place existing fill, soil, alluvium, colluvium, or rock materials, determined by the soil engineer or engineering geologist as being unsuitable, should be removed prior to any fill placement. Depending upon the soil conditions, these materials may be reused as compacted fills. Any materials incorporated as part of the compacted fills should be approved by the soil engineer. Any underground structures such as cesspools, cisterns, mining shafts, tunnels, septic tanks, wells, pipelines, or other structures not located prior to grading, are to be removed or treated in a manner recommended by the soil engineer. Soft, dry, spongy, highly Carlsbad City Library Appendix E FBe: e:\wp9\5OW5016a.pgi -.-..-. Page 2GeoSotls, Inc. fractured, or otherwise unsuitable ground, extending to such a depth that surface processing cannot adequately improve the condition, should be overexcavated down to firm ground and approved by the soil engineer before compaction and filling operations continue. Overexcavated and processed soils, which have been properly mixed and moisture conditioned, should be re-compacted to the minimum relative compaction as specified in these guidelines. Existing ground, which is determined to be satisfactory for support of the fills, should be scarified to a minimum depth of 6 to 8 inches, or as directed by the soil engineer. After the scarified ground is brought to optimum moisture content, or greater and mixed, the materials should be compacted as specified herein. If the scarified zone is greater than 6 to 8 inches in depth, it may be necessary to remove the excess and place the material in lifts restricted to about 6 to 8 inches in compacted thickness. Existing ground which is not satisfactory to support compacted fill should be overexcavated as required in the geotechnical report, or by the on-slte soils engineer and/or engineering geologist. Scarification, disc harrowing, or other acceptable forms of mixing should continue until the soils are broken down and free of large lumps or clods, until the working surface is reasonably uniform and free from ruts, hollows, hummocks, or other uneven features, which would inhibit compaction as described previously. Where fills are to be placed on ground with slopes steeper than 5:1 (horizontal to vertical [h:v]), the ground should be stepped or benched. The lowest bench, which will act as a key, should be a minimum of 15 feet wide and should be at least 2 feet deep into firm material, and approved by the soil engineer and/or engineering geologist. In fill over cut slope conditions, the recommended minimum width of the lowest bench or key is also 15 feet, with the key founded on firm material, as designated by the geotechnical consultant. As a general rule, unless specifically recommended otherwise by the soil engineer, the minimum width of fill keys should be approximately equal to Vzthe height of the slope. Standard benching is generally 4 feet (minimum) vertically, exposing firm, acceptable material. Benching may be used to remove unsuitable materials, although it is understood that the vertical height of the bench may exceed 4 feet. Pre-stripping may be considered for unsuitable materials in excess of 4 feet in thickness. All areas to receive fill, including processed areas, removal areas, and the toes of fill benches, should be observed and approved by the soil engineer and/or engineering geologist prior to placement of fill. Fills may then be properly placed and compacted until design grades (elevations) are attained. Carlsbad City Library Appendix E Fife: e:\wp9\5000V5016a.pgi Page 3GeoSoilSj Inc. COMPACTED FILLS Any earth materials imported or excavated on the property may be utilized in the fill provided that each material has been determined to be suitable by the soil engineer. These materials should be free of roots, tree branches, other organic matter, or other deleterious materials. All unsuitable materials should be removed from the fill as directed by the soil engineer. Soils of poor gradation, undesirable expansion potential, or substandard strength characteristics may be designated by the consultant as unsuitable and may require blending with other soils to serve as a satisfactory fill material. Rll materials derived from benching operations should be dispersed throughout the fill area and blended with other approved material. Benching operations should not result in the benched material being placed only within a single equipment width away from the fill/bedrock contact. Oversized materials defined as rock, or other irreducible materials, with a maximum dimension greater than 12 inches, should not be buried or placed in fills unless the location of materials and disposal methods are specifically approved by the soil engineer. Oversized material should betaken offsite, or placed in accordance with recommendations of the soil engineer in areas designated as suitable for rock disposal. Per the UBC/CBC, oversized material should not be placed within 10 feet vertically of finish grade (elevation) or within 20 feet horizontally of slope faces (any variation will require prior approval from the governing agency). To facilitate future trenching, rock (or oversized material) should not be placed within 10 feet from finish grade, the range of foundation excavations, future utilities, or underground construction unless specifically approved by the soil engineer and/or the developer's representative. If import material is required for grading, representative samples of the materials to be utilized as compacted fill should be analyzed in the laboratory by the soil engineer to determine it's physical properties and suitability for use onsite. If any material other than that previously tested is encountered during grading, an appropriate analysis of this material should be conducted by the soil engineer as soon as possible. Approved fill material should be placed in areas prepared to receive fill in near horizontal layers, that when compacted, should not exceed about 6 to 8 inches in thickness. The soil engineer may approve thick lifts if testing indicates the grading procedures are such that adequate compaction is being achieved with lifts of greater thickness. Each layer should be spread evenly and blended to attain uniformity of material and moisture suitable for compaction. Fill layers at a moisture content less than optimum should be watered and mixed, and wet fill layers should be aerated by scarification, or should be blended with drier material. Moisture conditioning, blending, and mixing of the fill layer should continue until the fill materials have a uniform moisture content at, or above, optimum moisture. Carlsbad City Library Appendix E GCOSoilS, Inc. Pa9e4 After each layer has been evenly spread, moisture conditioned, and mixed, it should be uniformly compacted to a minimum of 90 percent of the maximum density as determined by ASTM test designation D-1557, or as otherwise recommended by the soil engineer. M Compaction equipment should be adequately sized and should be specifically designed ™ for soil compaction or of proven reliability to efficiently achieve the specified degree of compaction. Where tests indicate that the density of any layer of fill, or portion thereof, is below the required relative compaction, or improper moisture is in evidence, the particular layer or portion shall be re-worked until the required density and/or moisture content has been attained. No additional fill shall be placed in an area until the last placed lift of fill has been tested and found to meet the density and moisture requirements, and is approved by the soil engineer. In general, per the UBC/CBC, fill slopes should.be designed and constructed at a gradient of 2:1 (h:v), or flatter. Compaction of slopes should be accomplished by over-building a minimum of 3 feet horizontally, and subsequently trimming back to the design slope configuration. Testing shall be performed as the fill is elevated to evaluate compaction as the fill core is being developed. Special efforts may be necessary to attain the specified compaction in the fill slope zone. Final slope shaping should be performed by trimming and removing loose materials with appropriate equipment. A final determination of fill slope compaction should be based on observation and/or testing of the finished slope face. Where compacted fill slopes are designed steeper than 2:1 (h:v), prior approval from the governing agency, specific material types, a higher minimum relative compaction, special reinforcement, and special grading procedures will be recommended. m If an alternative to over-building and cutting back the compacted fill slopes is selected, then special effort should be made to achieve the required compaction in the outer 10 feet of each lift of fill by undertaking the following: 1. An extra piece of equipment consisting of a heavy, short-shanked sheepsfoot should be used to roll (horizontal) parallel to the slopes continuously as fill is placed. The sheepsfoot roller should also be used to roll perpendicular to the slopes, and extend out over the slope to provide adequate compaction to the face of the slope. 2. Loose fill should not be spilled out over the face of the slope as each lift is compacted. Any loose fill spilled over a previously completed slope face should be trimmed off or be subject to re-rolling. 3. Field compaction tests will be made in the outer (horizontal) ±2 to ±8 feet of the slope at appropriate vertical intervals, subsequent to compaction operations. 4. After completion of the slope, the slope face should be shaped with a small tractor and then re-rolled with a sheepsfoot to achieve compaction to near the slope face. Subsequent to testing to evaluate compaction, the slopes should be grid-rolled to M Carlsbad Ctty Library Appendix E Hte: e:\wp9\5000\5016a.pgi GeoSotlf, IttC. Page 5 achieve compaction to the slope face. Final testing should be used to evaluate compaction after grid rolling. 5. Where testing indicates less than adequate compaction, the contractor will be responsible to rip, water, mix, and recompact the slope material as necessary to achieve compaction. Additional testing should be performed to evaluate compaction. 6. Erosion control and drainage devices should be designed by the project civil engineer in compliance with ordinances of the controlling governmental agencies, and/or in accordance with the recommendation of the soil engineer or engineering geologist. SUBDRAIN INSTALLATION Subdrains should be installed in approved ground in accordance with the approximate alignment and details indicated by the geotechnical consultant. Subdrain locations or materials should not be changed or modified without approval of the geotechnical consultant. The soil engineer and/or engineering geologist may recommend and direct changes in subdrain line, grade, and drain material in the field, pending exposed conditions. The location of constructed subdrains, especially the outlets, should be recorded by the project civil engineer. EXCAVATIONS Excavations and cut slopes should be examined during grading by the engineering geologist. If directed by the engineering geologist, further excavations or overexcavation and refilling of cut areas should be performed, and/or remedial grading of cut slopes should be performed. When fill over cut slopes are to be graded, unless otherwise approved, the cut portion of the slope should be observed by the engineering geologist prior to placement of materials for construction of the fill portion of the slope. The engineering geologist should observe all cut slopes, and should be notified by the contractor when excavation of cut slopes commence. If, during the course of grading, unforeseen adverse or potentially adverse geologic conditions are encountered, the engineering geologist and soil engineer should investigate, evaluate, and make appropriate recommendations for mitigation of these conditions. The need for cut slope buttressing or stabilizing should be based on in-grading evaluation by the engineering geologist, whether anticipated or not. Carlsbad City Library Appendix E Rle: e:\wp9\5000\5016a-pgi ,— *.... Page 6GeoSoils, Inc. Unless otherwise specified in soil and geological reports, no cut slopes should be excavated higher or steeper than that allowed by the ordinances of controlling governmental agencies. Additionally, short-term stability of temporary cut slopes is the contractor's responsibility. Erosion control and drainage devices should be designed by the project civil engineer and should be constructed in compliance with the ordinances of the controlling governmental agencies, and/or in accordance with the recommendations of the soil engineer or engineering geologist. COMPLETION Observation, testing, and consultation by the geotechnical consultant should be conducted during the grading operations in order to state an opinion that all cut and fill areas are graded in accordance with the approved project specifications. After completion of grading, and after the soil engineer and engineering geologist have finished their observations of the work, final reports should be submitted subject to review by the controlling governmental agencies. No further excavation or filling should be undertaken without prior notification of the soil engineer and/or engineering geologist. All finished cut and fill slopes should be protected from erosion and/or be planted in accordance with the project specifications and/or as recommended by a landscape architect. Such protection and/or planning should be undertaken as soon as practical after completion of grading. JOB SAFETY General At GSI, getting the job done safely is of primary concern. The following is the company's safety considerations for use by all employees on multi-employer construction sites. On-ground personnel are at highest risk of injury, and possible fatality, on grading and construction projects. GSI recognizes that construction activities will vary on each site, and that site safety is the prime responsibility of the contractor; however, everyone must be safety conscious and responsible at all times. To achieve our goal of avoiding accidents, cooperation between the client, the contractor, and GSI personnel must be maintained. In an effort to minimize risks associated with geotechnical testing and observation, the following precautions are to be implemented for the safety of field personnel on grading and construction projects: Carlsbad City Library Appendix E FBe: e:\wpB\5000\5016a.pgi -.*.,,» Page 7GeoSoils, Inc. Safety Meetings: GSI field personnel are directed to attend contractor's regularly scheduled and documented safety meetings. Safety Vests: Safety vests are provided for, and are to be worn by GSI personnel, at all times, when they are working in the field. Safety Flags: Two safety flags are provided to GSI field technicians; one is to be affixed to the vehicle when on site, the other is to be placed atop the spoil pile on all test pits. Flashing Lights: All vehicles stationary in the grading area shall use rotating or flashing amber beacons, or strobe lights, on the vehicle during all field testing. While operating a vehicle in the grading area, the emergency flasher on the vehicle shall be activated. In the event that the contractor's representative observes any of our personnel not following the above, we request that it be brought to the attention of our office. Test Pits Location. Orientation, and Clearance The technician is responsible for selecting test pit locations. A primary concern should be the technician's safety. Efforts will be made to coordinate locations with the grading contractor's authorized representative, and to select locations following or behind the established traffic pattern, preferably outside of current traffic. The contractor's authorized representative (supervisor, grade checker, dump man, operator, etc.) should direct excavation of the pit and safety during the test period. Of paramount concern should be the soil technician's safety, and obtaining enough tests to represent the fill. Test pits should be excavated so that the spoil pile is placed away from oncoming traffic, whenever possible. The technician's vehicle is to be placed next to the test pit, opposite the spoil pile. This necessitates the fill be maintained in a driveable condition. Alternatively, the contractor may wish to park a piece of equipment in front of the test holes, particularly in small fill areas or those with limited access. A zone of non-encroachment should be established for all test pits. No grading equipment should enter this zone during the testing procedure. The zone should extend approximately 50 feet outward from the center of the test pit. This zone is established for safety and to avoid excessive ground vibration, which typically decreases test results. When taking slope tests, the technician should park the vehicle directly above or below the test location. If this is not possible, a prominent flag should be placed at the top of the slope. The contractor's representative should effectively keep all equipment at a safe operational distance (e.g., 50 feet) away from the slope during this testing. Carlsbad City Library • Appendix E File: e:\wp3\5000\5016tLpgi Page 8GeoSoils, Inc. The technician is directed to withdraw from the active portion of the fill as soon as possible following testing. The technician's vehicle should be parked at the perimeter of the fill in a highly visible location, well away from the equipment traffic pattern. The contractor should inform our personnel of all changes to haul roads, cut and fill areas or other factors that may affect site access and site safety. In the event that the technician's safety is jeopardized or compromised as a result of the contractor's failure to comply with any of the above, the technician is required, by company policy, to immediately withdraw and notify his/her supervisor. The grading contractor's representative will be contacted in an effort to affect a solution. However, in the interim, no further testing will be performed until the situation is rectified. Any fill placed can be considered unacceptable and subject to reprocessing, recompaction, or removal. In the event that the soil technician does not comply with the above or other established safety guidelines, we request that the contractor bring this to the technician's attention and notify this office. Effective communication and coordination between the contractor's representative and the soil technician is strongly encouraged in order to implement the above safety plan. Trench and Vertical Excavation It is the contractor's responsibility to provide safe access into trenches where compaction testing is needed. Our personnel are directed not to enter any excavation or vertical cut which: 1) is 5 feet or deeper unless shored or laid back; 2) displays any evidence of instability, has any loose rock or other debris which could fall into the trench; or 3) displays any other evidence of any unsafe conditions regardless of depth. All trench excavations or vertical cuts in excess of 5 feet deep, which any person enters, should be shored or laid back. Trench access should be provided in accordance with CAL-OSHA and/or state and local standards. Our personnel are directed not to enter any trench by being lowered or "riding down" on the equipment. If the contractor fails to provide safe access to trenches for compaction testing, our company policy requires that the soil technician withdraw and notify his/her supervisor. The contractor's representative will be contacted in an effort to affect a solution. All backfill not tested due to safety concerns or other reasons could be subject to reprocessing and/or removal. If GSI personnel become aware of anyone working beneath an unsafe trench wall or vertical excavation, we have a legal obligation to put the contractor and owner/developer on notice to immediately correct the situation. If corrective steps are not taken, GSI then has an obligation to notify CAL-OSHA and/or the proper controlling authorities. Carlsbad City Library Appendix E Rle: e:\wp9\5000\5016a.pgi Page 9GeoSoils, Inc. DETAIL FOR FILL SLOPE TOE1N13 UUI ON FLAT ALLUVIATED CANYON TOE OF SLOPE AS SHOWN ON GRADING PLAN ORIGINAL GROUND SURFACE TO BE RESTORED WITH COMPACTED FILL BACKCUT XVARIES. FOR DEEP REMOVALS. BACKCUT ^SHOULD BE MADE NO STEEPER-THAN\j:1 OR AS NECESSARY FOR SAFETY v^ COMPACTED FILL ORIGINAL GROUND SURFACE ONSIDERATIONS ANTICIPATED ALLUVIAL REMOVAL DEPTH PER SOIL ENGINEER. PROVIDE A in MINIMUM PROJECTION FROM TOE OF SLOPE AS SHOWN ON GRADING PLAN TO THE RECOMMENDED REMOVAL DEPTH. SLOPE HEIGHT, SITE CONDITIONS AMD/OR LOCAL CONDITIONS COULD DICTATE FLATTER PROJECTIONS. REMOVAL ADJACENT TO EXISTING FILL ADJOINING CANYON FILL PROPOSED ADDITIONAL COMPACTED RLL COMPACTED RLL LIMITS LINE TEMPORARY COMPACTED RLL FOR DRAINAGE ONLY (TO BE REMOVED) {EXISTING,COMPACTED FILL) LEGEND TO BE REMOVED BEFORE Qaf ARTIFICIAL RLL PLACING ADDITIONAL COMPACTED RLL Qal ALLUVIUM PLATE EG-3 TRANSITION LOT DETAIL CUT LOT (MATERIAL TYPE TRANSITION) NATURAL GRADE COMPACTED FILL OVEREXCAVATE AND RECOMPACT •^^p H— TYPICAL BENCHING-#w/ 3* MINIMUM* UNWEATHERED BEDROCK OR APPROVED MATERIAL CUT-RLL LOT (DAYLIGHT TRANSITION) PAD GRADE NATURAL GRADE COMPACTED FILL #** . •&&,o*- ,0^^iVO^ o^XJ^ 5'MINIMUM OVEREXCAVATE^ AND RECOMPACT >ff 3'MINIMUM* X UNWEATHERED BEDROCK OR APPROVED MATERIAL TYPICAL BENCHING NOTE: * DEEPER OVEREXCAVATION MAY BE RECOMMENDED BY THE SOILS ENGINEER AND/OR ENGINEERING GEOLOGIST IN STEEP CUT-RLL TRANSITION AREAS. PLATE EG-1T TEST PIT SAFETY DIAGRAM SIDE VIEW m TEST PIT ^P* I NOT TO SCALE ) TOP VIEW 100 FEET -H APPROXIMATE CENTER OF TEST PIT ini I NOT TO SCALE ) PLATE EG-16 Appendix D PARTIAL/PRELIMINARY ASBESTOS SURVEY (for house demolition) PARTIAL/PRELIMINARY ASBESTOS SURVEY 3368 Eureka Place CARLSBAD, CALIFORNIA Project Number: 05-0810 Marc Boogay Consulting Engineer 326 Main Street Vista, CA 92084 (760) 407-4000 PARTIAL/PRELIMINARY ASBESTOS SURVEY 3368 Eureka Place Carlsbad, California 92008 CLIENT: City of Carlsbad 1635 Faraday Street Carlsbad, CA 92008 PREPARED BY:Marc Boogay Consulting Engineer 326 Main Street Vista, California 92084 (760) 407-4000 DATE: September 2, 2005 PROJECT NUMBER:05-0810 IMPORTANT NOTICE:This report is confidential. It may be read, and/or relied upon only by the client. ABSTRACT A preliminary-level survey of suspected asbestos-containing building materials (ACBMs) was conducted on buildings located at the address 3368 Eureka Place in Carlsbad, California (the "site"). Twenty-five samples of suspect ACBMs were taken and analyzed. Two of these contained low levels of asbestos; these were derived from roof mastic and chimney mastic. A transits flue, which was known to contain asbestos, was also located on the site. It is recommended that these areas be handled in consideration to prevent release of asbestos fibers. SIGNATURE The inspection, research, and data discussion noted in this report were completed under my direction. Marc Boogay California Registered Asbestos Consultant September 2, 2005 MBCE Project 05-0810 3368 Eureka Place in Carlsbad, California Page 1 of 5 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1.0 INTRODUCTION, SCOPE OF WORK 3 2.0 BUILDING DESCRIPTIONS 3 3.0 INVESTIGATIVE METHODS 4 3.1 Sampling Protocols .4 3.2 Laboratory Analytical Methods 4 4.0 RESULTS OF INVESTIGATION, DISCUSSION 4 5.0 RECOMMENDATIONS 4 6.0 LIMITATIONS 5 APPENDICES f) APPENDIX 1, ASBESTOS LICENSE APPENDIX 2, ACBM SAMPLE ANALYTICAL REPORT APPENDIX 3, BULK SAMPLE LOG APPENDIX 4, INTERIOR SAMPLE LOCATIONS SKETCH MBCE Project 05-0810 3368 Eureka Place in Carlsbad, California Page 2 of 5 1.0 INTRODUCTION, SCOPE OF WORK This report represents a limited survey of asbestos as may be present in building materials of buildings with the address, 3368 Eureka Place in Carlsbad, California (the "site"). This derives from a contract dated August 9, 2005 between City of Carlsbad (the Client) and Marc Boogay Consulting Engineer (MBCE). The scope of work for this effort is transcribed as follows: • A site inspection for the presence of asbestos-containing materials. This work will be limited to openly accessible surfaces into the site buildings' floors, walls, ceilings, and other, openly accessible materials. No engineering calculations will be performed or reviewed. • Sampling of building materials in up to 25 locations through gouging/marring of sampled surfaces and transfer of the specimens to a laboratory approved for asbestos analysis. The Consultant will not be responsible for repairs or related damage deriving from this. • Analysis by Polarized Light Microscopy. • Preparation of a brief report describing suspect materials, lists of locations and materials sampled, a rough sketch of the site with interior sample locations, laboratory results, and recommendations if/as appropriate. 2.0 BUILDING DESCRIPTIONS The site was on the east side of Eureka Place in Carlsbad, California. It consisted of two one- story buildings and was vacant. Both buildings were of wood frame and stucco construction. Inside the Site Buildings: The main site building was used as classrooms for the Head Start Program of Carlsbad. At the time of the site inspection, the building was largely empty. Building materials included gypsum board walls/ceilings, suspended ceiling tile, spray-applied ceilings, and tile and carpeted flooring. A smaller building was in the site's southeast comer and appeared to have had use as an additional classroom. Building materials were similar to that of the main site building. Significant staining or discoloration was not seen on building materials. A transits flue was in a closet on the site's north side; this is a feature known to contain asbestos. Outside the Site Buildings: The site buildings were separated by a patio, with the smaller building located in the site's southeast comer. On the site's west side was an asphartic concrete (AC) paved parking area. A Portland cement concrete (PCC) walkway was on the site's north side. To the east of the site was a PCC paved area used as a play yard for children. A canopy was on the main site building's south side and covered the patio area. MBCE Project 05-0810 3368 Eureka Place in Carlsbad, California Page 3 of 5 3.0 INVESTIGATIVE METHODS Per the limited scope of this work, sampling was performed only on suspended ceiling tiles, vinyl floor tiling, gypsum board walls and ceilings, roofing materials, mastic, and joint compound. 3.1 Sampling Protocols Samples were taken by prying the surfaces with a bladed sampling instrument Where possible, efforts were made to retrieve full-depth specimens, including mastics and/or underlying layers. The resulting samples were then placed in individual polyethylene bags with press-fit closures. These were labeled noting project identification, date, sample number, and consultant identification. Samples were delivered to an appropriate laboratory for analysis, with sample numbers assigned in a generally randomized order to minimize possible laboratory biases. 3.2 Laboratory Analytical Methods The 25 bulk sample bags were delivered to LA Testing in Pasadena, California, for asbestos analysis. Polarized light microscopy (PLM) was specified as the testing method. Laboratory Analysis Sheets are presented in Appendix 7.2. 4.0 RESULTS OF INVESTIGATION, DISCUSSION Of the 25 samples taken, two indicated the presence of ACBMs. One of these was collected from mastic above the chimney; the second was collected from roofing mastic. In both instances, the materials were described as containing 3% chrysotile "(asbestos), and as being 97% non-fibrous. A transite flue on the site's north side was also known as containing asbestos. A Bulk Sample Log showing the condition, friability, location, and transcribed analytical results of all samples is presented in Appendix 7.3. 5.0 RECOMMENDATIONS The materials sampled may not be the only ones present which could qualify as ACBMs. As such, different materials encountered during demolition or building maintenance/remodeling activities should be treated as ACBM until they have been checked by laboratory analysis and found to be non-asbestos containing. The two samples that had detectable ACBMs should not be disturbed in any way that would release fibers. Additionally, a transite flue was on the site's north side and was known to contain asbestos; this should be handled as an ACBM. All operations involving ACBM should be performed by special state-licensed contractors who have demonstrated experience with asbestos abatement Recent legislation appears to require specific action concerning disclosure of ACBM presence, but may be subject to interpretation. To evaluate requirements of such legislation, evaluation by legal MBCE Project 05-0810 3368 Eureka Place in Carlsbad, California Page 4 of 5 counsel familiar with environmental law is recommended. 6.0 LIMITATIONS No investigation involving demolition was performed beyond shallow surface gouging. No responsibility is assumed by the Consultant for the identification of unusual ACBM or other asbestos not typically found in construction trades. The assumption that all materials of similar appearance are identical is not necessarily justified. Materials may actually have been installed at different times or even be the products of different manufacturers. This work did not include medical or toxicological services and did not assess any specific threats relating to diseases or other aspects of human contact with asbestos fibers. This work was 'preliminary and partial." It did not address all materials suspect of being asbestos- containing and did not provide the number of multiple samples (for a given material) as is often recommended for such work. It is possible that other materials remain on the site that should be considered "asbestos-containing"; where doubt exists, these should not be subject to disturbance, grinding, sawing, sanding, etc., until assessed and found to be non-asbestos-containing. MBCE Project 05-0810 3368 Eureka Place in Carlsbad, California Page 5 of 5 APPENDIX 1 ASBESTOS LICENSE The Asbestos Consultant's License for Marc Boogay follows this sheet. MBCE Project 05-0810 3368 Eureka Place in Carlsbad, California APPENDICES State of California Department of Industrial Relations Division of Occupational Safety and Health P.O. Box 420603 San Francisco, CA 94142 415-703-5501 PROVISIONAL CERTIFICATION FOR ASBESTOS CONSULTANT this certificate allows Jtarc Booqatj (name of asbestos consultant) to practice as a ."certified asbestos consultant'' until December 15. 1992 (month, day, year) Note: Certified asbestos consultant is defined in Section 1529 of Title 8 of the California Code of Regulations. The issuance of this provisional certification is authorized by Section 7183(a) of the Business and Professions Code. Sta'e or California Division of (?c: >;?:,:• rra) Safety and Health Certified Asbestos Consultant Marc Alien Boogay .. /. f=>fG4sJUsL^ Chief, Division of Occupational Safety and Health «' te of Issue September 16, 1992 Certification No..92-0662 (month, day, year) Expires on 09/16/05 11* cerffcsfefi KB issued by *e Oiwwi of »5dHea»iasaJhoriz Ite Business and APPENDIX 2 ACBM SAMPLE ANALYTICAL REPORT The Laboratory Report follows this sheet. MBCE Project 05-0810 3368 Eureka Place in Carlsbad, California APPENDICES LA Testing jigs Pasadena Avenue, South Pasadena, CA 91030 •fene: (323)264-9960 Fax: (323)264-9982 Email: paMdenat^ESsn "•M €*''V . *.'»f,> —**>•> •*•»it .jZi Attn. Sarina Aryan Boogay Consulting 326 Main Street Vista, CA 92084 Fax: (760)407-4004 Phone: (760)407-4000 Project: 3368 Eureka PI / Carlsbad CA Customer ID: 32BOOG50 Customer PO: Received: 08/12/05 10:50 AM LA Testing Order 320512348 LA Testing Prpj: Analysis Date: 8/15/2005 Report Date: 8/16/2005 Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Materials via EPA 600/R-93/116 Method using Polarized Light Microscopy Non-Asbestos Sample 1 32051234*0001 2 32051234*0002 : 3 32051234*OOO3 4FC 32051234*OO04 4BC 320512348-OO26 5 32051234*0005 6 32051234*0008 7 Anaryst(s) Wendy Lui (28) Location Covered wall Mastic Mastic Outside rear stucco Outside rear stucco Fireplace Sheet roofing Shingle line felt App83f3ftC0 % Tan Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Black Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Black Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Yellow Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Tan Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Tan Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Black 3% Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Black 3% Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Fibrous % Non-Fibrous % Type 100% Matrix No~ Detected 97% Matrix 3% Chrysolite 97% Matrix 3% Chrysotite ^^ 100% Matrix NoneDetected 100% Matrix NoneDetected 100% Matrix None Detected Cellulose 97% Matrix Mone Detected Glass 97% Matrix NoneDetected S*~ - s~~^ *•*•••I • I \ **^*> v i 1 .'^* \ e ^ I* ^>-^. S /"j \ ^ <-»-^1*-" / Due to magnification limitation* inherent in PLM asbestos fibers in dimension below the resokJ nwyr«Mr«add«kjnaltertnBbyTEMIoeofft7ii»»be»to«auantitie.. The abov* tact raportrata written approval of EMSL Analytical, he. EMSL't liability is limited to Iheeoet of analysis. EMSI 1 ntwpretaGon and UM of tat iMuto am the responsibility of In* cNent. Analysis performed by LATeitkig (NVLAP #200232-0) y\ . . ' or other approved signatory ton capability oT PtM may nol be detected. Sainplet reported at<1* or none detected•n only to the Hera letted and may not be reproduced ki any norm without the expren • LM-1 LA Testing | Pasadena Avenue, South Pasadena, CA 91030 e: (323)254-9960 Fax: (323)254-9982 EmaH: paaadenalah Attn: Sarina Aryan Boogay Consulting 326 Main Street Vista, CA 92084 Fax: (760) 407-4004 Phone: (760)407-4000 Project 3368 Eureka PI / Carlsbad CA Customer ID: 32BOOG50 Customer PO: Received: 08/12/0510:50 AM LA Testing Order 320512348 LA Testing Pro): Analysis Date: 8/15/2005 Report Date: 8/16/2005 l"t f." Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Materials via EPA 600/R-93/116 Method using Polarized Light Microscopy Non-Asbestos Sample Location Appearance % Fibrous 8 Roofing felt Black 3% Glass 32o«23«MooB Non-Rbrous Homogeneous 9 Wht roof shingles Black 3% Glass 32O5i2346-oooa Non-Rbrous Homogeneous jJ^J JC White ^9tosi234B4oio . NoD-Fbrous Homogeneous 11 Spray-applied White 32051234*4011 "'""B Non-Rbrous Homogeneous 12 Spray-applied While 32ostt3«woi2 ceiHn" Non-Rbrous Homogeneous 320S1234UXH3 "'""B Non-Fibrous Homogeneous 14 Spray-appBed Whtte 320S12348-0014 ceiling Non-Fibrous Homogeneous 15 Spray-appBed Whtte 3205123484015 Ceill"fl Non-ROTOUS Homogeneous Analyst(s) Wendy Lui (28) % Non-Fibrous % Type 97% Matrix NoneDetected 97% Matrix Nor* Detected 100% Matrix N«» Detected 100% Matrix None Detected 100% Matrix NoneDetected 100% Matrix NoneDetected 100% Matrix NoneDetected 100% Matrix None Detected .t i *- f ' •-> wgnlfK»lionllrnMlamlnhvinllnPLH*ri)MtoinMnindmMraian»tolowth*rwol^^ SmfilM reported M<1% or nan* cMMMd vvrlttanipprevalofEMSLAmlytleil.kie. B«l'tW>l«yiillm»»dlolh»ooi»ol««lyrti. BUSL bMn nu muuiir IniwprMaUtm inl UM of <wl iMuto «ra Ihi fMporalbi% of ttw cfiwil *>n«lyrti pvtomwd by LA Taring (NVUP 1200232-0) —"> LA Testing na Avenue,South Pasadena, CA91030 B'- (323) 264-9960 Fax: (323) 264-9982 Email: ~ -—— a .com I Attn: Sarina Aryan Boogay Consulting 326 Main Street Vista, CA 92084 Fax: (760)407-4004 Phone: (760)407-4000 Project: 3368 Eureka PI / Carlsbad CA Customer ID: 32BOOG50 Customer PO: Received: 08/12/05 10:50 AM LA Testing Order 320512348 LA Testing Proj: Analysis Date: 8/15/2005 Report Date: 8/16/2005 Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Materials via EPA 600/R-93/116 Method using Polarized Light Microscopy Non-Asbestos Asbestos Sample Location 16 Plaster 320512348-O018 17 Plaster 320S12348-0017 . .,...) JC 320S123484018 19 Ceiling plaster 32O512348-O019 20 Ceiling plaster 320512348-0020 21 FT Whtvhiyl12"flflle 32O512348-O021 21 M Wht vinyl 12" fi lite 320S1234S-0027 22CB Gray 4 cover 320S1234B4022 mastic Analyst(s) Wendy Lui (28) Due to magnification Imittfont inhamnt ki PUI, Mtaart may requira additional tsding by TEM to ooiAm MfaMh £ntlan approval of EMSL Analytical. Inc. EMSL't Habjttj Analyaii parfbrnwd by LA Tatting (NVLAP «20Q232-0) Appearance % Fibrous White Non-FBxous Homogeneous Whtte Non-Fibrous Homogeneous White Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Tan Non-Fibrous Homogeneous White Non-Fibrous Homogeneous White Non-Ftorous Homogeneous Tan <1% Cellulose Non-Ftorous Homogeneous Gray Non-Fibrous Homogeneous M fibara ki dmmioni batow the raaohition capabHty of PI MquanHtta*. TtwabovahMtraportraMaianlytolhalain tt**mt*l to thaowt o( analyse. EMSL baara no mtponrt yofthedwnt % Non-Fibrous % Type 100% Matrix NoneDetected 100% Matrix None Detected 100% Matrix NoneDetected M 100% Matrix NoneDetected 100% Matrix NoneDetocted 100% Matrix NoneDetected 100% Matrix NoneDetected 100%Matrocm NoneDetected \ '•- f' *\ ^, £>->(£t- or other approved signatory JKmaynoHaadaHctad. Samplairapartada*<1«ornanadilacMd i ladad and nay not ba rajwrwligadlnany Buuimnittiuut ttia axpravi .o-*-^ 1 LA Testing Pasadena Avenue, South Pasadena, CA 91030 ie: (323)264-9980 Fax; (323)254-9982 Email: paftadenalabftlatesHnfl.com Sarina Aryan Boogay Consulting 326 Main Street Vista, CA 92084 Fax: (760)407-4004 Phone: (760)407-4000 Project: 3368 Eureka PI / Carlsbad CA Customer ID: 32BOOG50 Customer PO: Received: 08/12/0510:50 AM LA Testing Order 320512348 LA Testing Proj: Analysis Date: 8/15/2005 Report Date: 8/16/2005 Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Materials via EPA 600/R-93/116 Method using Polarized Light Microscopy Non-Asbestos Sample 22M 320S12348402B 23 32051234S4023 ^RS1234B-O024 25 32051234^0025 Location Gray 4 cover mastic Wall material Ceiling panel Wall plaster Appearance % Fibrous % Non-Fibrous Beige 100% Matrix Non-Fibrous Homogeneous White <1% Cellulose 100% Matrix Non-Fibrous Homogeneous White <1% Cellulose 100% Matrix Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Beige <1% Cellulose 100% Matrix Non-Fibrous Homogeneous %Type None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected Analyst(s) Wendy Lui (28) or other approved signatory n^«yr«^^mooalWiiQbyTEMtocorfinii««t>e»to»qu«itti«. Tn»abwf»t«t« reportBtSL't InbHRyhNmiMlothecatofmlyiK. rt*! «»<1% or non»dtl«ct«d .'nterpfWalton and UH of Iwt IMUM an lh« roporaUIity of ttw etent Aj»»ly»i»p«rlonnedbyLAT»»l>io(MVLAP«200232-0) THIS IS THE LAST PAGE OF THE REPORT. APPENDIX 3 BULK SAMPLE LOG Sampling logs follow this sheet. 1.) MBCE Project 05-0810 3368 Eureka Place in Carlsbad. California APPENDICES t <s «nm <7S 2 5 I 4 j | 1 | £ 5 £ jt «:ii* § «j i <ft Bu_Z H ft • • ^••^»•o 1 i ^-8 w JC ouu£ It J» «JBJ*m X O K ft H ft 1 *& r? o ^3. (M J> •5 ^JD8*«n X U) B ft M ft i 1 |O u ^t» JE 2l§ 6 CO § X VD H ft H ft i* 'I ^•85§ § -8 VI j: I 8| V)ia * i i <j> »u. M ft side of fireplace (inside)-C otf> 2Ti 8J5riL m 1 X O Bul H ft Oi §»ii^ o c^ X <J) B • ft H ft de of west wing, near easiside (outside)V) .£ 5 1 M .i* <n N § X u> UU Bu_ M ft -8 'w1§•>-o "w ?a , f •»- w<*- ? *^i 00 § 1 X t& Bu_ H ft 1 u * i. ^7 13 .i* w « IE (h i 1 X <& Uft f-l i de of building, wall (insideW) .c 1 1 g. out•i? O«-i a \ X U> •• H ft |_4 £rner, ceiling of classroom8 1 i* 8 •8 1 «H 1-1 § I X u> •I a ft M lil ||er, ceiling of classroom•^ u ? *5u "S1 * CM *-i § X H> U* B ft |_| lil | U t ? 8 Q U UJ(O ? 8 1a. | CO«i "Q.UJ U.ceil'5u ceiling8 . U) 10 losetofWestID UL U. Jo 1 VD U. w i otou 00 U) u. H '5 'SVJ K v> 5 U) U. K IE CM Blil 8 CMCM (0 Btil h side of westear1 wingi CM U) .i* 8 u 1 VD U.est wingI ? 8 1 5 1 ACM CM O>5. APPENDIX 4 SAMPLE LOCTIONS SKETCH MBCE Project 054810 3368 Eureka Place in Carlsbad, California APPENDICES 0)ucJ 51 C5 (U L Ld o elev. wolr section A °9-R °2-R 10o 22o ~/~ 24^5~ ~ 7-R,, 230 c ft Walkway 16 Entrance 0 Q4 fcj^l Courtyard JTransite flue Oo 1 > is «r 20o O> _pO K Patio cover 4 O " 011 , 15 o1214 13 0 0 |°O"|J ' Clossroon Fireplace /k Key NO Sanple location <-R for roof samples)Not to Scale Sanple Locations for Suspected ACBMs 3368 Eureka Place Appendix E MISCELLANEOUS STANDARD DRAWINGS 5' MIN. CLEAN-OUTS IN YARD TO BE COVERED WITH 10"PLASticCOVER BVCAftSOH PART NO. Slo 6.A.E. CLEAN-OUTS IN CONCRETE TO HAVE CONCRETE BOX WITH TRAFFIC UD BY JftR OR BROOKS PART NO. 3-R-T. SEWER CLEAN-OUT RISERS TO BE FITTED WITH MALE SCREW IN I^LUG. OPTIONAL WYE (WHEN APPROVED). WYE WITH 1 FOOT STUB AND PLUG.OPTIONAL 90* ELBOW WHEN APPROVEDWYE (TO BE SET AT 45 DEGREE ANGLE). 1/V PER FOOT MIN. SLOPE COMPACTION SEE DWG. NO. S5. SECTION PLAN VIEW NOTES: 1. THE LATERAL SHALL BE BEDDED THE SAME AS THE MAIN LINE SEWER. 2 IN NO CASE SHALL A LATERAL CONNECT TO THE SEWER MAIN DIRECTLY ON TOP OF THE PIPE. 3. SEVER LATERALS SHALL HAVE A 2X MINIMUM SLOPE. ALL JOINTS ON SEWER LATERAL PIPE SHALL BE 4. COMPRESSION TYPE OR APPROVED SOLVENT WELD. FACE 5. AS-BUILT SEWER LATERAL LOCATIONS SHALL BE FURNISHED TO THE CITY INSPECTOR ON FORMS PROVIDED PRIOR TO FINAL APPROVAL OF WORK. 6. ALL LATERAL TRENCHES TO PROPERTY LINE AND SEWER MAIN TRENCHES TO BE COMPACTED PER S5. 7. CLEAN-OUT TO BE ADJUSTED TO GRADE AFTER FINAL FINISH GRADING. 8. FOR BACKFILL AROUND CLEANOUT RISER SEE DWG. S-5. NOTE 3. REV.APPROVED DATE CITY OF CARLSBAD SEWER LATERAL (WITH OPTIONAL WYE)SUPPLEMENTAL STANDARD NO. METER BY DISTRICT. FLANGED BALL VALVE BY DISTRICT NOTES: 1. DISTRICT WILL SET METER AND BALL VALVE 2. ALL COPPER JONTS SHALL BE SILVER SOLDERED IN CONFORMANCE WITH SPECIFICATIONS. 3. TAP TO MAIN TO BE MINIMUM OF 18" FROM NEAREST COUPLING OF TAP. 4. POSITION ANODE MIDWAY BETWEEN PIPELINE AND METER BOX. 5. FOR NON-CONTIGUOUS SIDEWALK SEE DETAIL DRAWING W3. SPEC/DWGITEMDESCRIPTION 2" COPPER SERVICE PIPE OUTLET ON PVC PRESSURE PIPE OUTLET ON ACP PIPE OUTLET ON CML&C STEEL PIPE OUTLET ON DUCTILE IRON PIPE ANGLE METER STOP METER BOX AND COVER (TRAFFIC AREA) METER BOX AND COVER "" r X C 90* ELL (SILVER SOLDERED^ NON-TRAFFIC AREA) 30 LB.ANODE WITH ANODE LEAD WIRE 25 APPROVED DATE CARLSBAD MUNICIPAL WATER DISTRICT 2" WATER SERVICE CONNECTION FOR I I/2' & 2' METERS CITY ENGINEER STANDARD DWG. NO. A.C. MAIN P.V.C. MAIN FOR WATER SERVICE CONNECTION ( TYP. ) SPEC/DWGITEMDESCRIPTION DOUBLE BAND BRASS SERVICE SADDLE. BRONZE DOUBLE STRAP SERVICE SADDLE. CORP. STOP 1" WATER SERVICE. CORP. STOP 2" WATER SERVICE. CORP. STOP 1" AIR VACUUM VALVEASSEMBLY. CORP. STOP 2" AIR VACUUM VALVE ASSEMBLY T* MANUAL AIR RELEASE ASSEMBLY" 2" BLOW-OFF MANUAL AIR RELEASE ASSEMBLY?5&6 7" MANUAL BLOW-OFF / AIR RELEASE ASSEMBLY.^&L REV.APPROVED DATE CARLSBAD MUNICIPAL WATER DISTRICT OUTLETS ON A.C. OR P.V.C. MAIN FOR I INCH THRU 2 INCH ASSEMBLIES NOTES: AND BACKftOW ASSEMBLY. 2. CONSTRUCT 2' HIGH RETAINING... PRIVATE CONSUMERS RESPONSIBILITY TO BE INSTALLED PUR BOOK 14.08.01" • —CALIFORNIA ADI 'ANT TO MUNICIPAL CODETLE 17 OF THE ITEM DESCRIPTION SPEC/DWG METER AND VALVE (BY DISTRICT 1. TYPE K HARD OR TYPE L HARD COPPER OR BRASS RISER. COPPER OR BRASS 90 ELBOW ( SOLDER JOINTS OR THREADED FITTINGS ). COPPER OR BRASS NIPPLE. 5 BRASS UNION. APPROVED BACKFLOW PREVENTER ASSEMBLY. CONCRETE THRUST BLOCK 8 METER BOX ( BY DISTRICT ). REV.APPROVED DATE CARLSBAD MUNICIPAL WATER DISTRICT 2 INCH AND UNDER BACKFLOW INSTALLATION 6-04 CITY ENQNEER DATE STANDARD DWG. NO.W20 ANODE LEAD ABOVE GRADECONNECTION ABOVE GRADE CONNECTION NOTES: 1. RISER PIPE SHALL BE WIRE BRUSHED TO CLEAN BRIGHT METAL 2. PIPE CLAMP SHALL BE LOCATED ON RISER PIPE. 3. WIRE INSULATION SHALL BE STRIPPED TO A MINIMUM LENGTH TO CONNECT WIRE TO PIPE CLAMP. PACKAGED BACKFILL COMPOSITION: 75% GYPSUM 20% BENTONITE 5% SODIUM SULFATE ZINC ANODE INGOT WEIGHT: PKGD. WEIGHT:S:S. APPROX. ITEM DESCRIPTION SPEC/PWQ ANODE LEAD N0.12 AWG STRD. COPPER WIRE W/ THW INSULATION. HEAT SHRINKABLE SLEEVE. 3 SILVER SOLDER CONNECTION. 1/4" DIAMETER GALVANIZED STEEL CORE. T-CwTT/sffT/^rt1* ^IKI^ AII ^v IKIJ^^^^^^9"X2"X30 ZINC ALLOY INGOT. CLOTH BAJ PACKAGED BACKFILL BRASS OR COPPER RISER PIPE. OR COPPER PIPE CLAMP WITH SCREW TERMINAL. REV.APPROVED DATE CARLSBAD MUNICIPAL WATER DISTRICT ZINC ANODE AND CONNECTORS FOR T AND 2" WATER SERVICE CITY ENGINEER -— 6-04 DATE STANDARD DWG. NO.W25 This drawing is NOT in conformonce with latest UBC and should be used with care and judgment. Edge of Footing ^ E ^_ _ .E '(M Layout Line Horizontal reinf. not shown TYPICAL SECTION over 1.63m (5'-4") TYPICAL SECTION 1.63m (5'-4") max DIMENSIONS AND REINFORCING STEEL H (max) T (min) W (min) @ Bars d) Bars © Bars (|) Bars max soil press. 1.12m (3'-8") 203mm 0'-8" 762mm (2'-4") #13@813mm (#4@32") $13 (#4) total 4 23.9 Kpa (SOOpsf) 1.63m (5'-4") 254mm (0'-10") 1.12m (3'-6") $13@813mm (#4@32") $13@813mm (#4@32") $13 (#4) total 5 28.7 Kpa (600psf) • 2.44m (8'-0") 305mm (1'-0") 1.63m (5'-4") $13@813mm (#4@32") $13@813mm (#4@32") 406mm (#6@16") $13 (#4) total 6 38.3 Kpo (BOOpsf) NOTES 1. See Standard Drawings C-7 and C-8 for additional notes and details. 2. Fill all block cells with grout. Revision By Approved Kerchevol T. Stonton Date SAN DIEGO REGIONAL STANDARD DRAWING MASONRY RETAINING WALL (LEVEL BACKFILL) RECOMMENDED BY THE SAN DIEGO REGIONAL STANDARDS COMMITTEE 6irp«raon R.C.E. 19246 Dote DRAWING NUMBER C-1 This drawing is NOT in conformonce with latest UBC and should be used with core and judgment. ,-#13(j|!4) bars continuous £"" Anchor-\ I u-Dimensions shown on plans i2 PLAN -MonolithicGutter -Curb Line n 51mm(2 Elev. shown on plans Elev. shown on plans See Anchor Detail- May be open channel J13(f4)076mm (3") C.C. Manhole frame and cover, see drawing M-2 102mm(4") rrin. 0 76mm(3") C.C. total 4 — 152mm(6j 7 on 76mm(3") X 76mm(3") Construction Joint SECTION A-A 0152mm(6") C.C. or construction through existing curb-Existing Gutter For oil new construction- Monolithic Gutter. 3-113(1+) 152mm— (6') SECTION B-B NOTES 1. Concrete shall be 332 kg/M3-C-22Mpa (560-C-3250) 2. D=inside diameter of pipe or depth of channel. 3. Section to be sloped laterally with top conforming to the grades of the existing sidewalk and curb. 4. Manhole frame and cover may be deleted with open channel. 5. Trowel finish top surface and reproduce markings of existing sidewalk and curb. 6. Trowel finish floor of outlet. 63.5mm (2 1/2") x 51mm (2")x6.35mm (1/4") x 1.44m (4'-0") Galvanized Steel Angle —• ANCHOR DETAIL LEGEND ON PLANS n Revision ORIGINAL Add Metric By Approved Kerchevol 12/75 Dote 11/02 SAN DIEGO REGIONAL STANDARD DRAWING CURB OUTLET - TYPE A RECOMMENDED BY THE SAN DIEGO REGIONAL STANDARDS COMMITTEE DRAWING NUMBER o>c 1o 1i52mm (6') 13mm (1/2") R • a>i 51mm (2") Weakened Plane Joint 03mm (8") 51mm (2") Weakened Plane Joint ___51mm (2 ) 152mm (6") CURB Area=0.083m (0.89 Sq. Ft.) 203mm (8") CURB Area=0.1m (1.09 Sq. Ft.) Existing Curb 3mm (1/2") 152mm (6") Weakened Plane Joint —38mm (1-1/2") except where elevations shown indicate otherwise GUTTER NOTES 1. Concrete shall be 308kg/M2-C-17-Mpa (520-C-2500). 2. See Standard Drawing G-10 for joint details. 3. Slope top of curb 6.35mm (1/4"^ per foot toward street. LEGEND ON PLANS 152mm (6") curb 4Revision ORIGINAL Add Metric §1 Approved Kerchcvol 12/75 T. Stonton Dote 03/03 SAN DIEGO REGIONAL STANDARD DRAWING CURBS AND GUTTER - SEPARATE RECOMMENDED BY THE SAN DIEGOREGIONAL STANDARDS COMM.TTEE R.C.E. 19246 Date DRAWING NUMBER